527392
25
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/180
Next page
Owners Manual
Owner’s Manual (this document)
Read this rst. It explains the basic things you need to know in
order to use the BK-9.
PDF Manual (download from the Web)
• Tone & Drum Kit List
This is a list of the sounds contained in the BK-9.
• Rhythm List
This is a list of the rhythms contained in the BK-9.
• MIDI Implementation
This is detailed information about MIDI messages.
To obtain the PDF manual
1.
Enter the following URL in your computer.
http://www.roland.com/manuals/
2. Choose “BK-9” as the product name.
This product complies with the requirements of EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
For EU Countries
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B limit.
Any unauthorized changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING
This product contains chemicals known to cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm, including lead.
For C.A. US
(
Proposition 65
)
For Canada
CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B)
For Korea
機種名、機種のタイプ、USでの販売責任者とその住所、電話番号を記載する。
※ 記入例:
For the USA
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Compliance Information Statement
Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
Model Name :
Type of Equipment :
Responsible Party :
Address :
Telephone :
V-STUDIO 20 (Model Number: VS-20)
USB Audio Controller
Cakewalk Inc.
268 Summer Street, Boston, MA 02210
02210(617) 423-9004
V-STUDIO 20 (Model Number: VS-20)
USB Audio Controller
Cakewalk Inc.
268 Summer Street, Boston, MA 02210
02210(617) 423-9004
BK-9
Backing Keyboard
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938
(323) 890-3700
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
BLUE:
BROWN:
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.
NEUTRAL
LIVE
For the U.K.
Owners Manual
Thank you and congratulations on your choice of the Roland BK-9 Backing Keyboard.
To ensure that you obtain the maximum enjoyment and take full advantage of the BK-9’s functionality, please read this
owners manual carefully.
About This Manual
You should rst read the chapter “6. Before You Start Using BK-9” (p. 20). It explains how to connect the AC adaptor and turn
on the power. This Owners Manual explains everything, from the BK-9’s basic operations to more advanced functions.
Conventions Used in This Manual
Text enclosed in square brackets [ ] indicates the name of a button or knob. Example: the [MENU] button.
Reference pages are indicated by (p. **).
The following symbols are used.
NOTE
This indicates an important note; be sure to read it.
MEMO
This indicates a memo regarding the setting or function; read it as desired.
TIPS
This indicates a useful hint for operation; read it as necessary.
* The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display. Note,
however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system (e.g., include newer sounds), so what you
actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual.
Before using this instrument, carefully read “Using the Unit Safely (p. 4) and “Important Notes” (p. 6).
Those sections provide information concerning the proper operation of the BK-9. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you
have gained a good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, the manual should be read in its entirety. The manual
should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference
Copyright © 2013 ROLAND EUROPE. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of Roland Europe S.p.a.
Roland and GS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Roland Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
1. Using the Unit Safely
4
Used for instructions intended to alert the
user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic animals
or pets.
Used for instructions intended to alert the
user to the risk of death or severe injury
should the unit be used improperly.
The symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the
case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-cord
plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or
warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the triangle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general
cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be
carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must
not be done is indicated by the design contained within
the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that
the unit must never be disassembled.
About WARNING and CAUTION Notices
About the Symbols
ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING
WARNING
To completely turn o power to the unit, pull out the
plug from the outlet
Even with the power switch turned o,
this unit is not completely separated from
its main source of power. When the power
needs to be completely turned o, turn
o the power switch on the unit, then
pull out the plug from the outlet. For this
reason, the outlet into which you choose
to connect the power cord’s plug should
be one that is within easy reach and
readily accessible.
Do not disassemble or modify by yourself
Do not open (or modify in any way) the
unit or its AC adaptor.
Do not repair or replace parts by yourself
Do not attempt to repair the unit, or
replace parts within it (except when this
manual provides specic instructions
directing you to do so). Refer all servicing
to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information”
page.
Do not use or store in the following types of
locations
Subject to temperature extremes (e.g.,
direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle,
near a heating duct, on top of heat-
generating equipment); or are
Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet
oors); or are
Exposed to steam or smoke; or are
Subject to salt exposure; or are
Humid; or are
Exposed to rain; or are
Dusty or sandy; or are
Subject to high levels of vibration and
shakiness.
Use only KS-12 that is recommended
This unit should be used only with a rack
or stand that is recommended by Roland.
WARNING
Do not place in an unstable location
When using the unit with a rack or stand
recommended by Roland, the rack or
stand must be carefully placed so it is level
and sure to remain stable. If not using a
rack or stand, you still need to make sure
that any location you choose for placing
the unit provides a level surface that will
properly support the unit, and keep it
from wobbling.
Do not place in an unstable location
Make sure you always have the unit
placed so it is level and sure to remain
stable. Never place it on stands that could
wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
Use only the included AC adaptor and the correct voltage
Be sure to use only the AC adaptor
included with the unit. Also, make sure
the line voltage at the installation matches
the input voltage specied on the AC
adaptor’s body. Other AC adaptors may
use a dierent polarity, or be designed
for a dierent voltage, so their use could
result in damage, malfunction, or electric
shock.
Use only the included power cord
Use only the attached power-supply cord.
Also, the included power cord must not be
used with any other device.
Do not bend the power cord or place heavy objects on it
Do not excessively twist or bend the
power cord, nor place heavy objects on it.
Doing so can damage the cord, producing
severed elements and short circuits.
Damaged cords are re and shock hazards!
Avoid extended use at high volume
This unit, either alone or in combination
with an amplier and headphones or
speakers, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent
hearing loss. Do not operate for a long
period of time at a high volume level, or
at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing
in the ears, you should immediately stop
using the unit, and consult an audiologist.
WARNING
Don’t allow foreign objects or liquids to enter unit;
never place containers with liquid on unit
Do not place containers containing liquid
(e.g., a glass of water, ower vases) on this
product. Never allow foreign objects (e.g.,
ammable objects, coins, wires) or liquids
(e.g., water or juice) to enter this product.
Doing so may cause short circuits, faulty
operation, or other malfunctions.
Do not drop or subject to strong impact
Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
Adults must provide supervision in places where
children are present
When using the unit in locations where
children are present, be careful so no
mishandling of the unit can take place. An
adult should always be on hand to provide
supervision and guidance.
Turn o the unit if an abnormality or malfunction
occurs
Immediately turn the unit o, remove the
AC adaptor from the outlet, and request
servicing by your retailer, the nearest
Roland Service Center, or an authorized
Roland distributor, as listed on the
“Information page when:
The AC adaptor, the power-supply cord,
or the plug has been damaged; or
If smoke or unusual odor occurs; or
Objects have fallen into, or liquid has
been spilled onto the unit; or
The unit has been exposed to rain (or
otherwise has become wet); or
The unit does not appear to operate
normally or exhibits a marked change in
performance.
5
WARNING
Do not share an outlet with an unreasonable
number of other devices
Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord
to share an outlet with an unreasonable
number of other devices. Be especially
careful when using extension cords—the
total power used by all devices you have
connected to the extension cord’s outlet
must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord.
Excessive loads can cause the insulation
on the cord to heat up and eventually
melt through.
Do not use overseas
Before using the unit in a foreign country,
consult with your retailer, the nearest
Roland Service Center, or an authorized
Roland distributor, as listed on the
“Information page.
CAUTION
Place in a well ventilated location
The unit and the AC adaptor should be
located so their location or position does
not interfere with their proper ventilation.
Grasp the plug when connecting or disconnecting
the AC adaptor
Always grasp only the plug on the AC
adaptor cord when plugging into, or
unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
Periodically clean the AC adaptor’s plug
At regular intervals, you should unplug
the AC adaptor and clean it by using
a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other
accumulations away from its prongs.
Also, disconnect the power plug from
the power outlet whenever the unit is to
remain unused for an extended period of
time. Any accumulation of dust between
the power plug and the power outlet can
result in poor insulation and lead to re.
Manage cables for safety
Try to prevent cords and cables from
becoming entangled. Also, all cords and
cables should be placed so they are out of
the reach of children.
Avoid climbing on top of the unit, or placing heavy
objects on it
Never climb on top of, nor place heavy
objects on the unit.
Do not connect or disconnect the AC adaptor with
wet hands
Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs
with wet hands when plugging into, or
unplugging from, an outlet or this unit.
Disconnect everything before moving the unit
Before moving the unit, disconnect the
AC adaptor and all cords coming from
external devices.
Unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet before
cleaning
Before cleaning the unit, turn it o and
unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet
(p. 25).
If there is a possibility of lightning strike, disconnect
the AC adaptor from the outlet
Whenever you suspect the possibility of
lightning in your area, disconnect the AC
adaptor from the outlet.
Handle the ground terminal carefully
If you remove the screw from the ground
terminal, be sure to replace it; don’t leave
it lying around where it could accidently
be swallowed by small children. When
refastening the screw, make that it is rmly
fastened, so it won’t come loose.
CAUTION
Precautions concerning use of phantom power
supply
Always turn the phantom power o
when connecting any device other than
condenser microphones that require
phantom power. You risk causing damage
if you mistakenly supply phantom power
to dynamic microphones, audio playback
devices, or other devices that don’t
require such power. Be sure to check the
specications of any microphone you
intend to use by referring to the manual
that came with it.
(This instrument’s phantom power: 48 V DC, 10 mA
Max)
2. Important Notes
6
In addition to the items listed under “Using the unit safely on p. 4, please read and observe the following:
Power Supply
Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet
that is being used by an electrical appliance that
is controlled by an inverter or a motor (such as a
refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or
air conditioner). Depending on the way in which
the electrical appliance is used, power supply noise
may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce
audible noise. If it is not practical to use a separate
electrical outlet, connect a power supply noise lter
between this unit and the electrical outlet.
The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after
long hours of consecutive use. This is normal, and is
not a cause for concern.
To prevent malfunction and equipment failure,
always make sure to turn o the power on all your
equipment before you make any connections.
With the factory settings, the BK-9 will
automatically be switched o 30 minutes after you
stop playing or operating the unit. If you don’t want
the unit to turn o automatically, change the AUTO
OFF” setting to “OFF” as described on p. 143.
NOTE
The settings you were editing will be lost when the
unit is turned o. If you want to keep your settings,
you must save your settings before turning the
unit o.
Placement
Using the unit near power ampliers (or other
equipment containing large power transformers)
may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change
the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away
from the source of interference.
This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of
such receivers.
Noise may be produced if wireless communications
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the
vicinity of this unit. Such noise could occur when
receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing.
Should you experience such problems, you should
relocate such wireless devices so they are at a
greater distance from this unit, or switch them o.
Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place
it near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside
an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it to
temperature extremes. Excessive heat can deform
or discolor the unit.
When moved from one location to another where
the temperature and/or humidity is very dierent,
water droplets (condensation) may form inside
the unit. Damage or malfunction may result if you
attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore,
before using the unit, you must allow it to stand
for several hours, until the condensation has
completely evaporated.
Do not allow objects to remain on top of the
keyboard. This can be the cause of malfunction,
such as keys ceasing to produce sound.
Depending on the material and temperature of the
surface on which you place the unit, its rubber feet
may discolor or mar the surface.
You can place a piece of felt or cloth under the
rubber feet to prevent this from happening. If you
do so, please make sure that the unit will not slip or
move accidentally.
Do not put anything that contains water on this
unit. Also, avoid the use of insecticides, perfumes,
alcohol, nail polish, spray cans, etc., near the unit.
Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit
using a dry, soft cloth.
Maintenance
For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft,
dry cloth or one that has been slightly dampened
with water. To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth
impregnated with a mild, non-abrasive detergent.
Afterwards, be sure to wipe the unit thoroughly
with a soft, dry cloth.
Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of
any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration
and/or deformation.
Additional Precautions
Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the
contents of data that was stored on a USB memory
once it has been lost. Roland Europe assumes no
liability concerning such loss of data.
Use a reasonable amount of care when using the
unit’s buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when
using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can
lead to malfunctions.
Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
When disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector
itself—never pull on the cable. This way you will
avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cables
internal elements.
To avoid disturbing others nearby, try to keep the
unit’s volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer
to use headphones, so you do not need to be
concerned about those around you.
When you need to transport the unit, package it
in the box (including padding) that it came in, if
possible. Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent
packaging materials.
Do not apply undue force to the music stand while
it is in use.
Use only the specied expression pedal (EV-
series; sold separately). By connecting any other
expression pedals, you risk causing malfunction
and/or damage to the unit.
Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not
use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting
to this unit. The use of such cables can cause the
sound level to be extremely low, or impossible
to hear. For information on cable specications,
contact the manufacturer of the cable.
The sensitivity of the D Beam controller will change
depending on the amount of light in the vicinity of
the unit. If it does not function as you expect, adjust
the sensitivity as appropriate for the brightness of
your location.
When opening/closing the USB memory cover,
please be careful not to get your ngers pinched
between the movable part and the panel. In places
where small children are present, make sure that an
adult provides supervision and guidance.
Storage devices that can be connected
to the BK-9’s USB MEMORY port
The BK-9 allows you to connect commercially
available USB Flash memory. You can purchase
such devices at a computer store, a digital camera
dealer, etc.
Though external hard disks with a capacity in
excess of 2TB can be used, please bear in mind that
the BK-9 can manage a maximum of 2TB. (FAT-32
formatted storage devices can be used right away.)
Use USB memory sold by Roland (M-UF-series).
We cannot guarantee operation if any other USB
memory is used.
Before using external USB storage
devices
Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in—
until it is rmly in place.
USB memories are constructed using precision
components; handle the storage devices carefully,
paying particular note to the following.
To prevent damage to the USB memory from
static electricity, be sure to discharge any static
electricity from your own body before handling
the cards.
Do not touch or allow metal to come into
contact with the contact portion of the USB
memory.
Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong
shock or vibration.
Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed
vehicles, or other such locations.
Do not allow USB memories to become wet.
Do not disassemble or modify the USB memory.
Never touch the terminals of the USB memory. Also,
avoid getting the terminals dirty.
When connecting a USB memory, position it
horizontally with the BK-9’s USB MEMORY port
and insert it without using excessive force. The
USB MEMORY port may be damaged if you use
excessive force when inserting a USB memory.
Do not connect or disconnect a USB drive while it
is being rear from, or written to (i.e., while the USB
ash access indicator blinks).
Do not insert anything other than a USB memory
(e.g., wire, coins, other types of device) into the USB
MEMORY port. Doing so will damage the BK-9’s USB
MEMORY port.
Never connect your USB memory to the BK-9 via a
USB hub.
Do not connect or disconnect a USB drive while it
is being rear from, or written to (i.e., while the USB
ash access indicator blinks).
Liability and copyright
Recording, duplication, distribution, sale, lease,
performance, or broadcast of copyrighted material
(musical works, visual works, broadcasts, live
performances, etc.) belonging to a third party in
part or in whole without the permission of the
copyright owner is forbidden by law.
Do not use this unit for purposes that could
infringe on a copyright held by a third party. Roland
assumes no responsibility whatsoever with regard
to any infringements of third-party copyrights
arising through your use of this unit.
Roland, SuperNATURAL are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Roland Corporation in
the United States and/or other countries.
Company names and product names mentioned
in this document are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective owners.
MPEG Layer-3 audio compression technology
is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS Corporation and
THOMSON Multimedia Corporation.
Copyright © 2003 by Bitstream, Inc. All rights
reserved. Bitstream Vera is a trademark of Bitstream,
Inc.
MMP (Moore Microprocessor Portfolio) refers to a
patent portfolio concerned with microprocessor
architecture, which was developed by Technology
Properties Limited (TPL). Roland has licensed this
technology from the TPL group.
7
Microphone Connection
Sing while accompanying yourself
By plugging an optional microphone (48 V phantom
power supported) into BK-9’s MIC IN jack, you can
enjoy karaoke and use the BK-9 to accompany
yourself while you sing. The lyrics can also be
transmitted to the external screen.
p.21
3. Look at What you Can Do!
Play the Keyboard
Play using various sounds
This keyboard contains a wide variety of high
quality tones including a selection of dedicate
SuperNATURAL sounds.
You can freely select and perform using these tones.
Enjoy dedicated Harmonic Bars
The virtual tone wheel sound generator oers a
completely realistic and expressive organ experience,
including the characteristic eects and sound
reproduction methods of vintage organs.
Play favorite tones
Using this function, you can create four lists (UPPER1,
UPPER2, LOWER, M. BASS) of 10 frequently used
sounds and recall them instantly.
Select tones that match the atmosphere of the
current rhythm (One Touch)
There are four One Touch memories per rhythm.
Play with accompaniment
The BK-9 can supply a wide variety of high quality
internal accompaniments (rhythm) for the music you
play.
You can also play back rhythms located in your USB
memory.
Enhance your performance (Audio
Key)
Using this function, you can assign up to 7 audio
phrases (mp3 and WAVE) to the rightmost keys of the
BK-9’s keyboard and start and stop them in a true DJ
fashion.
The audio phrases can be synchronized with the
current rhythm.
p. 28
p. 29
p. 35
p. 41
p. 36
p. 65
Record Songs
Record your performance as audio
data
Your BK-9 allows you to record in WAVE format your
performance including the microphone and Audio In
signal.
Record your performance as MIDI
data
Your BK-9 allows you to record a song as MIDI data.
Record by the 16-Track sequencer
Your BK-9 contains a powerful sequencer with a host
of edit functions. You can use it to record a new song
or to edit existing ones.
Record a chord sequence for instant
use
The CHORD LOOP function allows to record a chord
sequence for instant use. That sequence is played
back in a loop. You can use the sequence of chords to
pilot the currently selected rhythm.
p.75
p.76
p.81
p.79
Play Songs (SMF and Audio)
Play a song
This unit can play songs in audio (WAVE or mp3) and
SMF format directly by your USB memory.
Mute tracks or cancel the melody
You can mute tracks of songs (SMF) and rhythms and
attenuate the vocal part at the center of stereo image
(“Center Cancel”) of an audio le (WAVE or mp3).
p. 44
p. 46
Smf/Rhythm edit Functions
Makeup Tools for Rhythm or Song
A simple and intuitive way to edit the selected rhythm or
SMF song (Standard MIDI File) without paying too much
attention to the underlying parameters.
p. 97
Create new rhythms
Rhythm composer
The Rhythm Composer function allows you to create
new rhythms and to edit (i.e. change) existing ones,
and then save them in a USB memory.
p.103
8
Convenient Functions
Work with the Music Assistant
It is a collection of registrations for given songs that
select the most appropriate rhythm and sounds for
the Keyboard parts.
Transpose the key of the keyboard, Rhythm or
Song
This function allows you to transpose BK-9’s pitch in
semi-tone steps.
Change the octave
This function allows you to transpose the real-time
parts up or down in octave steps.
Practice in keeping a consistent tempo
(Metronome)
You can perform while the metronome sounds.
You can set the Volume, Tempo, Time Signature and
Count In.
The metronome signals can be transmitted to BK-9’s
METRONOME OUT jack.
p. 57
p. 52
p. 52
p. 55
Energy-Ecient Design
The power will turn o after a specied time has elapsed
When thirty minutes have elapsed since you last played or operated the BK-9, the power will turn o automatically.
* If you dont want the power to turn o automatically, change the Auto O ” setting (p. 143).
Organize your performance
Create your performance list
To prepare sets of Performance memories for any
event like weddings, parties, anniversaries, etc.
p. 57
p.25
Wireless LAN Functions
Ad-Hoc and WPS connection
By inserting the wireless USB Adapter (WNA1100-RL;
sold separately) into the BK-9’s USB MEMORY port,
you’ll be able to use wireless compatible applications
(such as the Air Recorder iPhone app).
p. 162
Wide view of BK-9’s parameters
New interface concept
The double display of BK-9 was designed to put its
massive array of functions at your ngertips.
Parameters that belong together from a musicians
point of view are usually located on the adjacent
display. This way setting them results to be really
simplied.
Connect an external screen
Slide show and lyrics
The BK-9’s VIDEO OUTPUT socket can be connected to
an external screen, allowing your audience or fellow
musicians to follow the lyrics and chord symbols
(only SMF les) of the songs you perform.
You can also view digital pictures in the .jpg format
you took yourself
p.47,73
Control your performance
D-BEAM controller
The BK-9 has the D-BEAM Controller for intuitive song
and Rhythm playback control and additional DJ-like
eects via movements over an invisible beam of
infrared light.
Assignable Switches (S1 ~ S4)
The BK-9 has four assignable switches. You can use
them to directly access frequently used functions that
are only available via the function menu.
Assignable FC-7 footswitch (optional)
The BK-9 has a FC-7 PEDAL socket. You can connect an
optional FC-7 PEDAL unit that allows you to start, stop
and select Rhythm divisions by foot. The functions of
this footswitch unit are programmable.
Mixer Function
The ten sliders allow you to balance in real time the
various Keyboard parts of your BK-9 and to control
various eects.
p.53
p.53
p. 33
p.26
p.146
User Drum Kit Function
This function lets users from any country and any
culture use BK-9 Drum sounds in a exible manner,
according to their own inspiration and musical tastes.
p. 120
9
10
Contents
1. Using the Unit Safely ........................................ 4
2. Important Notes ............................................6
3. Look at What you Can Do! ...................................8
4. Panel Description ..........................................14
Left Front Panel .............................................14
Right Front Panel ............................................15
Rear Panel ..................................................17
5. Shortcut List ...............................................18
6. Before You Start Using BK-9 ................................20
Connecting the AC Adaptor .................................20
Ground Terminal ..............................................20
Connecting External Audio Equipment ......................20
Listening Through Headphones .............................21
Connecting a Microphone ...................................21
Connecting an Optional Vocal Performer (VE-5, VE-20) ........22
Connecting a MIDI Device ...................................22
Connecting Optional Pedals .................................22
Connecting the BK-9 to Your Computer ......................23
Connecting the BK-9 to Your iPad ............................23
Connecting a Television Set ..................................23
Installing the Music Rest .....................................24
Placing the BK-9 on the Stand ...............................24
Turning the Power On/O ...................................24
Turning the Power On ........................................24
Turning the Power O ........................................25
Demo of the BK-9 ...........................................25
7. Basic Operation of the BK-9 ................................26
About the Displays and Cursor Operation ....................26
Selecting the Display to Operate on It ........................26
Main Page ....................................................26
Browsing Windows and Setting Parameter Values ............26
How to type a name in BK-9 ..................................27
Using the ‘Help function ......................................27
8. Playing the BK-9’s Real-Time Parts ..........................28
Selecting Piano and Organ Mode Easily ......................28
Selecting Tones and Playing the Keyboard ...................28
About SuperNATURAL Sounds ..............................29
Using the Harmonic Bars ....................................29
What is SuperNATURAL? .........................29
What is Behavior Modeling Technology? .........29
Using the Registration Memories .............................30
Setting Example of Harmonic Bars ............................31
Hard Rock .......................................31
Pop .............................................31
Progressive Rock ................................31
Jazz .............................................31
Rock ............................................31
Blue .............................................31
Pipe Organ ......................................31
Jazz (manual bass) ...............................31
Organ eects .................................................32
Play Dierent Voices with the Left and Right Hands (Split) ....32
Using the ‘Numeric’ function to Select Tones, Rhythms and
Performances ...............................................33
Setting the Volume of the Real-Time Parts or Rhythm Parts
(Mixer) ......................................................33
Sound Eects for the real-time parts .........................34
9. Favorite Tones .............................................35
Recalling a Favorite Tone ....................................35
Creating the List of Favorite Tones ...........................35
10. Playing with Automatic Accompaniments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
About the Rhythms .........................................36
Structure of the Rhythm Accompaniments ...................36
Using Rhythms ..............................................36
[START/STOP] / [ */, ] .........................................36
[SYNC START] / [ + ] ........................................ 36
VARIATION [1], [2], [3], [4] .....................................37
[INTRO] / [ ' ] ................................................37
[ENDING] / [ & ] ...............................................37
[BASS INV] ....................................................37
[AUTO FILL IN] ................................................38
Selecting Rhythms ..........................................38
Playing Back Rhythms .......................................38
11. One Touch Memories: Why using them? ...................41
Select a ‘One Touch’ .........................................41
Deselect ‘One Touch’ .........................................41
How Can You Tell Whether the ONE TOUCH Function is On
or O? ......................................................42
Programming Your Own ONE TOUCH Settings (One Touch
Edit) ........................................................42
What a One Touch memory saves .............................43
12. Using the BK-9 as a USB player ............................44
Getting Ready to Use the BK-9 as a USB Player ................44
File types the BK-9 can read and play back ....................44
Selecting a Song or Rhythm on a USB Memory ...............44
Caution when Playing Back Audio Files ....44
Playing Back a Song or Rhythm from a USB Memory ..........45
Activating the ‘Play All Songs’ parameter for the USB memory 45
Activating the ‘Play All Songs’ function ........................45
Deactivating the ‘Play All Songs’ function .....................46
Using Track Mute and ‘Center Cancel’ ........................46
Selecting the Track(s) to Mute for Rhythms or SMF Songs .....46
Activating the Lyrics .........................................47
Using the “Mark & Jump” function (only for SMF) .............48
Creating “Mark locations .....................................48
Saving the Song with the “Mark locations inside .............49
Play using the “Mark” location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
13. Operations on USB Memory ...............................50
Changing the Name of a File or Folder (Rename) .............50
Deleting a File or Folder (Delete) .............................50
Using the ‘Search Function to Locate Songs or Rhythms ......50
14. Other important functions ................................52
Transposing to a Dierent Key ...............................52
Changing the Octave ........................................52
Using the ‘Melody Intell(igent)’ Function .....................52
Assign Switches [S1], [S2], [S3], [S4] ..........................53
How to Assign a Function .....................................53
How to Recall the Assigned Functions ........................53
Using the Assign Switches with SuperNATURAL Tones. .......53
Using the D-BEAM Controller ................................53
Using the Metronome .......................................55
Metronome Settings ..........................................55
15. Performance Lists ........................................57
Performance/Music Assistant/Factory Songs Info .............57
Loading a Performance/‘Music Assistant’/‘Factory Songs’ List .57
Recalling a Performance/‘Music Assistant’/‘Factory Songs’
memory ....................................................57
Quickly Locating Performance Memories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Recall Performance Memories by [NUMERIC] button .........58
Recall Performance Memories by [FAVORITE] button .........58
Saving your Settings as a Performance .......................59
Other Performance List Functions ............................59
Rename a Performance List ...................................59
Delete a Performance List .....................................60
Create a New Performance List ...............................60
Importing User Program Sets created for previous Roland
backing instruments ..........................................60
Editing Performance Memories ..............................61
Delete a Performance memory ...............................61
Move a Performance ..........................................61
11
Rename a Performance .......................................62
Copy Performances ...........................................62
Saving the edited Performance List ...........................63
Filtering Performance Memories Settings (Lock function) .....63
Why is it Convenient to Use Filters (Lock Function)? ...........63
Which Parameter Can you Filter? ..............................63
How to Switch Filters On/O Directly by Panel ................63
16. Using Audio Phrases (Audio Key) ..........................65
Creating an Audio Key Set ...................................65
Initialize the Audio Key Internal Memory (Make
New) ............................................65
Using an Audio Drum Loop ...............65
Using the FC-7 footswitch unit Board ......65
Assign audio les to the various keys. ............66
Specifying the audio phrase length. ..............66
Fine Tuning. .....................................67
Synchronizing the Audio Phrase Loop with the
Rhythm Loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Assigning a Name to Your new Audio Phrase .................68
Basic playback functions for your phrases ....................68
Special playback functions ..................................69
Saving and loading Audio Key Sets ..........................70
Saving your new or edited Audio Key Set .........70
Loading an Audio Key Set ........................70
Playing Back your Phrases ...................................71
Synchronize your Phrases with the Start of Rhythm Playback .71
Synchronize your Phrases with the Start and Stop of Rhythm
Playback ......................................................71
How to Save and recall an Audio Key Set into a Performance ..71
How to Use the Audio Key Set in the MIDI Data Recorder. .....72
17. Adding pictures to the music ..............................73
Displaying photos automatically .............................73
Enjoying a VIMA TUNES slide show ...........................73
Enjoying a slide show of your own pictures ...................73
Using one of your own pictures as background ...............74
‘User’ background and slide shows ...............74
Picture display and song lyrics ...................74
18. Recording your Performance ..............................75
Recording your Performance as Audio Data ..................75
Recording .....................................................75
Listening to your recording ...................................76
Recording your own as well as your Band’s Performances ....76
Recording your Performance as MIDI Data ...................76
Tracks, MIDI channels and 16-Track Sequencer. ...............78
19. Recording a Chord Sequence (Chord Loop) ................79
“Realtime” chord sequencing (Loop Mode) ...................79
Recording a Chords Sequence for an Entire Song
(Sequencer Mode). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Playing back a Chords Sequence .............................79
Saving the Chords Sequence ................................79
Loading a Chords Sequence .................................80
20. Working with the 16-Track Sequencer .....................81
Important Things Before Using 16-Track Sequencer. ..........81
Selecting the 16-Track Sequencer ............................81
About the sequencer’s main pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Left display ...................................................81
Right display .................................................81
MUTE & SOLO function ..........................81
Recording a Song from Scratch ..............................81
Initialize a Song ...............................................81
Before Starting to Record .....................................82
Recording an Existing Song ..................................83
Saving Your Song. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
If You Leave the 16-Track Sequencer Without Save Your Song. 84
Editing one or several tracks (Track Edit) .....................84
QUANTIZE ....................................................85
ERASE .........................................................86
DELETE .......................................................86
COPY .........................................................87
INSERT ........................................................87
KEY (Transpose) ...............................................88
CHANGE VELOCITY ...........................................88
CHANGE GATE TIME ..........................................89
MERGE ........................................................89
GLOBAL CHANGE .............................................90
SHIFT CLOCK ..................................................90
TRACK EXCHANGE ............................................91
Editing Song using Micro Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Other edit operations .........................................92
Create Event ....................................92
Erase Event ......................................92
Move Event .....................................92
Copy Event and Place Event ......................93
Editing the Master Track .....................................93
Other edit operations .........................................95
Create Event ....................................95
Erase Event ......................................95
Move Event .....................................95
Copy Event and Place Event ......................96
21. How to Edit Rhythm or SMF (Makeup Tools) ................97
Using the Makeup Tools .....................................97
Parameters in the “Palette page : ................97
Tone (T), Drum (D ) .......................98
Mute (T)/Drum Mute (D ) .................98
Solo ......................................98
Perc Mute (D ) ............................98
Volume ...................................98
Reverb ...................................98
Chorus ...................................98
Panpot ...................................98
Octave (T) ................................98
Velocity ..................................98
Cut O ...................................98
Resonance ...............................98
Attack (T) ................................99
Decay (T) .................................99
Release (T) ...............................99
Vibrato Rate (T) ...........................99
Vibrato Depth (T) .........................99
Vibrato Delay (T) .........................99
Mfx ......................................99
Mfx Type .................................99
Mfx Edit ..................................99
Equalizer .................................99
Edit EQ ...................................99
Drum Instrument (D ) ....................100
Undo Changes ..........................100
Common ................................................... 101
To commit your changes (Freeze Data) .....................101
Saving Your New Rhythm or Song (SMF) Version in USB
Memory .................................................. 101
22. Rhythm Composer .......................................103
What are Rhythms? ........................................ 103
Patterns (Divisions) .............................103
Tracks ..........................................103
Looped vs. one-shot patterns ...................103
Several drum tracks are possible ................103
Starting to Make your Own Rhythm ........................ 103
Getting ready for the rst track ..................104
Recording a rhythm pattern ....................106
Saving your Rhythm ........................................ 106
Recording Other Tracks and Divisions .......................107
Muting tracks while recording others .......................107
Solo ............................................108
Try the Rhythm Outside of the Composer ..................108
Rhythm Track Edit functions ...............................108
Quantize .......................................109
Erase ...........................................109
Delete .........................................110
Copy ...........................................111
Insert ..........................................112
Key (transposition) .............................112
Change Velocity ................................113
Change Gate Time ..............................113
12
Global Change .................................114
Shift Clock .....................................115
Track Length ...................................115
Time Signature .................................116
Editing Individual Rhythm Events (Micro Edit) ..............116
Other Edit Operations ...................................... 118
Create Event ...................................118
Erase Event .....................................118
Move Event ....................................118
Copy Event .....................................119
Place Event .....................................119
23. User Drum Kit function ..................................120
Creating your own User Drum Kit .......................... 120
Changing a supplied User Drum Kit (KBU1~4, RSU1) ....120
Selecting a User Drum Kit .......................120
Editing the User Drum Kit ......................120
Editing a Single Drum Instrument ...............121
Saving the User Drum Kit .......................122
Exporting a new User Drum Kit .............................122
Restoring Notes .............................................122
Copying a Preset Drum Kit .................................. 123
Initializing a User Drum Kit .................................. 124
Exporting and Importing a User Drum Kit .................. 124
Using your User Drum Kits in real-time .....................125
Interacting with Rhythms & Songs (SMF) ...................126
Additional Drum Kits ......................................126
24. Menu options ...........................................127
General procedure ........................................127
External Lyrics .............................................127
‘Performance Edit’ parameters .............................127
Tone Part View’ parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Tone ....................................128
Volume ..................................128
Reverb Send .............................128
Chorus Send .............................128
Panpot ..................................128
Key Touch (velocity sensitivity) ...........128
Eq Part Edit ..............................128
Mfx .....................................129
Expression Pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Exp Pedal Down and Exp Pedal Up .......129
Hold Pedal ..............................129
Octave Shift .............................129
Coarse Tune .............................129
Fine Tune ................................129
Portamento Mode .......................129
Portamento Time ........................129
Bender Assign ...........................130
Bender Range ...........................130
Modulation Assign. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Slider CC1, Slider CC2, Slider CC3 .........130
Tone Edit (Not for all tone) ...............130
SuperNATURAL Edit (Only if a
SuperNATURAL tone is selected) .........131
Tone Part Eects’ parameters ............................... 131
Mfx1 ...........................................131
Mfx(1) Switch ............................131
Mfx(1) Type ..............................131
Mfx(1) Edit ..............................131
Mfx(1) Controls ..........................132
Mfx2 ...........................................132
Reverb .........................................132
Chorus .........................................133
Upper1, Upper2, Lower, MBass ..................134
Organ Commons ........................................... 134
Organ Volume ...........................134
Organ Reverb Send ......................134
On Click .................................134
O Click .................................134
PercSoftLevel ............................134
PercNormalLevel ........................134
PercSlowTime ...........................134
PercFastTime ............................134
PercRecharge ............................134
PercHBarLevel ...........................134
Percussion N/S (Normal/Soft) ............135
Leakage .................................135
VibCho Switch ...........................135
VibCho Type .............................135
VibCho Vintage ..........................135
Rot Switch ...............................135
Rot Speed ...............................135
Rot WF Spread, Rot TW Spread ...........135
Rot WF Level, Rot TW Level ...............135
Rot WF Rise Time, Rot TW Rise Time ......135
Rot WF Fall Time .........................135
Rot TW Fall Time .........................135
Rot WF Speed Slow, Rot TW Speed Slow .135
Rot WF Speed Fast, Rot TW Speed Fast ...135
Rot Mic Distance .........................135
Rot Speed Rand .........................135
Eq Bass Gain .............................135
Eq Middle Gain ..........................135
Eq Treble Gain ...........................136
Amp Type ...............................136
Overdrive ...............................136
Ring Mod Switch ........................136
Ring Mod Freq ...........................136
Split .........................................................136
Split Point ...............................136
Lower Hold ..............................136
Key ......................................................... 136
Key ......................................137
Mode ...................................137
‘Rhythm Parts’ parameters .................................. 137
Mute ....................................137
Solo .....................................137
Volume ..................................137
Exp. Pedal ...............................137
Exp.Pedal AllParts On ....................137
Exp.Pedal AllParts O ....................137
Arranger Setting’ parameters ...............................137
Zone ....................................137
Type ....................................138
Arranger Hold ...........................138
Tempo ..................................138
HalfBar On Fill In .........................138
Fill Ritardando ...........................138
TempoCh Acc/Rit, TempoCh CPT,
TempoCh Fill Rit .........................138
Using the Ritardando/Accelerando
functions ................................139
Dynamic Arranger ..........................................139
Assign Switches .............................................139
Scale Tune Switch ...........................................140
Scale Tune .................................................. 140
‘Melody Intelligent’ parameters ............................. 141
Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Type ....................................141
2nd Tone ................................141
Intell Threshold ..........................141
Level ....................................141
Expression Pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Hold Pedal ..............................141
Bender Assign ...........................141
Bender Range
...........................141
Modulation Assign. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
D Beam ..................................................... 142
MIDI Set Link ................................................ 142
Save As Default ............................................. 142
‘Global’ parameters ........................................142
Display Contrast ............................................ 142
Display Brightness .......................................... 142
Tuning ......................................................143
13
Utility .......................................................143
Mic Settings ................................................144
One Touch Hold ............................................ 144
Performance Hold .......................................... 144
Pedal Switch and Pedal Control ............................. 144
If You Connect a Pedal Switch (Not Continuous) .145
If You Connect a Pedal Control (Continuous) .....145
H.Bar Level Slider Assign (H.Bar Level) .......................146
Pedal Controller FC-7 ....................................... 146
Metronome .................................................147
Rhythm/SMF Track Mute .................................... 147
External Lyrics Settings ..................................... 147
Video Settings .............................................. 147
Fade IN/OUT Settings ....................................... 148
Language ...................................................148
Save Global .................................................148
Audio Key ................................................. 148
One Touch Edit ............................................ 148
Chord Loop ...............................................148
Mode ...................................149
Rhythm Composer ........................................ 149
16Track Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Mastering Tools ...........................................149
SMF/Rhythm and Tone Parts Compressor ...................149
Write the “User Compressor ................................150
SMF/Rhythm and Tone Parts Equalizer ...................... 150
Write the “User Equalizer ...................................151
MIDI ......................................................151
MIDI Channels .............................................. 151
MIDI Parameters ............................................ 151
Local ...........................................152
Loading a MIDI Set .............................152
Edit Rhythm Parts ..............................152
Tx .......................................152
Tx Ch ....................................152
Tx Shift ..................................153
Tx Local .................................153
Tx Event .................................153
Rx .......................................153
Rx Ch ....................................153
Rx Shift .................................153
Rx Limit Low/Limit High .................153
Rx Event .................................153
Edit Tone Parts .................................154
Edit Song Parts .................................154
Edit System ....................................154
Sync ...........................................154
Rhythm Start/Stop Tx ....................155
Rhythm Clock Tx .........................155
SMF Start/Stop Tx ........................155
SMF Clock Tx ............................155
SMF Position Tx ..........................155
Sync Rx ..................................155
Mode ...................................155
Basic ...........................................155
Tx .......................................155
Tx Channel ..............................155
Performance PC Tx .......................155
Part Switch Tx ...........................156
Rx ......................................156
Rx Channel ..............................156
Performance PC Rx ......................156
Master Volume Rx .......................156
Part Switch Rx ...........................156
Rhythm ........................................156
Tx .......................................156
Tx Channel ..............................156
Rx .......................................156
Rx Channel ..............................156
Rhythm Volume Rx ......................156
Rhythm Pc Rx ............................157
NTA ............................................157
Channel .................................157
Rx .......................................157
Rx Octave ...............................157
Rx Global Limit Low/High ................157
Parameters .....................................157
Part Switch ..............................157
Tx Velocity ...............................157
Tx SysEx .................................157
Tx Data Change ..........................158
Tx Octave ...............................158
Rx Velocity ..............................158
Rx SySex ................................158
Rx Transpose ............................158
Rx Common Exp. ........................158
Soft Thru ................................158
Visual Control TxCh .............................158
Save MIDI Set ............................................... 158
Checking a Tone’s or Rhythm’s MIDI Address ................ 159
Wireless ................................................... 159
Factory Reset ............................................. 159
Formatting a USB memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
25. Controlling Video Equipment (Visual Control) .............161
How to Connect a Video Equipment .......................161
How to Enable/Disable the Video Control Function .........161
Selecting clips and banks on an optional MIDI Visual
Control/ V-LINK device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
What is MIDI Visual Control? .................................161
26. Wireless LAN Function ...................................162
What is Wireless LAN Function? ............................162
Basic Connection Method (Connect by WPS) ...............162
Wireless LAN Function Settings ............................163
“Status” Indication ...........................................163
Access Point” Indication .....................................163
“Wireless Info Page ..........................................163
“Wireless Option” Page .......................................163
Connecting to a Wireless LAN Access Point That You Select . 163
Other Settings (Wireless Option) ............................ 164
Connecting in Ad-Hoc mode ..............................164
Checking the IP Address and MAC Address (WIRELESS INFO) 165
27. Troubleshooting .........................................166
28. Specications ...........................................168
29. MIDI Implementation Chart ..............................171
30. Chord Intelligence Table .................................172
31. Index ...................................................174
14
4. Panel Description
Left Front Panel
1
PHONES output
This is where you can connect optional headphones (Roland RH-
series).
2
Pitch Bend/Modulation lever
You can lower or raise the pitch by moving this lever to the left
or right. Push the lever away from yourself to apply modulation
(normally vibrato) to the sound.
3
S1, S2, S3, S4 (Assignable Switches)
These are assignable buttons. You can use them to directly access
frequently used functions that are only available via the function
menu. The button assignments belong to the settings that can be
written to a Performance. For more details see p. 53.
4
VOLUME knob
Use this knob to set BK-9’s global output volume (all signals
transmitted to the OUTPUT jack).
5
AUDIO IN knob
This knob allows you to set the input level of the signals received
via the INPUT jack.
6
MIC VOLUME knob
This knob controls the level of the microphone connected to the
MIC IN jack.
7
BALANCE knob
These knob allows you to set the balance between the rhythms
and songs (BACKING) and the real-time parts (PARTS).
8
MIC REVERB knob
This knob sets the level of the reverb eect, that is added to the
MIC signal.
9
D-BEAM Controller (Sensor and buttons)
The D-BEAM Controller allows you to control various aspects of
your performance. See “Using the D-BEAM Controller” (p. 53).
10
METRONOME button
Press this button to switch the internal metronome on or o.
11
RHYTHM FAMILY buttons
These buttons are used to select the family of the next rhythm
you want to use. Pressing one of these buttons calls up a list of all
rhythms contained in the selected family. Pressing and holding this
button locks the currently selected rhythm (p. 63).
12
TEMPO buttons
These buttons can be used to decrease or increase the tempo of
the currently selected rhythm or song. Pressing them together
recalls the stored tempo value of the rhythm or song.
MEMO
You can also use the [TAP TEMPO] button to set the desired tempo
13
SYNC START button
This button is used to switch the BK-9’s Sync Start or Sync Stop
function either on or o. If it is on, rhythm playback can be either
started or stopped by simply playing a note or chord on the
keyboard. (p. 36).
While a song le is selected, this button stops playback.
14
CHORD LOOP buttons
These buttons are used to record and play a sequence of chords
for instant use. See “19. Recording a Chord Sequence (Chord
Loop)” (p. 79).
15
SONG REC button
This button is used to start recording of your performance (p.
75).
16
BASS INV button
This button is used to switch the Bass Inversion function on and o
(p. 37).
17
TAP TEMPO button
Pressing this button several times allows you to change the current
rhythm or song tempo to the value calculated from the speed at
which the button is pressed.
1
2
3
4
5 6
7 8
9
10
11
12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
24
Right Front Panel
15
23
25
24
Right Front Panel
26
27 28 29 30 31 32
38 39 40 41 42 43 44
47
18
AUTO FILL IN button
This button is used to activate the Auto Fill-In function, which
causes a transition to be played before selecting the new rhythm
variation (which is selected with the VARIATION buttons).
19
VARIATION 1/2/3/4 buttons
These buttons are used to select a rhythm Variation, i.e. a simpler
or more complex arrangement of the selected rhythm.
20
INTRO button
When you activate this button, rhythm playback starts with a
musical introduction, whose complexity depends on which
VARIATION button currently lights (there are four dierent
introductions per rhythm).
After selecting a song le, this button allows you to rewind.
21
ENDING button
When you activate this button, rhythm playback stops with a
musical ending, whose complexity depends on which VARIATION
button currently lights (there are four dierent ending phrases
per rhythm). After selecting a song le, this button allows you to
fast-forward.
22
START/STOP button
This button allows you to start and stop rhythm playback. If you
select a song, it starts and temporarily stops (pause) song playback.
23
Left and Right displays
These displays show information related to your operation.
In most cases the left display shows the main page. The right dis-
play shows parameters, Performance, Tone and Rhythm list, etc.
24
Left and Right Display Selection buttons
These buttons allow you to choose in which display (either left or
right) you want to focus to select parameters.
25
Assignable Sliders
These sliders can be used as virtual harmonic bars when the [HARM
BAR] button and [H. BAR] arrow indicator light. In that case, refer to
the footage indications below the sliders for their specic functions
(p. 29). In case the [MIXER] button and arrow indicator light, the
sliders work as in a mixer. Refer to the indications above the sliders
for their specic functions (p. 33).
26
CURSOR/VALUE SELECT (push ) dial
This dial can be used to move the cursor in the selected display, to
select parameters and to set values.
Press this dial to conrm your selection or deselection of the
display item where the cursor is.
27
DISPLAY SELECT
This button swaps the focus between the left and right display.
28
PERFORMANCE LIST button
This button calls up the Performance or Music Assistant List (p.
57).
29
PERFORMANCE WRITE button
The main function of this button is to save Performance settings.
Depending on the selected display page, it can also be used to save
Rhythms, Songs and One Touch.
30
MENU button
This button allows you to open the BK-9’s menu page, where you
can view and select all available functions.
Press it together with the [QUICK MENU] button to listen to the
BK-9’s demo songs.
31
QUICK MENU button
This button allows you to access a contextual menu to the current
open page.
Press it together with the [MENU] button to listen to the BK-9’s
demo songs.
33 34 35 36 37
45 46
48 49 50 51 52
53
Panel Description
16
32
MAKEUP TOOL button
Press this button to modify the settings of the current song or
rhythm. See page 97.
33
MFX button
This button enables (lights) or disables the eector.
By pressing and holding it you can access the display pages where
you can set the eects parameters.
34
MELODY INTELL button
This buttons is used to add an automatic countermelody (second
or third voice) to your solos or melodies.
Pressing and holding it calls up a display page where you can view
the “Melody Intelligent” parameters.
Press and hold it while pressing the [LYRICS] button and you will
activate/deactivate the Visual Control (p. 161).
35
LYRICS button
If you select a (MIDI or audio) song with Lyrics data, pressing this
button will display the words of that song on the internal display.
The BK-9 will also display the chords of such Standard MIDI les
(SMF). For more details see “ p. 47
36
TRACK MUTE/CENTER CANCEL button
This button lets you mute the accompaniment parts of the selected
rhythm, so that only the bass and drum parts are played back. It
also lets you mute the melody part of the selected MIDI File, or
attenuate the vocal part at the center of an audio le (WAVE or
mp3), allowing you to sing or play that part yourself.
Pressing and holding this button calls up a display page where you
can select the Standard MIDI File or rhythm part(s) that you don’t
want to hear.
37
USB MEMORY button
Press this button to call up a list of the les stored in the USB
memory connected to BK-9‘s USB MEMORY port.
38
DEC/-, INC/+
These buttons can be used to set the values or select the Tones and
Rhythms.
39
EXIT button
This button is used to return to a higher menu level.
Press and hold it to return to BK-9’s main display page.
40
MIXER button
This button allows you to specify that the ten sliders are assigned
to the MIXER function (Reak Time Parts or Rhythm Parts) (button
lights). For more details see “ p. 33
41
SPLIT button
Press the [SPLIT] button if you want to play dierent sounds with
your left and right hands. See “ p. 32.
Press and hold this button to jump directly to the “split” page.
42
OCTAVE button
Press this button to open the OCTAVE temporary page and change
the octave up or down in octave steps. See “ p. 52
43
PART ON/OFF buttons
These buttons allow you to switch the desired keyboard parts
(UPPER1, UPPER2, LOWER, M. BASS) on and o.
To change the tone assignment (the part to which you wish to
assign a dierent sound) press and hold the desired keyboard part.
See “Change a tone for a real-time part (p. 28).
44
MODE buttons
These buttons allow you to congure the BK-9 by pressing just one
button.
Select [PIANO] to assign a piano sound to the entire keyboard.
Select [ORGAN] to assign organ sounds to the left and right hand in
a split keyboard.
45
KEY button
This button calls up the BK-9’s transposition function.
Its settings can be applied to Rhythms, Songs and the real-time
Parts (UPPER1, UPPER2, LOWER, M. BASS).
If the button indicator doesn’t light, the Rhythm, Songs and the
real-time Parts use their normal pitch.
Pressing and holding this button locks the key. See p. 52.
46
ONE TOUCH button
This button is used to recall One Touch memories page. Pressing
and holding it calls up a display page where you can edit and save
One Touch memories.
MEMO
Use the TONE buttons [1]~[4] to select or deselect a One Touch memory
(p. 41).
47
HARM BAR button
Press this button to activate the Harmonic Bar section, whose
sound can be set using the assignable sliders that double as virtual
harmonic bars.
48
USER TONE/SuperNATURAL button
This button allows you to select SuperNATURAL and User Tone
sounds.
The User Tone sounds are only available after installing optional
new sounds into the BK-9. See p. 28
49
FAVORITE button
Press this button if you want to use the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to
recall your favorite sounds (p. 35) or performances (p. 58).
50
TONE buttons (Tone selection)/[0]~[9] (numeric buttons)
These buttons allow you to select Tones by category (p. 28).
You can also use them to input numeric values. To do so, rst
activate the [NUMERIC] button.
Pressing and holding any of these buttons locks the Tone (p. 63).
51
NUMERIC button
Press this button if you want to use the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to
enter numeric values (p. 32).
52
AUDIO KEY button
By pressing this button the rightmost keys of the BK-9’s keyboard
will be used to control audio phrases. See “16. Using Audio Phrases
(Audio Key)” (p. 65)
53
USB MEMORY compartment
Connect an optional USB memory here.
NOTE
* Carefully insert the USB memory all the way in-until it is rmly in place.
* Use USB memory sold by Roland. We cannot guarantee operation if any
another USB memory is used.
* Roland does not recommend using USB hubs, irrespective of whether they
are active or passive. Please connect only one USB memory to this port.
Rear Panel
17
Rear Panel
1
POWER switch
Turns the power on/o (p. 24).
With the factory settings BK-9’s power will automatically be
switched o 240 minutes after you stop playing or operating the
BK-9.
If BK-9’s power has been turned o automatically, you can use the
[POWER] switch to turn the BK-9 back on. If you dont want the
power to turn o automatically, set the Auto O parameter to
“OFF” (p. 143).
2
DC IN socket
Connect the supplied PSB-1U AC adapter here (p. 20).
3
MIC IN jack
This is a combo jack to which you can connect either a balanced
XLR or a balanced/unbalanced 1/4” phone jack, depending on the
cable that is connected to your microphone.
“PHANTOM +48” switch
Select “ON” this switch the BK-9 provide phantom power to “MIC IN”
jack, allowing you to use a condenser microphone. See “Connecting
a Microphone” (p. 21) for details about phantom power.
4
INPUT R & L/MONO jacks
These jacks allow you to connect the audio outputs of an external
signal source (CD/mp3 player, synthesizer, etc.).
5
AUDIO OUTPUT R & L/MONO jacks
These jacks transmit all audio signals the BK-9 generates as well as
the signals you input to the BK-9.
NOTE
If you can/want to use only one channel on your external amplier,
connect the L/MONO jack to its input. For optimum sound quality, we
recommend working in stereo, though.
6
METRONOME OUT jack
The BK-9’s metronome signals can be transmitted to the
METRONOME OUT jack. You can connect headphones (Roland RH-
series) to this jack. This is useful for a drummer, for example (as
“Click Track”). You can set the metronome volume (p . 56).
7
PEDAL HOLD jack
An optional Roland DP-series or BOSS FS-5U pedal switch
connected to this jack can be used to hold the notes of the
real-time parts (p. 22). (The MELODY INTELL part can also be
sustained in this way.) This function is also referred to as sustain” or
damper.
8
PEDAL EXPRESSION jack
Connect a separately available pedal expression pedal (Roland EV-
5) to this jack (p. 22).
7654321
9
PEDAL CONTROL jack
Connect a separately available pedal switch (Roland DP-series),
a separately available foot switch (BOSS FS-5U) or a separately
available expression pedal (Roland EV-5) to this jack.
The functions of this pedal are programmable and depend on the
type of pedal you connect.
See “Connecting Optional Pedals (p. 22)
10
FC-7 PEDAL sockets
This is where you connect an optional FC-7 footswitch unit that
allows you to start, stop and select Rhythm divisions by foot. The
functions of this footswitch unit are programmable.
11
MIDI THRU/OUT/IN sockets
You can connect MIDI devices to these sockets (p. 22).
12
USB COMPUTER port
Use a USB cable to connect the BK-9 to your computer via this
connector (p. 22). A USB iPad camera connector (commercially
available) enables you to connect your iPad with your BK-9 to
enjoy dedicated applications (p. 23).
13
VIDEO OUTPUT socket
Connect this socket to the appropriate input of your TV or external
display.
NOTE
The signal format (PAL or NTSC) and aspect ratio are selectable (p. 147).
14
Ground terminal
See p. 20 for details about this terminal.
8
9
10 11 12 13
14
18
5. Shortcut List
Pressing and holding the following buttons (or button combinations) allows you to directly jump to a related parameter page, which is faster than selecting
the page in question via BK-9’s menu. Some of these buttons activate a lock function (p. 63).
Press and hold Function
Pressing and holding one of the RHYTHM FAMILY
buttons locks the rhythm so as to keep it from
changing when you select another Performance
memory or Music Assistant.
Pressing and holding one of the TONE buttons
locks the Tone so as to keep it from changing when
you select another Performance memory or Music
Assistant.
Locks the tempo or Key setting to keep it from
changing when you select another Performance
memory or Music Assistant.
Open the “Metronome” page allowing you to specify
when and how the metronome should sound.
Opens the “Rhythm Track Mute or “Song Track Mute”
page.
After activating record standby mode (the indicator
ashes), pressing and holding this button will cancel
that mode (use it if you don’t want to record after
all).
Takes you back to the main page, no matter where
you currently are.
Opens the “One Touch Edit” page.
Opens the “Split” page.
Opens the “Melody Intelligence” page.
19
Press and hold Function
Opens the Audio Key page.
Opens the “Organ Commons page.
Opens the “Super NATURAL Edit page if the [Super
NATURAL] button lights.
Opens the “Chord Loop” page.
Pressing and holding one of the D-BEAM buttons
opens “D Beam” page.
Press and hold the desired PART ON/OFF button
([UPPER1], [UPPER2], [LOWER], [M. BASS]) to enable
the part where you want to change the tone.
The main page will show the selected part in
reverse.
20
Connecting the AC Adaptor
1. Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the left to
minimize the volume.
2. Connect the included power cord to the AC adapter.
The indicator will light once you plug the AC adaptor into a wall
outlet.
Place the AC adapter so that the side with the indicator (see
illustration) faces upwards and the side with textual information
faces downwards.
NOTE
Depending on your region, the included power cord may dier
from the one shown above.
3. Connect the AC adaptor to BK-9’s DC IN jack.
4. Plug the power cord into a power outlet.
The indicator will light once you plug the AC adaptor into a wall
outlet
NOTE
Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with the unit
(PSB-1U). Also, make sure the line voltage at the installation
matches the input voltage specied on the AC adapter body.
Other AC adapters may use a dierent polarity, or be designed
for a dierent voltage, so their use could result in damage,
malfunction, or electric shock.
NOTE
If you won’t be using the BK-9 for an extended period of time,
disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet.
Ground Terminal
Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup, you may
experience a discomforting sensation, or perceive that the surface
feels gritty to the touch when you touch this device, microphones
connected to it, or the metal portions of other objects, such as guitars.
This is due to an innitesimal electrical charge, which is absolutely
harmless. However, if you are concerned about this, connect the
ground terminal (see gure below) with an external ground. When the
AC Adapter
Power cord
to an AC outlet
Indicator
unit is grounded, a slight hum may occur, depending on the particulars
of your installation. If you are unsure of the connection method,
contact the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
Unsuitable places for connection
• Water pipes (may result in shock or electrocution)
• Gas pipes (may result in re or explosion)
• Telephone-line ground or lightning rod (may be dangerous in
the event of lightning)
Connecting External Audio Equipment
You can connect the OUTPUT jack to keyboard amplier, stereo
system, or other stereo audio device.
1. Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the left to
minimize the volume.
2. Connect the BK-9’s OUTPUT jacks to the inputs of your
external audio device.
INPUT
L R
3. You can connect the outputs of an external signal source
to the BK-9’s INPUT jacks.
4. Use the BK-9s [AUDIO IN] knob to adjust the volume.
NOTE
To prevent malfunction and equipment failure, always turn
down the volume and turn o all units before making any
connections.
6. Before You Start Using BK-9
Listening Through Headphones
21
When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume level
of equipment connected to the INPUT jacks may be low. If this
happens, use connection cables that do not contain resistors.
Listening Through Headphones
You can use headphones to enjoy the BK-9 without disturbing
those around you, such as at night.
1. Plug the headphones into the PHONES jack located on the
BK-9’s front panel.
2. Use the BK-9’s [VOLUME] knob to adjust the headphone
volume.
Cautions when using headphones
• To prevent damage to the cord’s internal conductors, avoid rough
handling. When using headphones, mainly try to handle either the
plug or the headset.
• Your headphones may be damaged if the volume of a device is
already turned up when you plug them in. Minimize the volume
before you plug in the headphones.
• Excessive input will not only damage your hearing, but may also
strain the headphones. Please enjoy music at a reasonable volume.
Connecting a Microphone
1. Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the left to
minimize the volume.
2. Connect your microphone to the MIC IN jack.
3. Use the BK-9’s [VOLUME] knob to adjust the volume.
4. Use the BK-9’s [MIC VOLUME] knob to adjust the
microphone audio level.
Please set the Phantom switch on the rear of BK-9 according to your
microphone type.
NOTE
To avoid damaging of external audio system, turn the [VOLUME]
knob all the way to the left to minimize the volume before set
the Phantom switch.
Phantom +48V
Switch
Explanation
O
Dynamic Mic: 1/4“phone plug (balanced or unbalanced), XLR
connector.
On
Condenser Mic: XLR connector (48 V phantom power supported)
* If you don’t need phantom power supply, select the OFF
position.
NOTE
This instrument is equipped with balanced (XLR and 1/4” phone)
type jacks. Wiring diagrams for these jacks are shown below.
Make connections after rst checking the wiring diagrams of
other equipment you intend to connect.
MEMO
The BK-9 provides an equalizer you can set for the MIC IN jack.
See “Mic Settings” (p. 144).
NOTE
Howling could be produced depending on the location of
microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s).
2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers.
3. Lowering volume levels.
Before You Start Using BK-9
22
The BK-9 MIDI THRU socket exactly duplicates whatever data is being
received at the BK-9 MIDI IN socket. It is used to connect to the MIDI IN of
another device.
MIDI channels
MIDI provides sixteen channels, numbered 1~16. Even if two MIDI devices
are connected, you won’t be able to select or play sounds on the other
device unless both devices are set to the same MIDI channel. For more
details see “MIDI” (p. 151).
The BK-9 is capable to transmit and receive on all channels, 1~16.
NOTE
Before making connections with other devices, you must turn
down the volume of all devices and turn o the power to avoid
malfunctions or speaker damage.
Connecting Optional Pedals
You can connect optional pedal switches and expression pedals to
control many function of BK-9.
Connect to the
PEDAL HOLD jack
an optional Roland
DP-series or BOSS
FS-5U pedal
switch to hold the
notes of the real-
time parts.
Connect to the
PEDAL EXPRESSION
jack an optional
expression pedal
(Roland EV-5) to
control the volume.
Connect to the PEDAL CONTROL jack
an optional Roland DP-series, an optional
foot switch (BOSS FS-5U) or an optional
expression pedal (Roland EV-5) to control
dierent functions and eects.
NOTE
If you connect a Pedal Switch (e.g. DP2),
to set the function that you want to
assign see “If You Connect a Pedal Switch
(Not Continuous)” (p. 145).
If you connect a Continuos Pedal (e.g.
DP-10) or Expression Pedal, see “If You
Connect a Pedal Control (Continuous)”
(p. 145) to set the function that you
want to assign.
Connect to the
PEDAL FC-7 socket
an optional Roland
FC-7 pedal to control
dierent functions. For
more details see “Pedal
Controller FC-7” (p. 146).
NOTE
Use only the specied expression pedal (Roland EV-series, sold
separately) or pedal switch (Roland DP-series, BOSS FS-5U). By
connecting any other expression pedal or pedal switch, you risk
causing malfunction and/or damage the unit.
Connecting an Optional Vocal
Performer (VE-5, VE-20)
1. Turn the BK-9 [VOLUME] knob all the way to the left to
minimize the volume.
2. Connect your microphone to VE-5’s MIC IN jack , and
connect VE-5’s XLR OUT jack to BK-9’s MIC IN jack.
If you use VE-20, connect your microphone to VE-20’s INPUT jack,
and connect VE-20’s OUTPUT L/MONO jack to BK-9’s MIC IN jack.
NOTE
Please set the Phantom switch on the rear
of BK-9 to “OFF”.
Before you make connections, make sure
that the Vocal Performer is turned o.
For more details refer to VE-5 or VE-20 owners manual.
Connecting a MIDI Device
The BK-9 can transmit and receive performance data when
connected to an external MIDI device, which enables the two
devices to control each others performance.
Connection example
If you use a MIDI cable (commercially available) to connect this
unit’s MIDI OUT connector to the MIDI IN connector of your
external MIDI sound module, you’ll be able to produce sound on
the external MIDI sound module by playing this unit’s keyboard. As
necessary, set the external MIDI sound modules receive channel to
match this unit’s MIDI transmit channel.
What is MIDI?
MIDI, short for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface, was developed
as a universal standard for the exchange of performance data
among electronic musical instruments and computers.
The BK-9 is equipped with MIDI connectors to let it exchange
performance data with external devices. These connectors can be
used to connect the unit to an external device for even greater
versatility.
THRUI
NO
UTOUT
IN
BK-9
MIDI sound module/
sequencer
Using the BK-9 to play your MIDI sound module
Playing the BK-9’s sounds from your MIDI sequencer
Connecting the BK-9 to Your Computer
23
Connecting the BK-9 to Your
Computer
If you use a USB cable (commercially available) to connect the
COMPUTER port located on the BK-9’s rear panel to the USB port of
your computer, you’ll be able to do the following things:
• Use the BK-9 as a sound module.
• By transferring MIDI data between the BK-9 and your sequencer
software, you’ll be able to enjoy a wide range of possibilities for
music production and editing.
What do you need to connect the BK-9 with your
computer?
• USB cable (type A–male - type B–male: commercially available)
1. Use a standard USB cable (AgB-type connectors,
commercially available) to connect the BK-9 to your
computer as shown below.
2. Refer to the Roland website for system requirements.
Roland website: http://www.roland.com/ As an
alternative, you can connect the BK-9s MIDI OUT and MIDI
IN sockets to a MIDI interface and connect the latter to
your computer.
If the computer doesn’t see’ the BK-9
Normally, you don’t need to install a driver in order to connect the
BK-9 to your computer. However, if some problem occurs, or if the
performance is poor, using the Roland original driver may solve the
problem.
For details on downloading and installing the Roland original driver,
refer to the Roland website:
http://www.roland.com/
Specify the USB driver you want to use, and then install the driver.
For details, refer to “USB Driver (p. 143).
NOTE
• To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage to external
speakers, always turn the volume all the way down and switch o
the power on all devices before you make any connections.
• Only MIDI data can be transmitted and received via USB. Audio data
for a song recorded on the BK-9 cannot be transmitted or received.
• Switch on the power to the BK-9 before you start up the MIDI
application on your computer. Never turn the BK-9’s power on/o
while your MIDI application is running.
Connecting the BK-9 to Your iPad
You can connect yourBK-9 with your iPad to enjoy dedicated
applications.
What do you need to connect the BK-9 with your iPad?
Apple iPad Camera Connection Kit (Camera connectors made by
Apple Inc.)
• USB cable (type A–male - type B–male: commercially available)
1. Connect your iPad with your BK-9 by using a USB iPad
camera connector and a USB cable.
2. Turn on your BK-9 and your iPad.
3. User your iPad to open the app.
For detailed information about the Roland Apps Lineup refer to
www.roland.com.
Connecting a Television Set
Television
RCA video connection cable
(Commercially available)
1. Switch o the BK-9 and the television set you’ll be
connecting.
2. Connect the BK-9 to your television set.
Use a RCA video connection cable (commercially available) to
connect the BK-9’s VIDEO OUTPUT socket to the television set.
3. Switch on the BK-9 (p. 24).
4. Switch on your television set.
5. (As necessary) Specify the television output format (p.
147).
6. Specify the aspect ratio for your television set.
The aspect ratio is the proportional relationship between the width
and height of the screen.
Before You Start Using BK-9
24
A A
Front side (keyboard)
Rear panel side
Front
Rubber Feet
Rear Rubber FeetRear Rubber Feet
842 mm
NOTE
The height of the KS-12 can be set to 3 levels. Avoid selecting
the highest level (760 mm, 29-15/16 inches) for the BK-9.
Please set the KS-12 to its lowest (630 mm, 24-13/16 inches) or
medium (695 mm, 27-3/8 inches) height for the BK-9..
Turning the Power On/O
Once everything is properly connected, be sure to follow the
procedure below to turn on their power. See “6. Before You Start
Using BK-9” (p. 20). If you turn on equipment in the wrong order,
you risk causing malfunction or equipment failure.
Turning the Power On
1. Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the left to
minimize the volume
NOTE
Before turning the BK-9 on/o, always be sure to turn the
volume down. Even with the volume turned down, you might
hear some sound when switching the BK-9 on/o.
However, this is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
2. Press the [POWER] switch to turn on the power.
On
O
Installing the Music Rest
1. Install the music rest as shown in the illustration.
NOTE
When moving the BK-9, be sure to remove the music rest as a
safety precaution.
Do not apply excessive force to the music rest.
The music rest is not designed to accept the placement of
laptops or other heavy objects.
Placing the BK-9 on the Stand
If you place the BK-9 on a stand, you must use the KS-12 (sold separately).
NOTE
When placing the BK-9 on the stand, be careful not to pinch
your ngers between the instrument and the stand.
When lifting the BK-9 onto the stand, make sure to enlist the
help of at least one other person.
Using the BK-9 with any other stand may produce an unstable
situation, possibly causing the instrument to fall or overturn,
and resulting in injury or damage.
For details on how to assemble the stand, refer to the owner’s
manual that accompanied the stand.
1. Adjust the KS-12 Stand so that the width between the
holes is 842 mm.
842 mm
2. Place the BK-9 in the position shown in the illustration.
3. Position the BK-9 front rubber feet A so they t inside
the holes on the stand.
Demo of the BK-9
25
The power will turn on, an opening message will appear in the
BK-9’s screens, and then the main page will appear in the left
display and the Tone selection will appear in the right display.
Left Display
Right Display
After a brief interval, the BK-9 will be ready to produce sound.
3. Use the [VOLUME] knob to adjust the volume.
NOTE
This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval
(a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will
operate normally.
Turning the Power O
1. Turn the [VOLUME] knob all the way to the left to
minimize the volume.
NOTE
Never switch o the BK-9 while playback or recording is running
or while data are being read from, or written to, an external USB
memory. Doing so may corrupt the unit’s data or the data on the
USB memory
2. Press the BK-9’s [POWER] switch.
The display will go dark and the power will turn o.
NOTE
If you need to turn o the power completely, rst turn o the
[POWER] switch, then unplug the power cord from the power
outlet. Refer to “Connecting the AC Adaptor” (p. 20).
If you dont want the power to turn o
automatically, turn the Auto O setting o !
With the factory settings, the unit’s power will automati-
cally be switched o 30 minutes after you stop playing or
operating the unit.
Shortly before the BK-9 shuts down automatically, the display
starts counting down the seconds. If you want to keep using
the BK-9 at this stage, press any button. When the BK-9 is
turned o by the Auto O function, the [POWER] button’s
position doesn’t change, which means that you need to press
it once, wait a few seconds, then press it again to switch the
BK-9 back on.
If you don’t want the power to turn o automatically, change
the Auto O setting to “OFF” as described on p. 143.
NOTE
When the BK-9 has been switched o by Auto O , you need
to press the [POWER] button, wait a few seconds, then press the
button again to switch the BK-9 back on. (Do not switch it on
too quickly.)
Demo of the BK-9
Your BK-9 contains a demo that introduces all of its highlights. It might be
a good idea to try it out now. The demo is self-explanatory, so we’ll just
show you how to start and stop it.
1. Simultaneously press the [MENU] and [QUICK MENU]
buttons.
Playback starts automatically with the demo song.
2. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the demo function.
NOTE
No data for the music that is played back will be output from
MIDI OUT.
NOTE
All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for
purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation
of applicable laws.
26
About the Displays and Cursor
Operation
This section introduces the information that appear on the main page.
Moreover this section illustrates which display you want to focus on and
how to navigate the menu.
Selecting the Display to Operate on It
BK-9 is equipped with two displays so as give you access to several
useful information at the same time.
Depending on the environment that you are using you could need
to select in which display you want to act (left or right). In most
cases you will nd the main page on the left.
The lit selection button shows which display is active.
Left Display
Selection Button
Right Display
Selection Button
Take into consideration that the BK-9 changes the focus between
left and right displays according to your actions on the panel.
You have two ways to select on which display you want to act:
1. Press the selection button placed under the display that
you wish to enable
- alternatively -
Press the [DISPLAY SELECT] button.
The chosen selection button lights.
Now all operations that you perform by the [CURSOR/VALUE
SELECT (push )] dial and the [INC]/[DEC] buttons will act on the
selected display.
Main Page
The BK-9 main page contains many useful information and
modiable elds that allow you to change tones, rhythms and so
on.
1. Press the selection button placed under the left display to
enable it.
Alternatively you can use the [DISPLAY SELECT] button.
You can use the [CURSOR/VALUE SELECT (push )] dial and the
7. Basic Operation of the BK-9
[INC]/[DEC] buttons to change the modiable eld. See “Browsing
Windows and Setting Parameter Values”.
Current measure
or remaining time
Time signature Tempo setting or time
stretching
Lock status eld
Selected or linked
le type: stl, SMF,
WAVE, mp3
Name of the last
chord you played
Name of the selected
rhythm (or loaded
le)
Wireless icon
One Touch
memory
indication
Real-time parts
modiable elds
Current “Key”
setting
Tone name
Active part
(Upper1) for
changing tone
Visual Control
indication
Browsing Windows and Setting
Parameter Values
Using the dial you can navigate the menu, select the setting you
want to change and change it:
Here is an example of how to navigate in the menu and how to change a
value ([
MENU] button gGlobal” g “Display Brightness”).
1. Press the [MENU] button.
The right display changes to:
Right Display
About the Displays and Cursor Operation
27
The right display selection button lights.
This page allows you to select the function group that contains the
setting you want to change.
2. Use the dial to select the entry of the desired function
group.
For this example, we will select “Global”.
3. Push the dial to go to the “Global” function group.
The display changes to:
Right Display
On this display page, “Display Brightness”, Tuning and other entries
can be changed directly. Other entries provide access to additional
display pages.
4. Use the dial to move the cursor to the parameter
whose value you want to change. For example “Display
Brightness”.
5. Use the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to change the value
or
push the dial to select the parameter, rotate the dial to
change the value and push the dial again to deselect the
eld.
TIPS
You can change value without selecting or deselecting the
parameter (thus avoiding to push the dial) but using the [INC] or
[DEC] buttons directly on the highlighted eld.
6. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the “Global” page or push
and hold it to return to the main page.
How to type a name in BK-9
Using BK-9 you’ll have to enter the name of a song, style or rename
some existing les.
1. Rotate the dial or press the [INC] and [DEC] buttons to
select the desired character position.
The buttons below allow you the following operations:
Button Explanation
Press this button to switch between upper-case, lower-case
characters, numbers and symbols.
Press this button to delete the selected character.
Press this button to insert a character.
2. Use the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the desired
characters.
3. Repeat steps (1) and (2) above to complete the name.
4. Press the [WRITE] button to save your settings.
Using the ‘Help function
Whenever the display shows a “? hold NUMERIC” message, the BK-9
can provide some explanations about the parameters currently
shown in the display. To view this information, proceed as follows:
Right Display
1. Select a page where the above eld is displayed, then
press and hold the [NUMERIC] button.
A pop-up window similar to the following appears:
Right Display
2. Press the [EXIT] button (or press [NUMERIC] again) to
close the “Help” window.
28
The main page displays the selected real-time parts in reverse.
NOTE
You can select more than one part at a time. The selection of
tone will be applied on the latest enabled part.
2. Play the keyboard.
You’ll hear the sound of the selected part. If you selected more than
one part you will hear them in layer.
Change a tone for a real-time part
3. If the part where you want to change the tone is not in
reverse on the main page, press and hold the desired
PART ON/OFF button ([UPPER1], [UPPER2], [LOWER], [M.
BASS]) to enable it.
The main page will show the selected part in reverse.
Left Display
In the example above you selected UPPER2.
4. Press a TONE [0]~[9] buttons; alternatively press [USER
TONE/SuperNATURAL] to select a sound family.
The following screen appears:
Your BK-9 contains four real-time parts: Upper 1, Upper 2, Lower
and Manual Bass. You can assign a desired sound to each part. You
can easily choose to play your BK-9 either as an Organ or as a Piano.
Selecting Piano and Organ Mode Easily
The BK-9 allows you to congure the keyboard either in Piano or
Organ mode by pressing just one button.
Select Piano Mode
1. Press the MODE [PIANO] button.
The MODE [PIANO] and the [USER TONE/SuperNATURAL] buttons
are lit.
2. The BK-9 plays SuperNATURAL piano sound over the
entire keyboard.
To change the sound please see “Selecting Tones and Playing the
Keyboard” below.
Select Organ Mode
1. Press the MODE [ORGAN] button.
The MODE [ORGAN] and the [HAR. BAR] buttons are lit.
2. The BK-9 plays organ sounds.
The Harmonic Bar sounds are automatically selected to the Upper 1,
Lower and Manual Bass part.
The keyboard is set in Split mode and the following parts are
assigned to the keyboard: Lower and Manual Bass to the left and
Upper 1 to the right half.
3. Use the sliders below the display to change the organ
registration.
For more details see “Using the Harmonic Bars” (p. 29)
Selecting Tones and Playing the
Keyboard
In BK-9 the sounds you can assign to the parts are called Tones.
The BK-9 allows you to assign any of the available Tones to any of
the four real-time parts.
Tone selection always applies to the part (UP1, UP2, LWR, M. BASS)
whose eld on the main page is currently displayed in reverse.
Left Display
In the example above the selection of tones will be applied to the Upper
1 part.
Select a real-time part
1. Press one of the PART ON/OFF buttons to select the parts
that you want to play.
8. Playing the BK-9’s Real-Time Parts
About SuperNATURAL Sounds
29
Right Display
In the example above you selected [USER TONE/SuperNATURAL] .
The sound selected is highlighted.
MEMO
You can also select one of the favorite sounds. See “9. Favorite
Tones” (p. 35).
5. Play the keyboard.
You’ll hear the sound of the selected instrument.
6. Press the [INC] or [DEC] button to select another desired
Tone in the list.
MEMO
Tones can also be selected by simply pressing the [NUMERIC]
key and entering their number (p. 32).
7. You can also use dial to move the cursor in the list and
then press it to select the Tone.
In this case the Tone is recalled when you push the dial.
8. If you need to select a Tone of another family, press
another Tone or SuperNATURAL button and repeat the
step 4.
NOTE
The User Tone sounds may be subject to some future possible
expansion. In that case they would be available only after
installing them. The detailed instruction about how to install
them will be provided together with those new sounds.
For future possible User Tone Expansion see on www.
rolandcontent.com.
About SuperNATURAL Sounds
The SuperNATURAL acoustic tones do not merely reproduce the
sound of acoustic instruments, they also use Behavior Modeling
Technology to simulate the characteristic behavior of an instrument
when it is played.
A dedicated sound engine tuned specically for each type
of instrument analyzes the phrases performed by the player,
automatically dierentiating between chordal and melodic playing
to produce the optimal expression for a performance.
For example, the guitar SuperNATURAL acoustic tone allows your
conventional keyboard playing to create a realistically expressive
solo guitar sound that sounds as if it were being played by a
guitarist.
What is SuperNATURAL?
These are proprietary Roland sounds created
using Behavior Modeling Technology, which
enables natural and rich expression that was
dicult to achieve on earlier sound generators.
What is Behavior Modeling Technology?
Not only physical modeling of the instruments, Roland takes it a
step further by modeling the instrument’s distinctive behavior
that responds to how the performer plays, resulting in true-to-life,
expressive sounds in real-time.
Each SuperNATURAL instrument provides eective performance
variation sounds; you can use [S1] and [S2] (default) to instantly
switch between them as you play.
You can also assign dedicated eects to CC1~CC3 sliders (p. 130).
For the list of variation sounds please see the Tone & Drum Kit List“.
You can download it from http://www.roland.com/manuals.
MEMO
As default [S1] and [2] button are assigned to “SN Variation 1
and “SN Variation 2“.
Using the Harmonic Bars
The harmonic bars are assigned to sounds of dierent footage
(pitch). You can create a wide variety of organ sounds by layering
these sounds..
The volume will be loudest when the harmonic bars are fully
lowered; there will be no sound when the harmonic bars are fully
raised.
1. Press one of the PART ON/OFF buttons to select the parts
that you want to play.
2. If the part where you want to change the tone is not in
reverse on the main page, press and hold the desired
PART ON/OFF button ([UPPER1], [UPPER2], [LOWER], [M.
BASS]) to enable it.
The main page will show the selected part in reverse.
3. Press the [HARM. BAR] button.
The button lights and the rst 9 sliders now act as harmonic bars.
Playing the BK-9’s Real-Time Parts
30
Registration
Number
Genre
Registration
Number
Genre
1 Macro Jazz 1 5 Macro Jazz 5
2 Macro Jazz 2 6 Rock
3 Macro Jazz 3 7 Ballad 1
4 Macro Jazz 4 8 Ballad 2
The following screen appears:
Right Display
The left display shows the organ parameter available. See below.
4. Play a few notes with your right hand and move
the sliders below the displays to change the organ
registration.
You can set split mode to play dierent Harmonic Bar organ sound
for the left and right hand.. See “Play Dierent Voices with the Left
and Right Hands (Split)” (p. 32).
5. Use the assignable “H.Bar Level” slider (Red slider) to
adjust the overall organ volume (default).
NOTE
You can assign the “H.BAR Level” slider to adjust the Overdrive
Level. See “H.Bar Level Slider Assign (H.Bar Level)” (p. 146).
6. Press a TONE [0]~[9] or [USER TONE/SuperNATURAL]
button to exit and select another tone.
Using the Registration Memories
The BK-9 contains a virtual organ with 8 preset Registration
memories.
Right Display
1. Press the [HARM. BAR] button.
2. Rotate the dial to select the Registration memory you
want to recall. See the Registration memory table below.
3. Push the dial to recall.
Using the Harmonic Bars
31
Hard Rock
Heres a typical setting for hard rock of the ‘70s.
As desired, you can add a bit of 2’ (the 2-foot bar). Also, add the
AMPLIFIER OVERDRIVE” (p. 32).
Set the Percussion (2nd, 3rd) as you desire (p. 32).
Pop
Heres a typical setting for pops of the ‘60s.
Set the Percussion (2nd, 3rd) as you desire (p. 32).
Progressive Rock
Heres a setting for the progressive rock that was popular in the ‘70s.
Add the C-3 chorus (p. 32) and the AMPLIFIER OVERDRIVE” (p.
32).
Set the Percussion (2nd, 3rd) as you desire (p. 32).
Jazz
This is a standard setting for jazz organ.
Add the C-3 chorus (p. 32) .
Set the Percussion (2nd, 3rd) as you desire (p. 32).
Rock
Heres a typical setting for rock of the ‘70s.
AMPLIFIER OVERDRIVE” (p. 32).
Set the Percussion (2nd, 3rd) as you desire (p. 32).
Blue
Heres a standard blues sound.
As desired, you can add a bit of 1’ (the 1-foot bar).
Set the Percussion o.
Pipe Organ
Heres a setting for a pipe organ sound.
Add the reverb. See “Setting the Volume of the Real-Time Parts or
Rhythm Parts (Mixer)” (p. 33)
Set the Percussion o.
Jazz (manual bass)
Heres a setting for a bass sound played in the left hand (manual
bass).
Set the Percussion (2nd, 3rd) as you desire (p. 32).
Setting Example of Harmonic Bars
Playing the BK-9’s Real-Time Parts
32
Organ eects
If you selected Harmonic Bars the left display shows the organ
parameter available.
Left Display
1. Press the selection button placed under the left display to
enable it.
2. Use the dial to edit the parameter you want to change.
Parameter Value Explanation
Percussion
2nd
Percussion of the same pitch as the 4’ harmonic bar
will be heard.
3rd
Percussion of the same pitch as the 2-2/3’ harmonic
bar will be heard.
SOFT
SOFT
The percussion sound will be decreased, and the
harmonic bars will have their usual volume.
The volume when percussion is softened can
be adjusted by the parameter”PercSoftLevel” (p.
134).
NORMAL (“SOFT” not active)
The percussion sound will be normal.
The volume of percussion can be adjusted by
the parameter “PercNormalLevel” (p. 134).
SLOW
SLOW
The percussion sound will decay more slowly,
producing a gentler attack.
The percussion decay time can be adjusted by
the parameter “PercSlowTime (p. 134).
FAST (“SLOW” not active)
The percussion sound will decay fast.
The percussion decay time can be adjusted by
the parameter “PercFastTime” (p. 134).
VIB/CHORUS
OFF, ON
You can apply vibrato or chorus to the organ
sound.
V-1, V-2, V-3
C-1, C-2, C-3
The eect will intensify as the vibrato type (V-1,
V-2, V-3) or chorus type (C-1, C-2, C-3) moves to a
higher number
AMPLIFIER
TYPE
I, II, III, IV, V
The BK-9 simulates four dierent amp types, allow-
ing you to produce various kinds of distortion. For
more details see Amp Type” (p. 136).
AMPLIFIER
OVERDRIVE
0~127
A value toward 127 raise the gain, adding
distortion to the sound.
TONE WHEEL
Leakage
0~127 You can adjust the level of the leakage noise.
ROTARY
BRAKE
Switches the rotation of the rotary speaker. When
this is turned on, the rotation will gradually stop.
When it is turned o, the rotation will gradually
resume.
SLOW, FAST Change the speeds of the Rotary eect.
OFF, ON Enable or disable the rotary.
To make additional detailed settings for the tonewheel organ see
“Organ Commons” (p. 134).
Play Dierent Voices with the Left
and Right Hands (Split)
1. Press the [SPLIT] button
The [SPLIT] button lights.
The BK-9 is now in Split mode: note numbers below the split point
are used to transpose rhythm playback in real-time and to play
the Lower and Manual Bass part (if they are active). Note numbers
above the split point can be used to play melodies using the Upper
parts.
C4 (default)
Lower and M. Bass
Upper parts
Split Point
2. Press the PART ON/OFF [UPPER 1] and the [LOWER] button
to activate the Upper and Lower part.
3. Play the keyboard.
The notes you play with your left hand sound the Lower part , while
the notes you play with your right sound the Upper 1 part.
4. Press the PART ON/OFF [UPPER 2] button.
The notes you play with your right hand sound the Upper 1 and
Upper 2 part in layer.
5. Press the PART ON/OFF [M. BASS] button.
• If the Lower part is active a monophonic bass part is added to
the left hand. The bass notes depend on the chords you play.
• If the Lower part is not active a polyphonic bass part is added to
the left hand. The bass notes depend on the real notes you play.
MEMO
The default setting for the split point is note number 60 (C4).
You can change the split point to a dierent note (“Split Point”
(p. 136).
Using the ‘Numeric function to Select Tones, Rhythms and Performances
33
Using the ‘Numeric function to Select
Tones, Rhythms and Performances
The “Numeric” function can be used to enter the number of the Tone,
Rhythm or Performance memory you want to use, which is faster than
scrolling with the dial.
Below please nd an example that shows you how to use the “NUMERIC
function for selecting Tones.
1. Press the TONE [0]~[9] button that contains the
instrumental sound that you want to play.
MEMO
By pressing and holding one of these buttons, you activate the
lock function for Tone selection, which means that Tones no
longer change when you select Performance memories. See
“Filtering Performance Memories Settings (Lock function)” (p.
63).
2. Press the [NUMERIC] button to open the following
window popup:
Right Display
The TONE [0]~[9] buttons ash.
3. Press the TONE buttons that correspond to the gures you
want to enter ([0]~[9]).
For Tones, you can enter up to 4 digits. To select Tone 6, for instance,
simply pressing the [6] button is enough (the display will show
“0006”).
NOTE
If you make a mistake, the quickest way to correct it is by
pressing the [0] button four times (to enter “0000”) and then
restarting.
For Rhythms up to 3 digits can be entered.
NOTE
If you try to enter a higher number than possible for the current
item, a warning is displayed (“Tone doesn’t exist” ).
4. Push the dial to conrm your entry.
The “Numeric” pop-up disappears and the display jumps to the
Tone (and family) you selected.
Setting the Volume of the Real-Time
Parts or Rhythm Parts (Mixer)
The BK-9 provides an easy way to change the volume balance of
the real time parts and Rhythm parts.
By the Mixer page you can adjust “REVERB”, “CHORUS” and
“PANPOT” for the Real Time Parts and set “SOLO” and “MUTE” for
the Rhythm Parts
Use the [MIXER] button to toggle between Real Time Part and
Rhythm parts.
1. Press [MIXER] button.
The right display shows the “Part Mixer page for Real Time parts:
Right Display
2. Move the sliders below the displays to change volume for
the Real Time Parts (UP1, UP2, LWR, MBS, M.INT)
3. If necessary, you can use the dial to adjust “REVERB”,
CHORUS” and “PANPOT” for each real Real Time Part.
4. Press [MIXER] button again to toggle between Real Time
parts and Rhythm parts.
The displays show the “Rhyrthm Mixer” pages:
Playing the BK-9’s Real-Time Parts
34
Left Display
Right Display
5. Move the sliders below the displays to change volume
for the Rhythm parts (ADRUM, ABASS, ACC1, ACC2, ACC3,
ACC5, ACC5, ACC6)
6. If necessary, you can use the dial to set “SOLO” and
“MUTE” for each Rhythm Part.
7. Press [MIXER] button again to exit to return to the main
page.
If the [MIXER] button indicator doesn’t lights and the sliders are
not assigned to the Harmonic bar ([HARM. BAR] button indicator
doesn’t light), you can use the sliders to adjust the Volume and
Eects of Real Time Parts.
In this case a temporary pop-up window appears:
Left Display
Sound Eects for the real-time parts
The BK-9 has two separate multi-eects processors (MFX 1 and
2) for the real-time parts.
By default the MFX 1 is assigned to the UPPER 1 part and MFX 2
to the UPPER 2.
8. Press the [MFX] button to enable (lights) or disable the
eector.
At power-on, the [MFX] button is automatically switched
9. Press a TONE [0~9] or [USER TONE/SuperNATURAL]
buttons.
A suitable eect is recalled for each tone that you select.
MEMO
By pressing and holding [MFX] button you can access the
display pages where you can set the eects parameters. See
‘Tone Part Eects’ parameters” (p. 131).
10. Use the dial to select a tone.
A suitable eect is recalled.
MEMO
You can also use the [INC] and [DEC] buttons to change a tone.
11. Use the Sliders MFX1 and MFX2 to control the eects.
The slider MFX1 controls the MFX Control 1.
The slider MFX2 controls the MFX Control 2.
12. If you want to assign another control to the sliders,
press and hold the [MFX] button. See ‘Tone Part Eects’
parameters (p. 131).
13. Use the Sliders CC1, CC2 and CC3 to control the sound.
The slider CC1 controls the Cut O (Default).
The slider CC2 controls the Resonance (Default).
The slider CC3 controls the Attack (Default).
14. If you want to assign another control to the “CC” sliders,
see “Slider CC1, Slider CC2, Slider CC3” (p. 130).
35
9. Favorite Tones
This function allows you to create a list of 10 frequently used
sounds and recall them instantly.
Each real time part (UPPER1, UPPER2, LOWER, M. BASS) has a
proper list of 10 tones.
Recalling a Favorite Tone
1. If the part where you want to recall the favorite tone is not
in reverse on the main page, press and hold the desired
PART ON/OFF button ([UPPER1], [UPPER2], [LOWER], [M.
BASS]) to enable it.
2. Press the [FAVORITE] button, so it’s lit.
The “Favorite” window appears:
Right Display
3. Press a TONE [0]~[9] buttons to select the favorite tone
that you want to play.
The selected sound will be recalled immediately.
MEMO
Alternatively you can select the favorite tone rotating the dial
and then push it or use [INC] and [DEC] buttons.
NOTE
The list of 10 Favorite Tones are available for all parts.
4. Press the [FAVORITE] button again to exit from selection
of Favorite tones.
Creating the List of Favorite Tones
You can make four lists (UPPER1, UPPER2, LOWER, M. BASS) of 10
sounds that you frequently use in live performance, and recall these
sounds instantly.
1. If the part where you want to memorize the favorite
tone is not in reverse on the main page, press and hold
the desired PART ON/OFF button ([UPPER1], [UPPER2],
[LOWER], [M. BASS]) to enable it.
2. While the [FAVORITE] button is dark, select the sound that
you want to memorize. See “Selecting Tones and Playing
the Keyboard” (p. 28).
3. Press the [FAVORITE] button, so it’s lit.
The “Favorite window appears
4. Rotate the dial to select on of 10 favorite memory
location.
5. Press the [WRITE] button to memorize the previous sound
selected to the selected favorite memory.
A message of conrmation appears.
6. Press the [FAVORITE] button again to exit from selection
of Favorite tones.
7. If you want to memorize another tone, select the tone and
repeat from steps (2).
NOTE
The list of Favorite Tone is automatically saved to the BK-9’s
global memory.
NOTE
The list of Favorite Tone save only the Tone number information.
The list doesn’t save possible changes to the sound (e.g. Volume
Reverb Level, etc).
36
10. Playing with Automatic Accompaniments
The BK-9 contains a function that plays back automatic accompaniments
called “rhythms. This section explains how to take advantage of the BK-9’s
accompaniments
About the Rhythms
The BK-9 can generate interactive accompaniments based on the rhythm
you select. Each rhythm is a typical accompaniment for a given musical
genre. The BK-9 comes with over 500 internal rhythms divided over 10
families (see the RHYTHM FAMILY section on the front panel).
Unlike a drum machine, a BK-9 Rhythm not only contains the rhythm part
(drums & percussion) but also a melodic accompaniment, such as piano,
guitar, bass and strings lines. The melodic accompaniment parts of the
selected Rhythms follow the chords you play on the keyboard.
You can also record both your playing and the accompaniment “18.
Recording your Performance” (p. 75).
Structure of the Rhythm
Accompaniments
Each Rhythm comprises several patterns that you can play back using the
following buttons:
Button Explanation
VARIATION [1], [2], [3], [4]
If the VARIATION [1] button lights, the rhythm
function plays a simple accompaniment
(usually with fewer instruments).
The other VARIATIONS become gradually
more complex up to the VARIATION [4], that
plays the most complex accompaniment.
INTRO
If you switch on this button (indicator lights)
and press [START/STOP]/[ */, ] button the
rhythm playback begins with an introduction.
Depending on the type of VARIATION button
lighted you will have either a simpler or a
more complex introduction.
ENDING
If you press this button while a Rhythm is
being played back ([START/STOP]/[ */, ] but-
ton ashes), the BK-9 starts playing a closing
phrase (“Ending”) on the next downbeat. At
the end of this phrase, playback stops.
Depending on the type of VARIATION button
lighted you will have either a simpler or a
more complex closing phrase.
The available Rhythm patterns could be used as follows:
INTRO VARIATION
1 or 2
Beginning of the song.
First verse (simple accompaniment).
First chorus (richer accompaniment).
Last verse (simple accompaniment).
Closing section.
VARIATION
3 or 4
VARIATION
1 or 2
ENDING
If the [AUTO FILL IN] button lights, the BK-9 plays a transition before
switching to the newly selected VARIATION pattern. Example: if
the VARIATION [1] pattern is running, pressing the [4] button will
not switch to that pattern right away. The BK-9 rst plays a ll-in to
announce the new song section.
NOTE
While the four Variation patterns are repeated indenitely until
you stop Rhythm playback, the Intro and Ending phrases are
played only once.
Using Rhythms
The “interactive” aspect about the rhythms is that you can change the
key of the accompaniment simply by playing dierent notes or chords.
Additionally, you can select dierent variations (more or less complex
arrangements) for the active rhythm. The BK-9 provides several buttons
for this.
[START/STOP] / [ */, ]
This button is used to start and stop rhythm playback. While a
rhythm is running, the buttons indicator ashes red on the rst
beat of each bar, and green on the remaining beats.
MEMO
You can also start (and stop) rhythm playback simply by playing
on the keyboard. See the next function. (The Start/ Stop
function can also be assigned to an optional pedal switch or
D-Beam control.)
[SYNC START] / [ + ]
This button activates and switches o the “Sync Start” or “Sync
Start/Stop” function. Pressing it several times allows you to select
one of the following options:
Using Rhythms
37
Function
[SYNC START]
indicator
Explanation
Sync Start Lights red
Rhythm playback can be started by playing a
note or chord. Press [START/STOP]/[ */, ] to stop
rhythm playback.
Sync Start/Stop Lights green
Rhythm playback can be started by playing
a note or chord. Playback will stop when you
release all keys.
Dark
Rhythm playback needs to be started and
stopped using the [START/STOP]/[ */, ]button
(or the assigned optional pedal switch or
D-Beam control).
VARIATION [1], [2], [3], [4]
These buttons are used to select the complexity (number of parts)
of the rhythm arrangement:
[VARIATION] Explanation
[1]
The simplest accompaniment pattern. A good choice for
the rst verse of the songs you play.
[2]
A slightly more complex pattern you may want to use for
subsequent verses.
[3] This pattern would be a good choice for the rst chorus
[4]
This is the most complex arrangement. Consider selecting
it for the bridge or the nal chorus sections of a song.
MEMO
The VARIATION patterns are repeated (played back in a loop)
until a dierent pattern is selected or rhythm playback is
stopped.
[INTRO] / [ ' ]
Selects an introduction, which is usually used at the beginning of
a song. You can, however, also select this pattern for other song
sections. The behavior of the Intro pattern depends on when you
press the [INTRO] button:
[INTRO] Explanation
Pressed before
starting rhythm
playback
The indicator lights.
When you start rhythm playback, the BK-9 rst plays a
musical introduction. (This pattern is played back only
once).
Pressed
during rhythm
playback
The indicator ashes to signal that the INTRO pattern will
begin on the next downbeat.
When the intro is nished, the BK-9 returns to the
previously selected VARIATION pattern.
There are, in fact, four dierent INTRO patterns, that can be
selected using the VARIATION [1], [2], [3] and [4] buttons. Again,
the VARIATION buttons determine the complexity of the intro
arrangement.
[ENDING] / [ & ]
This button allows you to end your songs with a suitable closing
section if you don’t want to simply stop playback. The behavior
of the Ending pattern depends on when you press the [ENDING]
button:
[ENDING] Explanation
Pressed before
starting rhythm
playback
The indicator lights. When you start rhythm playback,
the BK-9 plays a musical ending. At the end of the
phrase, playback stops.
Pressed during
rhythm playback
The indicator ashes to signal that the ENDING
pattern will begin on the next downbeat.
When the ending is nished, rhythm playback stops.
Press the button
twice in succession
(“doubleclick”).
The Ritardando function is applied to Ending pattern.
There are four dierent ENDING patterns, that can be selected using
the VARIATION [1], [2], [3] and [4] buttons.
Again, the VARIATION buttons determine the complexity of the arrangement.
[BASS INV]
This button is used to switch the “Bass Inversion function on or
o. While the button is dark, the rhythm bass part always plays the
fundamental of your notes or chords. Example: if you play a chord
consisting of the notes C, E and G (which is recognized as a C major
chord), the bass part plays a C.
If the [BASS INV] button lights, the rhythm bass part uses the lowest
notes of the chords you play.
Example: if you play a chord consisting of the notes E, G and C (still
a C major chord), the bass part plays an E. This function therefore
gives you more artistic licence.
Playing with Automatic Accompaniments
38
[AUTO FILL IN]
When this button lights, the BK-9 plays a transition before switching
to the newly selected VARIATION pattern. Example: if the VARIATION
[1] pattern is running, pressing the [4] button will not switch to that
pattern right away—the BK-9 rst plays a ll-in to announce the
new song section.
NOTE
The duration of the ll-ins (transitions) can be halved if you like.
See “Fill In Half Bar” (p. 138). You can also speed up or slow
down playback during a ll-in. See “Fill Ritardando (p. 138).
Selecting Rhythms
1. Press a RHYTHM FAMILY button to select the rhythm
family.
NOTE
By pressing and holding one of these buttons, you activate the
lock function for rhythm selection, which means that rhythms
no longer change when you select Performance memories (p.
63).
The display shows a list of the rhythms that belong to this family. If
the currently selected rhythms belongs to the family whose button
you pressed, its name is in reverse and the indicator of the button
you pressed lights:
Right Display
If you press a dierent RHYTHM FAMILY button, the display shows
the beginning of the associated list (but the indicator of the
associated family button doesn’t light):
Right Display
2. Rotate the dial to select the rhythm and then push it.
The name of selected Rhythm is displayed in reverse.
3. Now you can also use [INC] and [DEC] buttons to select a
dierent Rhythm.
In this case the Rhythm is recalled immediately.
4. If you need select a Rhythm of another family, press
another Rhythm button and repeat the step 2.
5. Press [EXIT] to leave the Rhythm selection page.
MEMO
Rhythms can also be selected by simply pressing the [NUMERIC]
key and entering their number (p. 32).
Playing Back Rhythms
1. Set the BK-9’s [VOLUME] knob to a reasonable level (about
1/4).
2. Press the [SPLIT] button if you want to play in Split mode.
MEMO
The default setting for the split point is note number 60 (C4).
You can change the split point to a dierent note .See “Split
Point” (p. 136).
3. Select the rhythm you want to use.
Playing Back Rhythms
39
4. Press the VARIATION [1], [2], [3] or [4] button to select the
complexity of the verse pattern.
For example press the VARIATION [2].
5. Press the [INTRO] / [ & ] button (it lights) to start rhythm
playback with an introduction.
6. Press the VARIATION [1], [2], [3] or [4] button to select the
complexity of the INTRO pattern.
For example press the VARIATION [3].
The VARIATION button pressed at the step 6. lights and the
VARIATION button pressed at the step 4. ashes to indicate the
verse complexity that will be played back at the end of the Intro
pattern.
7. Play a chord on the keyboard.
MEMO
You can activate the “Dynamic Arranger” function to control the
volume of the accompaniment parts via the way you strike the
keys in the chord recognition area (velocity sensitivity).
See “Dynamic Arranger (p. 139).
8. The main page displays the name of the last chord the
BK-9 recognized:
Left Display
9. Press the [START/STOP]/[*/,] button to start rhythm
playback.
The [START/STOP]/[ */, ] indicator lights and the BK-9 starts playing
back the introductory phrase.
10. Play dierent chords on the keyboard and listen to the
eect this has on the rhythm.
11. Switch on the [AUTO FILL IN] button (it lights).
This means that when you select a dierent VARIATION pattern,
the BK-9 will play a transition (ll-in) before switching to the new
pattern.
12. Press a VARIATION [1], [2], [3] or [4] button to select a
more complex or a simpler accompaniment.
• If you press it before the last beat of the current measure, the ll-in
starts immediately and lasts until the end of the current measure,
then the newly selected VARIATION pattern is played back.
• If you press the desired VARIATION button on the last beat of a bar,
the ll-in starts at the next downbeat and lasts an entire bar. Only
then will the BK-9 switch to the newly selected VARIATION pattern.
13. If necessary, you can change the rhythms tempo:
• Press the TEMPO [] or [] button to decrease or increase the
tempo
• Press the [TAP TEMPO] button at least three times at the desired
tempo.
The BK-9 calculates the intervals between your presses and sets the
corresponding tempo value.
MEMO
Simultaneously press the TEMPO [] and [] buttons
(“STANDARD”) to return to the rhythms preset tempo.
TIPS
You can press and hold the [TAP TEMPO] button to lock the
tempo setting (p. 63).
14. Press the [ENDING] / [ & ] button to end rhythm playback
with a suitable closing section.
Playing with Automatic Accompaniments
40
You could also stop playback simply by pressing the [START/STOP]/
[ */, ] button or by releasing all keys on the keyboard. See “[SYNC
START] / [ + ]” (p. 36).
While rhythm or SMF song playback is stopped, the [TAP TEMPO]
button ashes to indicate the selected tempo.
41
The ONE TOUCH memories help you to select Tones for the real-
time parts that match the atmosphere of the current rhythm. There
are four such ONE TOUCH memories per rhythm.
Select a ‘One Touch
1. Select the desired rhythm.
See “Selecting Rhythms (p. 38).
2. Switch on the [ONE TOUCH] button (its indicator lights).
If you haven’t selected any ONE TOUCH memory since switching
on the BK-9, the indicators of TONE buttons [1], [2], [3] and [4] ash.
Otherwise, the BK-9 automatically recalls the last ONE TOUCH
memory you selected.
The display shows the list of tones for each One Touch:
Right Display
The string (“..on.. or “......”) at the right of the part name (UP1, UP2,
LWR, MBS) indicates which part will be active:
Right Display
String Explanation
...... The part will not be active.
..on.. The part will be active.
In the example above the UP1 part will be active.
3. Press the ashing TONE button assigned to the desired
ONE TOUCH memory ([1]~[4]).
The indicator of the button you press lights, while the indicators of
the remaining three buttons still ash.
The main page in the left display shows “ONE TOUCH” followed by
the number of the current ONE TOUCH memory.
MEMO
You can use the dial to recall the desired ONE TOUCH memory.
4. Start playback of the rhythm.
See “Playing Back Rhythms” (p. 38).
5. Play a melody on the keyboard.
6. Now press another TONE ([1]~[4]) button than the one
that is currently active.
7. Again play a melody on the keyboard.
The newly selected ONE TOUCH memory has recalled a dierent
sound for the melody part. Note that the ONE TOUCH function also
recalls other settings, like the tempo, INTRO/ENDING, etc.
MEMO
The BK-9 has a function that allows you to exclude certain
settings when a new ONE TOUCH memory is selected. See
“One Touch Hold” (p. 144).
8. Press a dierent TONE [1]~[4] button to recall the
associated ONE TOUCH memory.
Tone selection for the real-time part as well as other settings change
in accordance with the newly selected ONE TOUCH memory.
Deselect ‘One Touch
1. To switch o the ONE TOUCH function and return to the
Tones that were selected before you activated the ONE
TOUCH function, press the TONE [1]~[4] button whose
indicator lights steadily.
Its indicator ashes along with the other three TONE buttons.
2. Press the [ONE TOUCH] button to leave ONE TOUCH
memory selection mode.
The TONE buttons stop ashing. (Only the indicator corresponding
to the last Tone family you selected lights steadily.) You can now
select dierent Tones for real-time part without actually leaving the
ONE TOUCH function (if it is still on).
11. One Touch Memories: Why using them?
One Touch Memories: Why using them?
42
How Can You Tell Whether the ONE
TOUCH Function is On or O?
If the “ONE TOUCH eld on the main page is followed by a number
(1~4), the ONE TOUCH function is currently on. If the “ONE TOUCH”
eld is followed by a dash (“–”), the ONE TOUCH function is o.
One Touch (1) ON
Left Display
One Touch OFF
Left Display
Programming Your Own ONE TOUCH
Settings (One Touch Edit)
The BK-9 allows you to save your own ONE TOUCH settings, which
may come in handy for CUSTOM rhythms for which there are no
“presets”. The following operation saves the rhythm and its (new)
ONE TOUCH settings to the “My Rhythms” folder on the USB
memory connected to the USB MEMORY port.
NOTE
Never remove a USB memory while this unit is turned on. Doing
so may corrupt the unit’s data or the data on the USB memory.
NOTE
Carefully insert the optional USB memory all the way into the
port until it is rmly in place.
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the BK-9.
After a few seconds, the display shows the
contents of the USB memory.
Right Display
2. Press the [ONE TOUCH] button. The display changes to:
Right Display
This “One Touch Edit” page can also be selected via the BK-9’s menu.
3. Select the ONE TOUCH memory you want to change by
pressing one of the ashing TONE buttons [1]~[4].
The display changes to:
Programming Your Own ONE TOUCH Settings (One Touch Edit)
43
Right Display
(Here, ONE TOUCH memory 2 has been selected for editing.)
MEMO
You can also select the desired ONE TOUCH using the dial.
4. Change the required settings.
As soon as you change any setting, the display alerts you to the fact
that the contents of the selected memory no longer corresponds to
the current settings (“EDITED”):
Right Display
5. Rotate the dial to select the ONE TOUCH memory where
you want to save your new settings.
6. Press the [WRITE] button.
The display changes to:
Right Display
NOTE
The above message is only displayed the rst time you press
[WRITE] after editing a ONE TOUCH memory.
7. To save your ONE TOUCH changes, use the dial to select
“Yes” and press it to conrm.
The display shows the “Executing” message and then “Operation
Complete.
Select “No” and press [ENTER] if you don’t want to save your
changes after all.
If the “My Rhythms” folder on the USB memory already
contains a rhythm le of the same name
In that case, the display shows the following message when you
select Yes” and push the dial (see above):
Right Display
What a One Touch memory saves
Group Parameters Parameter
Front Panel (button status)
VARIATION [1], [2], [3], [4]
[AUTO FILL IN]
[INTRO/ENDING]
[SYNC START]
[SPLIT]
[MELODY INTELL]
‘Performance Edit’ Tone Part View’ (p. 127).
All except for “Key Touch“
‘Performance Edit’ Tone Part Eects’ (p. 131).
All
‘Performance Edit’ ’Split (p. 136).
“Lower Old” only
‘Performance Edit’ Arranger Setting (p. 137).
Zone
Type
‘Performance Edit’ ’Melody Intelligent (p. 141).
All
‘Performance Edit’ Assign Switches’ (p. 139).
All
‘Performance Edit’ ’Scale Tune Switch (p. 140).
All
‘Performance Edit’ ’Scale Tune (p. 140).
All
‘Performance Edit’ ’D Beam’ (p. 53).
All
SPECIAL BEHAVIOUR of the INTRO Division
Whatever the status (O, On) of the INTRO division saved in a
One Touch is, if you recall the One Touch memory while no
Rhythm is played back, the INTRO division is always set On.
44
12. Using the BK-9 as a USB player
This section explains how to playback MIDI (SMF) and audio songs
stored on an optional USB memory. Note that it is also possible to
select rhythms on that device and to use them in the same way as
the internal rhythms. New song and rhythm les can be copied to
the USB memory using your computer as you purchase them.
Getting Ready to Use the BK-9 as a
USB Player
1. On your computer, copy the new song and rhythm les to
an optional USB memory (memory stick).
NOTE
Use USB memory sold by Roland (M-UF-series). We cannot
guarantee operation if any other USB memory is used.
2. Connect the USB memory to your BK-9.
NOTE
Carefully insert the optional USB memory all
the way into the port until it is rmly in place.
NOTE
Never remove a USB memory while this unit
is turned on. Doing so may corrupt the unit’s
data or the data on the USB memory.
NOTE
The BK-9 supports USB memories with a capacity of up to 2 TB.
File types the BK-9 can read and play back
Extension Format
Rhythms .stl
Standard MIDI Files
(SMF)
.mid 0 or 1
.kar
Audio les
.mp3
• MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3
• Sampling frequency: 44.1kHz
• Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/
128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps,
VBR (variable bit rate)
.wav, .aif
• 16-bit linear
• Sampling frequency: 44.1 kHz
• Stereo/mono
NOTE
The BK-9 is not able to read audio les with .AIFF” extension.
Please use your personal computer to rename the le extension
to “.AIF”.
Caution when Playing Back Audio Files
Playing back an mp3 le or changing the playback tempo of an
audio le places a signicant processing burden on the BK-9, and in
some cases may cause it to be unable to completely process all of the
performance data from the keyboard.
If this occurs, you may be able to solve the problem by taking the
following actions.
• Use WAVE/AIFF format data rather than mp3 format data
• Return the song tempo to its original setting (to 0%)
An mp3 le has little time of the blank at the head and the end of
the le. Therefore, the sound might cut o when an mp3 le played
repeatedly with Audio Key function.
If this occurs, you may be able to solve the problem by taking the
following actions.
• Use WAVE/AIFF format data rather than mp3 format data
Selecting a Song or Rhythm on a USB
Memory
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the BK-9 or, if it was
already inserted, press the [USB MEMORY] button
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents of the USB
memory.
Right Display
The icons to the left of the le names indicate the le type:
Icon Explanation
Rhythm le
SMF le
Audio mp3 le or .KAR
Audio WAVE le or .AIF
Folder
2. Rotate the dial to select the le you want to play back or
display.
3. Push the dial to load the le.
The [USB MEMORY] button now lights to indicate that you selected
a le on the USB memory.
If the le you need is located inside a folder, you must rst select
that folder, push the dial to see its contents and then select the le.
If you opened a folder by mistake, press the [EXIT] button to return
to a higher level.
MEMO
Press and hold the [EXIT] button to return to the main page.
Playing Back a Song or Rhythm from a USB Memory
45
Playing Back a Song or Rhythm from
a USB Memory
If you selected a rhythm, see “Playing Back Rhythms” (p. 38),
because operation is the same as for internal rhythms.
In the following, we will therefore only show you how to play back
song les located on a USB memory.
NOTE
The BK-9 has no internal memory where you could store SMF or
audio les.
1. Select a song (SMF or audio le) on the USB memory.
See “Selecting a Song or Rhythm on a USB Memory (p. 44).
2. Press the [START/STOP] /[*/,] button to start playback.
The [*/, ] buttons indicator lights and song playback starts.
3. If necessary, you can change the song’s playback tempo:
• Press the TEMPO [] or [] button to decrease or increase the
tempo.
NOTE
If you set a tempo value close to the upper or lower limit for an
mp3 or WAVE le, playback may sound a little strange.
• Press the [TAP TEMPO] button at least three times at the desired
tempo. (This function is not available if you selected an audio le
(WAVE or mp3).)
TheBK-9 calculates the intervals between your presses and sets the
corresponding tempo value.
MEMO
Simultaneously press the TEMPO [] and [] buttons
(“STANDARD”) to return to the rhythms preset tempo.
4. Press the [START/STOP]/[*/, ] button again to pause song
playback.
The [START/STOP]/[ */, ] button goes dark.
5. Press [START/STOP]/[*/, ] button yet again to resume
playback.
6. Press the [SYNC START] /[ + ] button to stop playback
The Playback stops and the playback position return to the
beginning of the song.
You can use the following buttons to control song playback (see the
gray legends):
Button Explanation
Starts or pauses song playback.
Stops song playback and allows you to return to the
beginning of the current song.
Rewinds the song.
Fast-forwards the song.
Activating the ‘Play All Songs’
parameter for the USB memory
Activating the ‘Play All Songs’ function
1.
Connect an optional USB memory to the BK-9 or, if it was
already inserted, press the [USB MEMORY] button.
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents of the USB
memory.
2. Rotate the dial to select the folder that contains the songs
you want to listen to.
3. Push the dial to open the folder.
Using the BK-9 as a USB player
46
4. Rotate the dial to select the song where you want
playback to start.
5. Push the dial to conrm your selection.
6. Press the [QUICK MENU] button to jump to the “USB
Memory Edit page.
The display changes to:
Left Display
To return to the BK-9’s main page, press and hold the [EXIT] button.
7. Rotate the dial to select “Play All Songs in Folder” and
push it.
The following message appears:
Right Display
NOTE
STL les contained in the selected folder will be ignored when
you start playback (see below).
8. Press the [START/STOP]/[*/, ] button to start playback of
all songs.
NOTE
While playback of all songs is running, you can navigate the
USB memory (to check its contents, for example). The “Play All
Songs” function continues to play back the les of the folder you
selected in step (2) above.
If you select a dierent le while navigating (by pushing the
dial), the “Play All Songs” function is switched o.
9. Press the [SYNC START] /[ + ] button to stop sequential
playback.
Deactivating the ‘Play All Songs’ function
The “Play All Songs” function needs to be deactivated if you no
longer need it. To do so, proceed as follows:
1. If the display doesn’t currently show the contents of the
connected USB memory, press the [USB MEMORY] button
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button to jump to the “USB
Memory Edit page.
3. Rotate the dial to select “Stop Auto Play” and push it to
deactivate the function.
Pressing the [START/STOP]/[*/, ] button now will only start
playback of the selected song.
Using ‘Track Mute and ‘Center Cancel’
You can use this function to mute tracks of rhythms or the melody
part of the selected Standard MIDI File (SMF). After selecting a WAVE
or mp3 audio le, you can attenuate the vocal part at the center
of the stereo image (“Center Cancel”). The Mute function behavior
depends on the selected le type.
1. Select a song (SMF or audio) or a rhythm. See “Selecting a
Song or Rhythm on a USB Memory (p. 44).
2. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ] button to start playback.
3. Press the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL) button (its
indicator lights).
The Track Mute or “Center Cancel” function will turn on. This
depends on the le type you selected:
File Type Function Explanation
Rhythm Track Mute
The specied rhythm track(s) is
muted (Default: AC1~AC6).
SMF Track Mute
The specied Standard MIDI le
track is muted (Default: channel
4).
Audio (mp3, WAVE) Center Cancel
Sounds in the center (the melodic
portion of the sound) will be
minimized.
NOTE
For some audio songs, the vocal sound may not be eliminated
completely.
4. Press the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL) button again
to make its indicator go dark.
This switches the Track Mute” or “Center Cancel” function back o.
Selecting the Track(s) to Mute for
Rhythms or SMF Songs
The following procedure allows you to specify the track of the
selected Standard MIDI File that should be muted when you switch
on the [TRACK MUTE] button.
NOTE
This function is not available for audio les.
1. Select a rhythm or an SMF song.
2. Press and hold the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL)
button.
Activating the Lyrics
47
This function can also be selected using [MENU] button “Global”
“Rhythm/SMF Track Mute”.
Depending on the le type, the display changes to
Right Display
... or:
Right Display
The name of the Tone assigned to that track appears in the right of
the track.
When you start playback, you will notice that active parts are
indicated by moving bar graphs that simulate level meters. If
[TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL) button lights the bar graphs of
muted parts do not move.
3. Rotate the dial to move the cursor to the track you want
to mute.
4. Push the dial to highlight the corresponding track number.
5. Rotate the dial to change the setting .
The possibilities are:
Display indication Explanation
<no indication> The associated track is played back.
M
The associated track is no longer played back
(muted).
If you want to save your selection of the track(s) that should be
muted for any Rhythm or SMF le you play back, see “Save
Global” (p. 148).
When you start playback, you will notice that active parts are
indicated by moving bar graphs that simulate level meters. The bar
graphs of muted parts do not move.
Right Display
6. If there is no need to save your settings, press and hold
the [EXIT] button to return to the main page.
Activating the Lyrics
The BK-9 can show the lyrics of Standard MIDI Files or mp3 songs
you load.
If such song les contain Lyrics data, the lyrics are displayed on
an external screen you connect to the BK-9 (see “Connecting
a Television Set (p. 23), unless you set the “External Lyrics”
parameter to “O (p. 127).
Sometimes, however, it may be wiser to orient the external screen
in such a way that the audience can easily follow the lyrics, which
may then mean that you no longer see what is displayed. If you
need to see the lyrics, you can follow them on the BK-9’s internal
display (only for SMF les).
1. Load and play a song with lyrics data.
See “Selecting a Song or Rhythm on a USB Memory (p. 44) and
“Playing Back a Song or Rhythm from a USB Memory (p. 45).
2. Press the [LYRICS] button.
The internal left display now shows the lyrics of the selected song (4
lines at a time) and the chords of the song (only for SMF les).
Left Display
During the play back you can conveniently choose another song.
The left display will continue to display lyrics.
3. At the end of the song, press the [EXIT] button to return to
the previous page.
MEMO
The BK-9 can display photos in succession on external
monitor. See “Displaying photos automatically” (p. 73).
You can remove chord information and keep only the lyrics
on the external display. See “External Lyrics Settings” (p. 147).
Using the BK-9 as a USB player
48
Using the “Mark & Jump” function
(only for SMF)
The BK-9 gives you the possibility to “mark (memorize) up to 4
locations of the current song (SMF) and “jump” to any of the marked
location. In addition, if you save the song, the four “Mark & Jump
locations are stored within the song.
The four “Mark & Jump” locations can be selected by pressing the
VARIATION [1]~[4] buttons.
When you select a song that contains such markers, the indicators
of the VARIATION [1]~[4] buttons light. For songs that do not
contain these indications, the indicators remain dark.
Editing and programming “Mark & Jump” locations can be carried
out as follows:.
Creating “Mark locations
1. Load an SMF song.
See “Selecting a Song or Rhythm on a USB Memory (p. 44).
2. Open the “Smf Mark Jump Edit” page:
You have two ways to do it:
a. Press the VARIATION [1]~[4] button whose indicator is
dark (“mark” location empty).
NOTE
The “Smf Mark Jump Edit” page will not open if you select
a VARIATION [1]~[4] button whose indicator lights (“mark”
location already set).
b. Press [MENU] button and by the dial select the “Smf
Mark Jump Edit” page.
Right Display
As you can see there are four elds (“Mark Bar 1”~ “Mark Bar 4”:
Parameter Value Explanation
Mark Bar 1
OFF, 1 ~ song length
in Bars
OFF
Empty “mark” location (the
corresponding VARIATION
[1]~[4] is dark)
song length in Bars
It contains the indication of the
number of the bar where you
want to jump.
Mark Bar 2
Mark Bar 3
Mark Bar 4
The following operation can be performed whether the song is
playback or not.
Memorizing a “Mark Bar location
3.
Select the “Mark location by pressing the VARIATION
[1]~[4] buttons or using the dial to move the cursor on the
“Mark Bar” eld.
4. Press the [*-, ] button to start the song playback and
listen to the song until you reach the point where you
want to insert the “mark”.
5. Press the CHORD LOOP [REC] button whose indicator
ashes. This inserts the number of the current measure in
the “Mark Bar” eld.
The corresponding button (VARIATION [1]~[4]) indicator lights and
the next “Mark Bar eld is selected.
To select a dierent “Mark Bar eld you can either press a button
(VARIATION [1]~[4]) whose indicator is o or use the dial.
6. If you want you can press again the CHORD LOOP [REC]
button to program the next “Mark Bar location and so on.
MEMO
You may also overwrite a previous “Mark Bar location by
positioning the cursor on the “Mark Bar eld and pressing the
CHORD LOOP [REC] button to set the location again.
7. Press the [+] button to stop the song playback.
Deleting a “Mark Bar location
8.
Press the VARIATION [1]~[4] buttons or use the dial to
select “Mark Bar eld you want to delete and press the
CHORD LOOP [PLAY] button whose indicator ashes.
Using the “Mark & Jump” function (only for SMF)
49
The corresponding button (VARIATION [1]~[4]) indicator goes o.
Saving the Song with the “Mark
locations inside
1. Program the “Mark” location you need in your song.
See “Creating “Mark locations” (p. 48).
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button while the “Smf Mark
Jump Edit” page is shown.
The following page appears:
Left Display
3. Push the dial to select “Save.
The [WRITE] indicator ashes and the right display shows the
contents of the USB memory.
Right Display
4. If necessary use the dial to select the folder where you
want to save the song with marker.
To return to a lower hierarchical level, you can press the [EXIT]
button.
5. Press the [WRITE] button.
The BK-9 suggests the name of the song you loaded.
Right Display
6. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
7. Press the [WRITE] button to save the song.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
“Smf Mark Jump” page.
If the USB memory already contains a le of the name you have
entered, the display asks you whether it is OK to overwrite it.
In that case, select YES” to replace the le with the one whose
name you changed. (Select “NO” to return to the page where you
can change the name. Then, push the dial.
Play using the “Mark location
1. Load an SMF song that contains such marker location.
See “Selecting a Song or Rhythm on a USB Memory (p. 44).
2. Open the “Smf Mark Jump Edit” page:
You have two ways to do it:
a. Press the VARIATION [1]~[4] buttons whose indicator is
dark (“mark” location empty).
NOTE
The “Smf Mark Jump Edit” page will not open if you select
a VARIATION [1]~[4] buttons whose indicator lights (“mark”
location already set).
b. Press [MENU] button and by the dial select the “Smf
Mark Jump Edit” page.
3. Press the [*-, ] button to start the song playback.
4. Press the VARIATION [1]~[4] button to jump to the related
“Mark” position.
*-,
Mark 1
Mark 2
Mark 3
Mark 4
SMF Song
MEMO
You can position the song pointer before playing. Press a
VARIATION [1]~[4] button that contains a marker position and
then press the [ */, ] button. The song will start from your
desired point.
5. Press another VARIATION [1]~[4] button to make the song
pointer jump to the related memorized location.
6. Press the [+] button to stop the playback.
50
13. Operations on USB Memory
Changing the Name of a File or
Folder (Rename)
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the BK-9 or, if it was
already inserted, press the [USB MEMORY] button.
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents of the USB
memory.
2. Rotate the dial to select the le or folder you want to
rename.
3. Press the [QUICK MENU] button to jump to the “USB
Memory Edit page.
The display changes to:
Left Display
To return to the BK-9’s main page, press and hold the [EXIT] button.
MEMO
While the contents of the connected USB memory is displayed,
pressing [QUICK MENU] takes you to the “USB Memory Edit”
page where you can select “Rename”, “Delete” or “Search”.
4. Rotate the dial to select “Rename” and push it.
The display shows the following page:
Left Display
5. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
6. Press the ashing [WRITE] button to conrm.
Deleting a File or Folder (Delete)
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the BK-9 or, if it was
already inserted, press the [USB MEMORY] button.
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents of the USB
memory.
2. Rotate the dial to select the le or folder you want to
delete.
3. Press the [QUICK MENU] button to jump to the “USB
Memory Edit page.
4. Rotate the dial to select “Delete” and push it.
The display shows the following page:
Left Display
5. Use the dial to select “YES” (delete) or “NO (don’t delete).
6. Push the dial to conrm your selection.
If you selected a folder in step (2) above, the BK-9 asks you for a
conrmation:
Left Display
Choose “YES” to conrm or “NO” to abort the operation.
Using the ‘Search’ Function to Locate
Songs or Rhythms
The BK-9 provides a “Search function that allows you to search the
connected USB storage device for the les you need. This function is
available even while the BK-9 is playing back a song or rhythm, allowing
you to prepare the next song without keeping your audience waiting.
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the BK-9 or, if it was
already inserted, press the [USB MEMORY] button.
After a few seconds, the display shows the contents of the USB
memory.
2. If you know the folder where the le is located, select it
using the dial.
If you are not sure about the location, do not select a folder to avoid
Using the ‘Search Function to Locate Songs or Rhythms
51
that the “Search function only looks in that folder.
3. Press the [QUICK MENU] button to jump to the “USB
Memory Edit page.
4. Use the dial to select “Search.
The display shows the following page:
Left Display
The rst character position is already selected (“A”).
5. Rotate the dial to select the desired character position.
The buttons below allow you the following operations:
Button Explanation
Press this button to switch between upper-case, lower-case
characters, numbers and symbols.
Press this button to delete the selected character.
Press this button to insert a character.
6. Use the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the desired
characters.
7. Repeat steps (5) and (6) above to complete the character
string you are looking for.
8. Push the dial to start the search.
The BK-9 searches the USB storage device for les whose names
match the character string you entered and displays them. The title
bar shows the path of the folder that contains the selected les.
NOTE
The “Search function can nd and display 100 les at a time.
9. Use the dial to select the song or rhythm you want to play
back, then press the dial to conrm your selection.
10. Press the [EXIT] button to close the list.
11. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ]button to start playback of
the selected song or rhythm.
52
14. Other important functions
This section presents other important functions you may need regularly.
Transposing to a Dierent Key
This function allows you to transpose the BK-9’s pitch in semi-tone
steps. Depending on the mode setting, this transposition applies to
all sections or just a specic setting (p. 137).
1. Press [KEY] button.
The display changes to:
Left Display
The current “KEY setting (transposition interval) is displayed and
already selected.
MEMO
Pressing and holding the [KEY] button locks the “Key setting.
2. Use the dial to select to specify which parts should be
aected: “Song”, “Keyboard”, “Song + Keyboard”.
3. Use the [INC] and [DEC] button to select the desired “Key”
setting.
“Key” setting
-6 ~ 0 ~ +5 (semitone units)
If the “Key setting diers from “0”, the [KEY] indicator lights.
After a few seconds, the “KEY pop-up window disappears. Press the
[EXIT] button to close it immediately.
MEMO
To set the transpose to 0 immediately, press the [KEY] button
while the display shows the “KEY pop-up window.
NOTE
If you choose to transpose the real-time parts, rhythm playback
is also transposed. MEMO
You can also change the key setting using [MENU] button
“Performance Edit” “Key (p. 137).
Changing the Octave
This function allows you to transpose the real-time parts (Upper 1,
Upper 2, Lower and Manual Bass) up or down in octave steps.
1. Press OCTAVE button
The display changes to:
Left Display
2. Rotate the dial to select the desired real-time part
([UPPER1, [UPPER2], [LOWER], [M. BASS]).
The display highlight in reverse the real-time part selected.
3. Use the [INC] and [DEC]to select the desired “Octave
setting for real-time part already selected.
“Octave” setting
-4 ~ 0 ~ +4
MEMO
You can also change the octave setting using [MENU] button
“Performance Edit”Tone Part View” Octave Shift (p. 129).
Using the ‘Melody Intell(igent)’
Function
The automatic accompaniment can add a counter-melody to the notes
you play with the Upper 1 part. Those automatic harmonies are based on
the chords you play in the chord recognition area.
The counter-melody is played by the Melody Intelligent part. There are 18
harmony types to choose from. See “Melody Intelligent” settings” (p. 141).
1. Press the [MELODY INTELL] button (so that it lights).
This adds a harmony to the notes you play.
Assign Switches [S1], [S2], [S3], [S4]
53
If you want you can change the Melody Intelligent Parameters:
2. Press [MENU] button “Performance Edit” “Melody
Intelligent”
For more information about Melody Intelligent Parameters see p.
141.
TIPS
You can also select the Melody Intelligent Parameters page by
pressing and holding [MELODY INTELL]
3. Press the [MELODY INTELL] button again (its indicator
goes dark) to switch o the counter-melody.
Assign Switches [S1], [S2], [S3], [S4]
The Assign Switch buttons allow you to quickly access a function
you would normally select via the display (which may involve
several steps).
How to Assign a Function
You can assign functions to these buttons.
1. Press [MENU] button “Performance Edit” Assign
Switch
Right Display
2. Select the “Switch 1/2/3/4” and assign the desired
function. See “Browsing Windows and Setting Parameter
Values” (p. 26).
For the list of functions see Assign Switches” (p. 139).
How to Recall the Assigned Functions
1. Press the [S1], [S2], [S3] or [S4] button to recall the
assigned function.
Using the Assign Switches with
SuperNATURAL Tones.
Each SuperNATURAL instrument provides eective performance
variation sounds; you can use [S1] and [S2] (default) to instantly
switch between them as you play.
For the list of variation sounds please see the Tone & Drum Kit List“.
You can download it from http://www.roland.com/manuals.
MEMO
As default [S1] and [S2] button are assigned to “SN Variation 1
and “SN Variation 2“.
Using the D-BEAM Controller
The D-BEAM Controller allows you to control various aspects of
your performance or to add something to the music, by moving
your hand, head, etc., in the air. You only need to make sure that
you do so over the two eyes and within a 40 cm (±16”) range. Your
movements are translated into musical expression.
1. Press the D-BEAM button that is assigned to the function
you wish to use. For example [DJ GEAR].
This switches on the D-BEAM controller.
2. Start playback of a Rhythm (p. 38) or Song (p. 45).
Other important functions
54
3. Move your hand towards and away from the D-BEAM’s
e y e s ”.
What you hear now is the “Cutting eect.
4. To assign another function, press and hold a D-BEAM
buttons.
The display changes to:
Right Display
The D-Beam settings can be also selected using [MENU] button
“Performance Edit” “D Beam”.
5. Use the dial to assign another function to the D-BEAM [DJ
GEAR].
6. Press [EXIT] button to exit the D-BEAM functions.
D-BEAM Functions
DJ GEAR button
Function Explanation
Vinyl RPM
Allows you to simulate the sound you hear when
manually turning a vinyl record to locate (cue) the
position where you wish to start playback.
Cutting
This is a very powerful lter eect that allows you to
suppress the high frequencies in a rhythmic way (like
a DJ does sometimes).
TT Motor Style
Simulates the eect you hear when you suddenly
stop a turntable: the playback speed decreases,
while the pitch drops and the sound becomes
mued.
TT Motor SMF
Scratch
The D-BEAM Controller can be used for adding
scratch noises.
Tape Rewind
Allows you add the sound you hear when you
rewind a cassette tape without stopping playback
(the music plays backwards and at high speed).
Vinyl Mode Audio
Allows you to switch the VINYL MODE function of
the currently loaded audio le on and o and thus
to cause its playback speed and pitch to become
somewhat erratic.
SFX button
Function Explanation
Chimes
Here, you can select various “noises to be added to
your music simply by moving your hand over the
D-BEAM. We will not try to describe them: just try
them out!
Boeeeen
Bubble
Stream
Pour Bottle
Finger Snaps
Voice One
Voice Aou
Explosion
Gun Shot
Car Engine
Applause
Laughing
Train Horn
Bird
Dog
Seashore
Rain
INST button
Function Explanation
Harp
In this case, the D-BEAM will play musical notes on
the D-Beam part. The pitch and chords of those
patterns depend on the notes you play on the
keyboard. Please try out the options on oer. It’s the
quickest way to nd out how they sound and work.
Marimba
Mandolin
Guitar 1
Guitar 2
Jazz Scat
Bell
Bass Drum
LoFi Rave
Sweep
Beep
CTRL button
Function Explanation
Start/Stop Same behavior of the [START/STOP] button .
FADE IN
Fading in means that the volume
The volume gradually increases, giving the
impression that you have been playing for a long
time before what you play becomes audible.
To change the Fade In duration see “Fade IN/OUT
Settings” (p. 148).
Fade OUT
The volume gradually decreases until it reaches
zero.
To change the Fade Out duration see “Fade IN/
OUT Settings” (p. 148).
Auto Fill Same behavior of the [AUTO FILL IN] button.
Fill Up
You can use this function up to three times to
jump to the most complex level (“Variation 4”).
If you then use the D-Beam again, however,
nothing happens.
Fill Down
You can use this function up to three times to
jump to the simplest level (“Variation 1”). If you
then use the D-Beam again, however, nothing
happens.
ADrum On-O, ABass
On-O, Acc On-O,
ABass ADrum On-O,
ABass Acc On-O,
ADrum Acc On-O
This settings allow you to switch the backing
parts on/o There are also combined on/o
options.
Tempo Up, Tempo Down
Select this options to increase or decrease the
current tempo. By moving your hand outside
the D-BEAM’s range, you return to the previous
tempo value.
Using the Metronome
55
CTRL button
Function Explanation
Pitch Up
By moving your hand over the D-Beam, you can
generate a value between “64” (no Pitch Bend)
and “127” (maximum upward bend). By moving
your hand outside the D-Beam’s range, the value
returns to “64” (no Pitch Bend).
Pitch Down
By moving your hand over the D-BEAM, you can
generate a value between “64” (no Pitch Bend)
and “0” (maximum downward bend). As soon
as you move your hand outside the D-BEAM’s
reach, the value returns to “64” (no Pitch Bend).
Modulation
Select this function if you want the D-Beam
to duplicate the modulation function of the
Bender/Modulation lever.
Cut Reso Up
(Only for Upper 1, 2)
By moving your hand over the D-BEAM, you can
vary the current TVF Cuto value.
Resonance parameter will be set to “+63”
(maximum), while the Cuto frequency can be
controlled between “0” (no change) and “+63”
(maximum increase). This allows you to create
some nifty lter eects that are particularly
useful for Dance/Techno music. When you move
your hand outside the D-BEAM’s range, both
Resonance and TVF Cuto return to their original
values (“0”= no change).
NOTE
* If TVF Cuto is already set to “+63”, you cannot
increase it using the D-BEAM Controller. In that
case, the following option is probably more
useful. Also note that some Tones already
use the highest possible TVF Cuto value by
default, in which case you cannot add more
overtones (by opening the lter even further).
Cut Reso Down
(Only for Upper 1, 2)
By moving your hand over the D-Beam, you can
vary the current TVF Cuto value.
The Resonance parameter will be set to “+63”
(maximum), while the Cuto frequency can be
controlled between “0” (no change) and “–64”
(lowest possible TVF Cuto setting). When you
move your hand outside the D-BEAM’s range,
both Resonance and TVF Cuto return to their
original values (“0”= no change).
NOTE
* The TVF Cuto frequency cannot be lowered if
TVF Cuto is already set to “–64”.
LWR Arpeggio 1 Octave ,
LWR Arpeggio 2 Octave ,
LWR Arpeggio 3 Octave
By moving your hand over the D-Beam, you
cause the D-BEAM part to play arpeggios
(broken chords) based on the notes extracted
from the current song. Depending on the setting
you select here, the notes will be arpeggiated
over 1, 2 or 3 octaves.
NOTE
* Do not forget to assign a suitable Tone to the
Lower part, which acts as “D-BEAM part”.
LWR Chord 1 Octave,
LWR Chord 2 Octave,
LWR Chord 3 Octave
By holding your hand inside the D-BEAM’s range,
you cause the D-BEAM part to sound the notes
extracted from the current song. You could use
this function to add syncopated brass or guitar
“hits” to your melody. The velocity value used for
playing these notes is “100”. The number (1, 2 or
3) bears on the octave of this “added chord”: 1=
Ab3~G4, 2= Ab4~G5 and 3= Ab5~G6. Move your
hand outside the D-BEAM’s range to stop the
D-BEAM part from sounding the chord.
NOTE
* Do not forget to assign a suitable Tone to the
Lower part, which acts as “D-BEAM part”.
Track Mute On-O
Same behavior of the [TRACK MUTE/CENTER
CANCEL] button .
Rotary HB S/F
Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the
Rotary eect for the Harmonic Bars.
CTRL button
Function Explanation
Audio X-Fade
This function is used to activate a crossfade
between two les. To make this work, select a
dierent song while the current song is played
back and use the D-BEAM to activate the transi-
tion. The BK-9 creates a brief blend between the
current and the next audio song. (This function is
not available for SMF songs.)
Audio Key set Up
The D Beam can be used to start the phrases
of the last set you loaded (p. 70) either in
descending (going back to the preceding
memory) or ascending order.
Audio Key set Dw
MFX Control1
Same behavior of the MFX1 and MFX2 sliders.
See “Sound Eects for the real-time parts” (p.
34).
MFX Control2
D Beam Part View
Function Explanation
Volume
Use this parameters to set the volume of the
selected D-Beam instrument
Reverb Send
Use this parameters to set the Reverb and Chorus
Send Level to the D-Beam instrument.
Chorus Send
Panpot
Use this parameter to change the stereo placement
of the selected D-Beam instrument.
Using the Metronome
You can perform while the metronome sounds. You
can adjust the tempo or beat of the metronome.
If an SMF song or Rhythm is playing, the metronome
will sound at the tempo and beat of that song.
1. Press the [METRONOME] button so it’s lit.
The metronome will begin sounding.
To stop the metronome, press the [Metronome] button once again.
NOTE
The metronome is not available while an audio song le (mp3 or
WAVE) is selected.
MEMO
While rhythm or SMF song playback is stopped, the [TAP
TEMPO] button ashes in red to indicate the selected tempo
The metronome signal is sent to the BK-9’s METRONOME OUT jack
(rear panel). You can connect headphones to this socket and set the
metronomes volume. See “External Volume (p. 56). This option
may be useful as click track” for a drummer.
Metronome Settings
The BK-9 also allows you to specify when and how the metronome should
sound:
1. Press and hold the [METRONOME] button.
Other important functions
56
The metronome settings can be also selected using [MENU] button
“Global” “Metronome”.
The display now looks as follows:
Right Display
The metronome parameters you can set are:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Internal
Metronome
O, On
Select On” to activate the internal
metronome.
Internal Volume 0~127 Sets the internal metronome’s level.
External
Metronome
O, On
Select On” to activate the external
metronome (METRONOME OUT jack).
External Volume 0~127 Sets the external metronome’s level.
Time Signature
1/16 ~ 32/16,
1/8 ~ 32/8,,
1/4 ~ 32/4,
1/2 ~32/2
Species the metronome’s time
signature.
Mode
Always, Play,
Rec
Always”: The metronome even
counts when playback is stopped.
Play”: The metronome only sounds
while the rhythm or song is playing.
Rec”: The metronome only sounds
during rhythm recording (using the
“Rhythm Composer”).
Count In
O, 1 bar, 2
bars
This parameter allows you to switch
the
Count-In function on (“1 bar” or
“2 bars”) or o. When on, the
metronome will count in the specied
number of measures (bars) before the
rhythm or SMF song starts playing.
(This setting is not available for audio
songs.)
The settings can be saved to the BK-9’s global memory. If you don’t
save them, your changes are lost when you switch o the BK-9. See
“Save Global” (p. 148).
NOTE
The Time Signature is not saved in the BK-9’s global memory.
57
15. Performance Lists
Performance/Music Assistant/
Factory Songs Info
The “Performance List” is a list of Performance memories. Each
Performance memory contains a reference to the desired rhythm or
song and all settings you want to load along with that rhythm or song,
including settings like INTRO/ENDING status, selected VARIATION, etc. See
‘Performance Edit’ parameters” (p. 127).
The Performance memories you create are saved to the selected
“Performance List”. This allows you to prepare one set of Performance
memories for weddings, another for corporate events, a third for
anniversaries, etc. Performance Lists always reside on a USB memory.
It is perfectly possible to program several Performance memories for one
song. Selecting a Performance memory is a lot faster than calling up one of
the BK-9’s functions, modifying the settings, etc., while playing. You could
program one Performance memory for the rst part of a song, another for
the bridge and a third one for the closing section. Doing so allows you to
“play” with the eect settings of the various processors, for example.
NOTE
The BK-9 is supplied with one Performance List called “Music
Assistant” and a second called “Factory Songs” that contains 5
SMF les. These lists cannot be deleted or edited.
Loading a Performance/‘Music
Assistant’/‘Factory Songs’ List
1. Connect an optional USB memory to the BK-9.
NOTE
This step is unnecessary if you want to use the “Music Assistant
or “Factory Songs” list, because these lists reside in the BK-9s
internal memory.
2. Press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button.
If you have not loaded a Performance List yet:
The display now shows all Performance Lists it can nd in the USB
memory. (The internal “Music Assistant” and “Factory Songs” lists are
always displayed in the top line.)
Right Display
If you have already loaded a Performance List or Music Assistant:
The display immediately shows the Performance memories it
contains.
Right Display
To load a dierent Performance List from the USB memory, press
the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button again and proceed with step (3)
below.
MEMO
The PERFORMANCE [LIST] button alternates between the overall
list of Performance List les and the contents of the currently
selected list.
NOTE
If the USB memory contains no Performance List les, or if the
memory is not connected (properly), the BK-9 only displays the
“Music Assistant” and “Factory Songs” list.
3. Rotate the dial to select the Performance List you want to
use.
4. Push the dial to conrm your selection.
(In our example, we selected the “Music Assistant list.) The display
changes to:
Right Display
You can now select a Performance memory (see below).
If you need to load another Performance List, press the
PERFORMANCE [LIST] button again.
Recalling a Performance/‘Music
Assistant’/‘Factory Songs’ memory
Here is how to select a Performance/ “Music Assistant”/ “Factory Songs”
memory from the last list you loaded.
1. If the display doesn’t yet show a list of Performance/“
Music Assistant”/“Factory Songs” memories, press the
PERFORMANCE [LIST] button.
Performance Lists
58
Right Display
In this example, we loaded the “Music Assistant List.
2. Rotate the dial to select the memory whose settings you
want to use, then push the dial to conrm your selection.
The PERFORMANCE [LIST] button lights to signal that the BK-9 is
now using the settings of the selected Performance memory. The
name of that memory is highlighted.
Right Display
The selected memory also refers to a rhythm or song, which can be
started in the usual ways ([START/STOP] button, [SYNC START], etc.).
During playback of that rhythm or song, you can already select a
new Performance/“Music Assistant”/ “Factory Songs” memory.
MEMO
If the User Program memory loaded contain Audio Set le
Information, the Audio Set is loaded (the [AUDIO KEY] button
ashes). See “How to Save and recall an Audio Key Set into a
Performance (p. 71)
3. If you need to return to the previous page, press the
[EXIT] button.
To return to the page that lists the memories, press PERFORMANCE
[LIST] again.
Quickly Locating Performance
Memories
The BK-9 has two ways to quickly recall a performance.
Recall Performance Memories by
[NUMERIC] button
This function can be handy when you need to recall a performances in a
certain position.
Performance memories can also be loaded using the BK-9’s “Numeric”
function. See “Using the ‘Numeric’ function to Select Tones, Rhythms and
Performances” (p. 33) for details.
Recall Performance Memories by
[FAVORITE] button
This function can be handy when you need to recall performances in
adjacent positions.
1. Load a Performance/Music Assistant List (p. 57).
Right Display
In this example, we loaded the “Music Assistant List.
2. Press the [FAVORITE] button. The button lights.
The TONE [1]~[8] buttons ash. The TONE [0] and [9] buttons light
steady to indicate that this buttons are used to scroll the page.
The Performance List page changes to:
Right Display
At the left of each performance eld a number is shown.
This number corresponds to the TONE buttons [1]~[8] that you have
to press to recall your desired performance.
3. Press the TONE button that corresponds to the
performance ([1]~[8]).
The corresponding performance is recalled and the display shows
it in reverse.
4. Press TONE button [9] to visualize the next set of eight
performances. Alternatively, press TONE button [0] to
visualize the previous set of eight performances
DOWN UP
Saving your Settings as a Performance
59
The display shows either the next or the previous set of 8
performances.
5. Repeat the step 3 to recall your desired performance.
6. Press the [FAVORITE] or [EXIT] button to exit this function.
Saving your Settings as a
Performance
1. Select a rhythm or song.
2. Select all settings you would like to use for this rhythm or
song.
You can, for instance, assign the desired Tones to the real-time
parts, switch on the [INTRO] button, modify the “Performance Edit”
settings, etc.
MEMO
If the Audio Key function is active ([AUDIO KEY button] lights)
the User Program will save the Audio Key Set le information.
See “How to Save and recall an Audio Key Set into a
Performance (p. 71)
MEMO
You can link a User MIDI Set to the Performance memory. For
details see “MIDI Set Link (p. 142).
3. Press the [WRITE] button to jump to the “Write
Performance page.
The [WRITE] indicator ashes and the display changes to:
Right Display
By default, the BK-9 assigns the name of the selected rhythm, song
or of the last Performance you loaded to the Performance settings
you are about to save. If you agree with that name, proceed with
step (5) below.
4. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
5. Press the [WRITE] button to save your settings, thereby
creating a new Performance memory.
This memory is added at the end of the currently selected
Performance List. See “Loading a Performance/‘Music
Assistant’/‘Factory Songs’ List (p. 57).
NOTE
If you haven’t loaded any Performance List since switching
on the BK-9, a new Performance List is created, and your
Performance memory becomes its rst entry.
Other Performance List Functions
1. Connect a USB memory with at least one Performance List
to the BK-9.
2. Press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button.
The display now shows all Performance Lists on the connected USB
memory
Right Display
3. Rotate the dial to select the desired Performance List.
4. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
The left display now changes to a page with the following options:
Left Display
Function Explanation
Rename* Allows you to rename the selected Performance List.
Delete* Deletes the selected Performance List.
Make New List Allows you to create a new (empty) Performance List.
Import G/VA/E-
Series Set
The BK-9 provides dedicated import functions for previous
Roland backing instruments.
[*] Not available if you selected the “Music Assistant or “Factory Songs”
list in step (3) above.
5. Rotate the dial to select the desired option, then push the dial.
Rename a Performance List
If in the step (4) of “Other Performance List Functions”you selected
‘Rename’ , the right display changes to:
Performance Lists
60
Right Display
1. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
2. Press the [WRITE] button to save the Performance List
under the new name.
The display briey conrms the operation and the returns to the
page with all Performance List les on your USB memory.
If you specify a le name that already exists, the BK-9 displays the
following message: “Please enter a dierent name
Delete a Performance List
If in the step (4) of “Other Performance List Functions” (p. 59) you
selected ‘Delete’ , the display changes to:
Right Display
1. Rotate the dial to select “YES”, then push the dial to delete
the Performance List.
Select “NO if you do not want to delete the Performance List after
all.
The display briey conrms that the selected Performance List has
been deleted and then returns to the page with all Performance List
les on your USB memory.
Create a New Performance List
If in the step (4) of “Other Performance List Functions” (p. 59) you
selected ‘Make New List , the display changes to:
Right Display
This page allows you to create a new Performance List whose name
is selected automatically by the BK-9. If you are happy with that
name, proceed with step (4) below. Otherwise…
1. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
2. Press the [WRITE] button to create the new Performance
List, which is currently empty.
If the USB memory already contains a le of the name you have
entered, the display asks you whether it is OK to overwrite the other
Performance List le.
In that case, select YES” to replace the other Performance List le
with the one whose name you changed. (Select “NO” to return to
the page where you can change the name.) Then, push the dial.
Importing User Program Sets created for previous
Roland backing instruments
Using this function you can import User Program Sets (Performance
Lists) created for previous Roland backing keyboards.
You can import User Program data from the G-/VA-/E-series.
You can import the following data:
Files Type File Extension Explanation
User Program Set
.UPS User Program Set of G/E-series
.UVA User Program Set of VA-series
Before importing data
1. In your computer, copy the folder that contain the User
Programs to be imported into an optional USB memory
(.UPS, .UVA).
NOTA
Before you import the User Programs created for previous
Roland Backing keyboard you need to copy, in the optional USB
memory, the folder with all the User Programs it contains.
Importing data
2. Connect the USB memory to your BK-9.
3. Press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button.
The display now shows all Performance Lists on the connected USB
memory.
Right Display
4. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
The left display now changes to a page like this:
Left Display
5. Rotate the dial to select ‘Import G/VA/E-Series Set’
function, then push the dial.
Editing Performance Memories
61
The display shows the contents of the USB memory:
Right Display
6. Rotate the dial to select the desired le to be imported
and push it.
The le is processed and saved with the same le name as the
imported le into the “My Performances” USB memory folder. The
display briey conrms and then the imported Performance List is
showed.
NOTE
If the le name of the Performance List already exists, the BK-9
displays the following message: A le having this name already
exists Overwrite? ” . Select “YES” to replace the le. Select “NO” to
reject the import operation.
7. Press the PERFORMANCE [LIST] button.
The Performance List imported is already selected.
8. Push the dial to view the single Performances.
Editing Performance Memories
The “Edit” option allows you to do the following:
Function Explanation
Delete Performance
Deletes the selected Performance memory from
the active list.
Move Performance
Allows you to change the order in which the
Performance memories appear in the selected
Performance List.
Rename Performance Rename the selected Performance memory.
Copy Performances
You can copy one or several Performance memories
from one Performance List to another.
Save Performance List Allows you to save the edited list.
Delete a Performance memory
1.
Select the Performance memory you want to remove from
the list.
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button to enter in Edit Mode.
Left Display
3. If necessary, rotate the dial to select “Delete Performance,
then push the dial button.
The right display changes to:
Right Display
4. Rotate the dial to select “YES”, to delete the Performance
memory (or “NO if you wish to keep it)..
5. Push the dial to conrm your selection.
The display briey conrms that the Performance memory has been
deleted.
A “*” is shown in the rst row, to the left of the Performance List
name to indicate that the list has been edited.
If you like, you can now select another Performance memory you
want to delete, repeat from step (2).
NOTE
To save your edited Performance List see “Saving the edited
Performance List” (p. 63).
Move a Performance
1.
Select the Performance memory you want to move to a
dierent position inside the list.
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
Left Display
3. Rotate the dial to select “Move Performance”, then push
the dial.
The right display changes to:
Right Display
The right display shows the current list.
4. Rotate the dial to move the selected Performance
memory to the desired position, then push the dial.
Performance Lists
62
A “*” is shown in the rst row, to the left of the Performance List
name to indicate that the list has been edited.
You can now select another Performance memory you want to
move, press the [QUICK MENU] button to conrm and repeat from
step (3).
NOTE
To save your edited Performance List see “Saving the edited
Performance List” (p. 63).
Rename a Performance
1.
Select the Performance memory you want to rename.
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
Left Display
3. Rotate the dial to select “Rename Performance, then push
the dial.
The right display changes to:
Right Display
4. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
5. Press the [WRITE] button to save the Performance
memory under the new name.
The display briey conrms the operation and returns to the page
with all Performance List les on your USB memory.
If you specify a le name that already exists, the BK-9 displays the
following message: “Please enter a dierent name
NOTE
To save your edited Performance List see “Saving the edited
Performance List” (p. 63).
Copy Performances
You can copy one, several or all Performances from one
Performance list to another. You can also copy and paste
Performance memories to dierent locations within their original
Performance List. And nally, you can copy “Music Assistant”
memories to one of your Performance lists.
1. Select the Performance memory you want to start to copy
from the list.
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
Left Display
3. Rotate the dial to select “Copy Performances”, then push
the dial.
The right display changes to:
Right Display
4. Rotate the dial to select one or several Performance
memories that you want to copy.
The selected Performances are displayed in reverse.
Right Display
You can only select adjacent memories (either before or after the
Performance memory selected in step (1) above).
5. Press the dial to conrm your selection.
6. Select the Performance List to which you want to copy the
selected Performance memory/memories.
To load another performance press the [LIST] button and select
another Performance list. See “Loading a Performance/‘Music
Assistant’/‘Factory Songs’ List (p. 57)“.
MEMO
You can choose to paste the selected Performances in the same
Performance List.
7. Select the Performance memory that should contain (the
rst) Performance memory you copied.
8. Press the [QUICK MENU] button to select the paste
function.
Filtering Performance Memories Settings (Lock function)
63
Left Display
Note the “Paste option in the “Edit list, which wasn’t there before
you started copying Performance memories.
9. Rotate the dial to select “Paste, then press it.
The Performance memories you copied are pasted to the location
you selected. If you copied several memories, they will be pasted to
subsequent locations.
A message conrms the operation.
A “*” is shown in the rst row, to the left of the Performance List
name to indicate that the list has been edited.
Saving the edited Performance List
Whenever the display shows all Performance memories to which
the selected List refers, you can:
1. Press the [QUICK MENU] button
2. Rotate the dial to select “Save Performance List”, then
push the dial.
A message conrms that the data have been saved.
3. Press the [EXIT] button.
If you did not save the Performance List edited, the BK-9 now
signals that you need to save it to preserve your changes.
Right Display
4. Rotate the dial to select “YES” to save your changes to the
USB memory (or “NO if you wish to keep the previous
version).
5. Push the dial to conrm your selection.
Filtering Performance Memories
Settings (Lock function)
The BK-9 allows you to lock (protect) several settings to ensure that they
no longer change when you select a dierent Performance memory.
Why is it Convenient to Use Filters (Lock Function)?
The BK-9’s locks are data lters that allow you to use your
Performance memories more eciently, because you can ignore
settings that may be ne for one song (the one you prepared the
Performance memory for), but not for another.
Here is an example:
Suppose you select a Performance memory that assigns some tones
which you want to keep for the entire song (or set). In this case lock
(i.e. protect) the Tone after selecting this memory to ensure that
the subsequent Performance memories you recall modify all of the
BK-9’s eligible settings except for the tones.
Which Parameter Can you Filter?
Below is a list of parameters that can be ltered:
Parameter Explanation
Rhythm* Lock the Rhythm when changing performances.
Tempo* Lock the Tempo when changing performances.
Expression
Pedal
Lock the expression when changing performances.
Assign
Switches
Lock the function assigned to the Assign Switches when
changing performances
DBeam
Lock the function assigned to the D-Beam buttons when
changing performances
Tone* Lock the Tone when changing performances.
Tone Part Lock the Tone Part when changing performances.
Split Lock the Split when changing performances.
Lower Octave Lock the Lower Octave when changing performances.
Arr Type Lock the Arr Type when changing performances.
Key* Lock the Key when changing performances.
MIDI Set Lock the MIDI Set when changing performances.
Bass Inversion Lock the Bass Inversion when changing performances.
Scale Tune Lock the Scale Tune when changing performances.
[*] These parameters can also be switched on/o by pressing and
holding the assigned buttons on the front panel. (See “How to
Switch Filters On/O Directly by Panel”)
For information on how to lter these parameters see “Performance
Hold “ (p.144).
NOTE
Unlike the other lock parameters, the protection of the tempo
setting also applies to rhythm selection.
See [MENU] button “Performance EditArranger Setting
Tempo” (p. 138)
Each rhythm has a preset tempo value that is recalled when you
select it. While the tempo setting is locked, the tempo no longer
changes when you select a dierent rhythm.
MEMO
The “Save Global” parameter (p. 148) also saves the lock (and
hence the “Performance Hold”) settings.
How to Switch Filters On/O Directly by Panel
Some useful lters can be also switched on/o by pressing and
holding the assigned buttons on the front panel.
TIPS
To switch all lters O in one shot you can use an Assign
Switch which you assigned the Unlock function to. See Assign
Switches” (p. 139).
MEMO
All lters can be switched on/o by “Performance Hold “ (p.
144).
In the example shown here, you will learn how to exclude rhythm
changes from Performance selections.
The same procedure (albeit with dierent buttons) also applies to
the tempo (press and hold [TAP TEMPO]) and “Key” (press and hold
[KEY]) settings as well as to Tone selection (for each of the real-time
parts individually).
1. Connect the USB memory and load a Performance
memory (p. 57) or a rhythm (p. 38).
Performance Lists
64
2. Press and hold one of the RHYTHM FAMILY buttons.
A “Rhythm” pop-up window appears with a closed lock (see left). (If
you repeat step (2), the pop-up window will display an open lock to
inform you that the lock function has been cancelled.)
Left Display
The Main window shows the Lock status:
Left Display
3. Start playback of the selected rhythm.
4. Select a dierent Performance memory.
5. If the status lock shows “RHYTHM” on the main page,
recalling another Performance does not change the
rhythm.
6. Again press and hold any RHYTHM FAMILY button to
unlock the “RHYTHM” function.
The following pop-up windows appears to indicate that the lock
function has been cancelled.
Left Display
65
16. Using Audio Phrases (Audio Key)
The BK-9 lets you play audio les saved on USB memory (sold
separately) while you perform. This is called the Audio Key”
function.
The Audio Key function lets you assign an audio le to 7 right most
keys of BK-9’s keyboard, and play those audio les by pressing the
corresponding keys. You can assign various phrases to the keys and
play them at the appropriate moments during your performance.
You can also specify that an audio le is automatically played
repeatedly. You can also specify to reserve the audio le that should
be played next.
Moreover the audio les will run in sync with the current Rhythm (or
SMF song) tempo.
Using an Audio Drum Loop
Instead of the drum track of the rhythm you can use an Audio
Drum Loop. You can download Audio Drum Loops from many
commercial websites.
Obviously the Rhythm drum track should be synchronized (p.
71) and muted. See “Setting the Volume of the Real-Time Parts
or Rhythm Parts (Mixer)” (p. 33) or “Selecting the Track(s) to Mute
for Rhythms or SMF Songs” (p. 46).
Using the FC-7 footswitch unit Board
The Audio Key function uses the 7 right most keys of BK-9’s
keyboard to activate the audio phrases. If you want these keys
available to play notes, you can assign the activation of the Audio
Phrases to the optional FC-7 footswitch unit Board.
If you press any key in the keyboard after the Audio Phrases
function has been activated, the BK-9 reminds you that the
activation of Audio Phrases are assigned to the FC-7.
Left Display
See “Pedal Controller FC-7” (p. 146).
NOTE
The Audio Key phrases are not available during playback of an
mp3 song (and vice versa).
NOTE
Using the Audio Key any audio le you may have been playing
back earlier (as a mp3/WAVE) is erased.
NOTE
An mp3 le has a short blank time at the beginning and the end
of the le. Therefore, the sound might cut o when an mp3 le is
played repeatedly with Audio Key function.
If this occurs, you may be able to solve the problem by taking
the following actions:
Use WAVE/AIFF data format rather than mp3 data format.
NOTE
Use USB memory sold by Roland. We cannot guarantee
operation if any another USB memory is used.
Creating an Audio Key Set
Here is how to prepare a set of up to 7 phrases for a given song or
project. Such phrases can be: entire mp3/WAVE songs, fragments of
audio songs, or short mp3/WAVE les containing only the passages
you want to use as phrases.
Here is how to create a new Audio Key Set:
1. In your computer, copy the audio les to an optional USB
memory.
2. Connect the USB memory to your BK-9.
3. Press and hold the [AUDIO KEY] button.
The displays change to:
Left Display
Right Display
Initialize the Audio Key Internal Memory (Make
New)
4. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
The left display changes to:
Left Display
5. Use the dial to select “Make New” function.
The following message appears:
Left Display
6. Use the dial to select “YES”, then push the dial to initialize
the Audio Key internal memory.
The BK-9 now initializes the Audio Key internal memory.
Otherwise, select “NO” and push the dial to return to the Audio Key
main page.
Using Audio Phrases (Audio Key)
66
Assign audio les to the various keys.
MEMO
There is no need to assign audio phrases to all possible keys.
Feel free to only assign the audio phrases you actually need for
your new set.
7. Press the [AUDIO KEY] button to activate the function in
its proper keyboard portion. The buttons indicator lights.
Available for other part
Phrases
8. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
9. Use the dial to select “Edit” functions.
The displays change to:
Left Display
Right Display
NOTE
If you didn’t press the [Audio Key] button (Step 7) an error
message appears. Press the [Audio Key] button and repeat the
step (9).
The left display helps you to identify the buttons that you can use
to edit audio phrases.
10. Press a key in the highest octave or use the dial to select
the key (“Key Name“ eld) you wish to assign an audio le
to.
11. Press the [USB MEMORY] button.
The display shows the contents of the USB memory.
12. Rotate the dial to select the desired audio le.
13. Push the dial to load the le.
If the le you need is located inside a folder, you must rst select
that folder, push the dial to see its contents and then select the le.
If you opened a folder by mistake, press the [EXIT] button to return
to a higher level.
The BK-9 set “Loop Start and “Loop End” eld at the length of the
audio phrases automatically.
If you don’t need to edit the audio phrase length you can jump to
the Assigning a Name to Your new Audio Phrase” (p. 68) directly.
Specifying the audio phrase length.
If you are working with an entire audio song, you probably need to
specify the passage you want to use. Heres how:
14. Press the [START/STOP] /[*/,] button to start playback.
15. If you need to play back the phrase in loop, Set the “Loop
parameter “On .
Right Display
16. Press and hold the VARIATION [1] (Mark Start) button and
release it at the position where you want the passage to
begin.
Mark Start
The “Loop Start” eld shows the position you have just registered
17. Press and hold the VARIATION [2] (Mark End) button and
release it at the position where you want the passage to
end.
Mark End
The “Loop End” eld shows the position you have just registered
MEMO
You may also want to use the INTRO/[' ] or ENDING/[& ] button
to locate the approximate position you need.
18. Press the [START/STOP] /[*/,] to pause the playback or
[SYNC START] /[ + ] button to stop playback.
19. You can now check the beginning and end of the passage
by pressing the VARIATION [3] (Seek Start) button.
The playback starts from the “Loop Start position.
20. You can now check the end of the passage by pressing the
VARIATION [4] (Seek End) button.
The playback starts one second before the actual end of the
passage (“Loop End” position).
Creating an Audio Key Set
67
Seek Start Seek End
If you are totally unhappy with your passage (or suddenly notice
that you chose the wrong verse or chorus, for example), you can
cancel the “Loop Start” mark by pressing the [AUTO FILL IN] button
and/or the “Loop End” mark by pressing the [BASS INV] button.
Fine Tuning.
If the passage sounds almost right but still needs some ne-tuning,
proceed as follows:
21. Use the dial to edit the “Loop Start eld value.
22. While doing so, you can press VARIATION [3] (Seek Start)
button to listen to how your setting aects the passage.
If the changes are too coarse, use the “Cursor” eld with a ner
subdivision ([1÷100], [1÷10]) to advance or return in smaller steps.
If you have ever worked with a hardware or software sampler, you
may nd it easier to display and set sample values rather than
minutes, seconds and frames. If so, set the View Mode” eld to
activate the sample indication (“Sample”).
The “Cursor” eld now indicates sample steps ([1, [10], [100],
[1000]).
Set “Min/Sec“ value again to return to the time indication.
23. Use the dial to edit the “Loop End” eld value, if it’s
necessary.
MEMO
To adjust the “Loop End” value you can continue with the
procedure “Synchronizing the Audio Phrase Loop with the
Rhythm Loop below.
24. While doing so, you can press VARIATION [4] (Seek End)
button to listen to how your setting aects the passage.
25. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the previous page.
Synchronizing the Audio Phrase Loop with the
Rhythm Loop
Although you used the above “Fine Tuning” function, you will nd
that sometimes during the playback the Audio Phrase tends to loose
its synchronization with the Rhythm.
The following function helps you to sync the Audio Phrase with the
Rhythm measure perfectly.
In the following illustration you will notice that the “Loop End” is not
well synchronized with the Rhythm measure.
1st Beat 2nd Beat 3rd Beat 4th Beat
Rhythm Measure
Loop Start
Loop End
NOTE
Before entering in the Audio Key environment, select the
Rhythm that you intend to use with your audio Key.
26. Set the exact BPM value of your audio phrases.
See “BPM (Use TAP)” (p. 70).
The BK-9 needs to know the BPM of your audio phrase to synchronize
it with the Rhythm.
27. Remember to set the “Loop” parameter “On to play back
the phrase in loop mode.
Right Display
28. Press the [METRONOME] button to adjust the “Loop End”
value automatically.
Now the “Loop End” value matches with the Rhythm measure
perfectly.
1st Beat 2nd Beat 3rd Beat 4th Beat
Rhythm Measure
Loop Start
Loop End
If you forgot to set the BPM for your audio phrase, the following
message appears:
Left Display
Using Audio Phrases (Audio Key)
68
NOTE
The BK-9 cannot adjust the “Loop Value If your audio phrase is
shorter than the Rhythm measure.
Assigning a Name to Your new Audio
Phrase
1. From the Audio Key left main page, use the dial to select
the phrase to which you wish to assign a name.
Left Display
2. Push the dial to conrm.
The following page appears:
Left Display
3. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
4. Press the [WRITE] button to assign the name.
The name is assigned and the BK-9 displays the Audio Key main page.
Basic playback functions for your
phrases
Now that you have gathered the phrases you need, let us set the
main playback parameters. The parameters discussed here below
can be set for each phrase individually.
Right Display
1. Press the key (C#7 ~G7) of the phrase whose settings you
want to change.
2. In the right display, use the dial to adjust the following
parameters:
Parameter Value Explanation
Volume 0~127
This parameter should only be used to
ensure that all phrases have more or less the
same level. You therefore may have to press
other keys to compare the current phrase
with the others.
Panpot -63~0~63
Every phrase is played back “as is”: stereo
phrases are therefore played back in stereo.
But you can nevertheless use this parameter
to shift your phrases towards the left or
right channel, which may be interesting for
question-and-answer phrases. Select “0” to
use the phrase’s original stereo placement.
PlayBack
Restart,
Continue
There are several functions that allow you to
specify how the selected phrase should be played
back. Some of them can even be combined.
“Restart”:
This setting means that the phrase always
starts from the beginning when the
assigned key is pressed.
Continue”:
This setting means that the phrase will
resume from the place where it (was)
stopped last time. This may be interesting
for spoken or sung phrases you want to
chop up in realtime.
Playback Type
Trigger, Gate,
Drum
“Trigger”:
This setting means that you can start the
phrase by briey pressing the assigned
key. Press that key again if you need to
stop the phrase before it is nished.
Gate”:
This setting means that you need to hold
down the assigned key for the entire
duration of the phrase (or for as long as
the phrase should be played).
“Drum”:
This setting means that the phrase is
always played from its “Loop Start to its
“Loop End” position.
Briey pressing the assigned key is
therefore enough. But you could press
it again before the end of the phrase to
return to the beginning (“retrigger”).
This setting cannot be combined with
”Playback” parameter. Be aware that,
while Mode “Loop” is active (see below), a
phrase with this setting will keep playing
indenitely. To stop it, either press another
key or select another playback function
(Trigger or Gate).
Special playback functions
69
Parameter Value Explanation
Mode
O, Sync,
Loop,
Sync+Loop
“O:
No mode is selected.
“Sync”:
When this mode is on, a second phrase
you select by pressing its key while the
previous one is still running will only start
once the current phrase has nished. If this
option is o, the second phrase starts as
soon as you press its key, and the previous
phrase stops. (Only one phrase can be
used at a time).
“Loop”:
Switch this function on to play back the
phrase in a loop. This is probably most
useful with the Trigger or Drum playback
setting. If this is o, the phrase will stop
once it has nished.
“Sync+Loop”:
Switch this function on if you need to use
the “Sync” and “ “Loop mode together.
NOTE
If the loop seems a bit awkward when
the phrase returns to the beginning, it
is either too short or too long. In that
case, press the [QUICK MENU] button
and select the “Edit function and adjust
the “Loop End”.
NOTE
Phrases shorter than 500 ms cannot be
looped.
Special playback functions
There are even more playback functions, including the possibility
to prepare the selected phrase(s) for tempo synchronization to the
Rhythm or SMF song tempo. The parameters discussed below can
be set for each phrase individually.
1. Press the [AUDIO KEY] button to activate the function.
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
3. Use the dial to select “Control” functions.
The displays change to:
Left Display
Right Display
4. Use the “Key elds or press the key (C#7 ~G7) on the
keyboard to select the phrase whose settings you want to
change.
5. In the left display, use the dial to adjust the following
parameters:
Parameter Value Explanation
Pitch Coarse -6~0~5
Allows you to transpose the phrase in
semi-tone steps, which may come in handy
when the key is too high or too low for you
to sing comfortably. Since we are dealing
with audio data here, it would be wiser to
avoid large intervals to preserve the best
possible quality. The value “0” means that
the phrase’s original key is maintained.
Pitch Fine -100~0~100
This parameter allows you to tune every
phrase to the pitch of the BK-9’s parts.
This is usually necessary for recordings that
use reference frequency other than A4=
440Hz. The value “0” means that the phrases
original tuning is maintained.
Time
Stretching
75~100~125
The value “100” means that the
phrase’s original tempo is maintained.
Smaller values mean that the tempo
decreases, because the phrases duration is
compressed. Higher values mean that the
phrase speeds up.
The upper limit is “125”, because even
higher values would lead to very unnatural
results.
Vinyl Mode/
Value
O, 30~125
This eect simulates the pitch and speed
uctuations of an old turntable.
O”:
Select O to disable this function.
“30~125”:
Set the intensity of this simulation.
NOTE
If you enable this function the “Pitch
Coarse, “Pitch Fine and Time Stretching
function are not available.
About Pitch Course, Pitch Fine and Time Stretching
The remarkable aspect about these functions is that changing the
pitch (whether in coarse or ne steps) has no eect on the phrase’s
tempo. Conversely, changing the tempo (Time Stretching) doesn’t
alter the phrases pitch.
6. In the right display, use the dial to adjust the following
parameters:
Parameter Value Explanation
Turn Table
Start
O, On
Switch this function “On” to cause the phrase
to start in true good old” turntable fashion.
By this we mean that playback starts at a
very low pitch and speed and then gradually
gets into gear.
Note that this aects the phrases
synchronization accuracy.
Turn Table
Stop
O, On
Switch this function “On” if the phrase
should slow down at the end—again in true
turntable fashion.
Fade In O, 1~10
To switch this function “On to set the
fade-in time.
NOTE
Be careful not to set a value that is longer
than the phrase length, because doing so
makes it inaudible.
Fade Out O, 1~10
To switch this function “On to set the
fade-out time with the.
NOTE
Be careful not to set a value that is longer
than the phrase length, because doing so
makes it inaudible.
Using Audio Phrases (Audio Key)
70
Parameter Value Explanation
Sync Audio O, On
If you want the selected phrase to run in
sync with the Rhythm or Song you intend
to use, select it “On” and set the BPM value
of your audio phrases. See “BPM (Use TAP)”
below.
If “Sync Audio” is set “On, any tempo
changes will act on Audio Key, Song and
Rhythm.
BPM (Use TAP) 20~250
The BK-9 needs to know the BPM of your
audio phrase to synchronize it with a
Rhythm or SMF.
Set the exact BPM value of your audio
phrases.
If you don’t know the BPM, proceed as
follows:
a. Start playback of the selected
phrase by pressing the key assigned
to this phrase.
b. While listening to the phrase, press
the [TAP] button repeatedly until
you think the tempo value shown in
the “BPM (Use TAP)” eld is correct.
NOTE
Though this system is highly user-friendly
and fairly accurate, some amount of
drifting” may occur for phrases that are
looped over long stretches (e.g. an entire
chorus or verse). We therefore recommend
re-triggering such phrases every two bars
at the latest. You can use the dial to set the
value too.
Saving and loading Audio Key Sets
Saving your new or edited Audio Key Set
After creating an Audio Key Set or indeed already while doing so
you need to save it on a optional USB memory, because the current
settings are erased when you select another Audio Key Set or
switch the BK-9 o.
1. Press [QUICK MENU] from the main Audio Key page.
The display changes to:
Left Display
2. Use the dial to select the “Save Key Set”.
The displays change to
Left Display
Right Display
The left display shows the Audio Key Set and the right display
shows the contents of the connected USB memory.
3. Use the dial to select the folder where you want to save
the Audio Key Set.
To return to a lower hierarchical level, you can press the [EXIT]
button.
4. Press the [WRITE] button.
The BK-9 suggests the name Audio_keyset”.
Right Display
5. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
6. Press the [WRITE] button to save the Audio Key Set.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
Audio Key main page.
Loading an Audio Key Set
You may also want to load Audio Key Sets you created at an earlier
stage. You can either do so manually, or select a Performance with
a link to Audio Key. See “How to Save and recall an Audio Key Set
into a Performance (p. 71). Here is how to load an Audio Key Set
by hand.
1. Press [QUICK MENU] from the main Audio Key page.
The display changes to:
Left Display
2. Use the dial to select the “Load Key Set”
The displays change to
Playing Back your Phrases
71
Left Display
Right Display
The right display shows the contents of the USB memory.
3. In the right display rotate the dial to select the desired
Audio Key Set you want to load.
If the le you need is located inside a folder, you must rst select
that folder, push the dial to see its contents and then select the le.
If you opened a folder by mistake, press the [EXIT] button to return
to a higher level.
The icon that localizes an Audio Key Set le is as follows:
MEMO
The le extension of an Audio Key Set is .rps”
4. Push the dial to load the Audio Key Set.
The display returns to the Audio Key” main page.
Playing Back your Phrases
Let us now look at how to use an Audio Key Set you have just
prepared or loaded. See “Creating an Audio Key Set” (p. 65) or see
“Loading an Audio Key Set” (p. 70).
1. Press the [AUDIO KEY] button to activate the right most
keys for phrase playback.
2. Press the keys in the highest octave to start and stop the
assigned phrases.
Playback of those phrases will be governed by their playback
settings. Phrases whose “Sync Audio function is active (p. 70)
adapt their tempo to the tempo setting of the currently selected
Rhythm or SMF song.
Only one phrase can be played back at a time.
if you press another key while the previously started phrase is still
running, the BK-9 plays the running phrase until it has nished and
then starts the newly selected phrase depending on the selected
“Playback Type (p. 68) and “Mode” (p. 69) setting.
MEMO
The Audio Key function uses the 7 right most keys of BK-9’s
keyboard to activate the audio phrases. If you want these keys
available to play notes, you can assign the activation of the
Audio Phrases to the optional FC-7 footswitch unit Board.
See “Pedal Controller FC-7” (p. 146).
3. Press [AUDIO KEY] button again to switch this function o
(the button goes dark).
Synchronize your Phrases with the
Start of Rhythm Playback
The BK-9 gives you the possibility to start the playback of Audio
Phrases in synchronization with the start of the Rhythm.
1. Press the [AUDIO KEY] button to activate the right most
keys for phrase playback.
2. Set the “Sync Audio (p. 70) to “On.
In this way the phrases will adapt their tempo to the tempo value
set in the currently selected Rhythm.
3. Press the [SYNC START] button repeatedly until its button
lights red.
Now the Rhythm playback can be started by playing a note key.
4. Press the keys in the highest octave to start the assigned
phrases.
The Rhythm will start the playback in sync with the audio phrase.
If you press the key while the Rhythm is already in playback, the
playback of audio phrase starts at the next downbeat.
Synchronize your Phrases with the Start
and Stop of Rhythm Playback
The BK-9 gives you the possibility to start and stop the playback
of Audio Phrases in synchronization with the start and stop of the
Rhythm.
1. Press the [AUDIO KEY] button to activate the right most
keys for phrase playback.
2. Set the “Sync Audio (p. 70) to “On.
In this way the phrases will adapt their tempo to the tempo value
set in the currently selected Rhythm.
3. Press the [SYNC START] button repeatedly until its button
lights green.
Now the Rhythm playback can be started by playing a note and
stopped when you release a key.
4. Set the “Playback Type” (p. 68) to “Gate”.
5. Press the keys in the highest octave to start the assigned
phrase.
The Rhythm will start the playback in sync with the audio phrase.
6. Release the keys to stop the phrase.
The Rhythm will stop the playback in sync with the audio phrase.
How to Save and recall an Audio Key
Set into a Performance
You can save the Audio Key Set le information into a Performance.
When you will recall the Performance the Audio Key Set le will be
loaded automatically.
1. Load an Audio Key Set.
See “Loading an Audio Key Set” (p. 70).
2. Press the [AUDIO KEY] button to activate the right most
keys for phrase playback and enable the Performance to
save the Audio Key Set.
3. Save the Performance. See “Saving your Settings as a
Performance (p. 59).
4. When you will recall the saved Performance the [AUDIO
KEY] button will ash to indicate that the Audio Key Set is
ready to use
Using Audio Phrases (Audio Key)
72
5. Press the [AUDIO KEY] button to activate the right most
keys for phrase playback.
How to Use the Audio Key Set in the
MIDI Data Recorder.
The BK-9’s MIDI recorder allows you to memorize audio phrases
during your performance.
1. Load a Audio Key Set. See “Loading an Audio Key Set” (p.
70).
2. Press the [AUDIO KEY] button to activate the function in
its proper keyboard portion. The buttons indicator lights.
3. Prepare everything you want to record.
4. Press the [SONG REC] and then [START/STOP] / [ */, ]
button to enable the recording. See “Recording your
Performance as MIDI Data (p. 76).
5. Perform your performance using the Audio Key and stop
the recording. See “Recording your Performance as MIDI
Data (p. 76) to save the song.
How the Audio Key is saved
• The notes that you play in the Audio Key range keyboard are
memorized in the track 13 as MIDI note messages.
• The Audio Key Set used is memorized in the song as a link.
MEMO
Take into consideration that you can use the 16-Track
Sequencer to edit or record note message of an Audio Key
track (Track 13).
@
@
'
#' '
Track 13
Note Messages
Audio Link Phrases
Audio Link Set
6. Press [START/STOP] / [ */, ] button to playback the song
previous recorded.
73
17. Adding pictures to the music
You can connect an external display or a television to the BK-9, and
use it to watch a slide show.
Displaying photos automatically
The BK-9 can display photos in succession. You can have the photos
switch automatically, somewhat like watching a movie. In addition,
you can choose a picture, which will be used as background on an
external screen.
Enjoying a VIMA TUNES slide show
You can watch a slide show while listening to a song on an optional
“VIMA TUNES CD-ROM (produced for the VIMA series).
Songs on VIMA TUNES” CD-ROMs provide slide show images
suitable for each song, making it easy for you to enjoy a slide show
without having to provide your own photos.
1. Connect an external screen to the BK-9 (see p. 23).
2. Connect a CD player (commercial available) to the BK-9’s
USB MEMORY port.
3. Insert the desired VIMA TUNES” CD-ROM into the CD
drive.
The BK-9 now displays a list of the songs on the CD-ROM. If you
don’t see that list, press the [USB MEMORY] button.
NOTE
“VIMA TUNES songs are sold on CD-ROMs available from your
Roland dealer.
4. Select the song you want to play back by rst rotating the
dial and then pressing it to conrm your selection.
The [USB MEMORY] buttons indicator lights.
5. Press the [START/STOP]/[*/,] button to play back the song.
A slide show suitable for the character of the song will be shown on
the external display or television set connected to the BK-9.
NOTE
When you press the [SYNC START]/[ + ] button to stop song
playback, the slideshow also stops. When you load another
“VIMA TUNES song, the previous slideshow stops and the
display shows the rst picture for the new song.
Enjoying a slide show of your own
pictures
You can watch a slide show while listening to a song on a USB
storage device.
NOTE
The slide show only starts if the folder that contains the desired
pictures has the same name as the song le you selected (this is
also applies for a performance that contains a song that has the
same name of the folder). Also, the folder must be located on
the same level within the USB memorys le hierarchy.
1. Use a graphic program on your computer to prepare the
pictures you want to use.
Image data that can be displayed:
Size
Recommended: 512 x 384 or 1024 x 768 pixels.
(Images of 4096 x 3072 pixels or smaller and 4MB or less are
supported).
NOTE
If you use images that are larger than the recommended size,
it may take longer to switch images.
Format JPEG format (.JPG)
2. Connect the USB memory to your computer and create a
folder named Amazing Grace” (for example) on the USB
storage device.
3. Copy the pictures you want to display for this song to the
Amazing Grace folder.
4. Copy the song Amazing Grace” to the same level as the
folder of the same name.
Do not put the song le inside the folder.
5. Disconnect the USB memory from your computer in
accordance with the standard procedure for the operating
system you are using.
6. Connect your USB memory to the BK-9’s USB MEMORY
port.
The BK-9 automatically shows the contents of the USB memory you
inserted.
7. Select the song you want to play back (“Amazing Grace” in
our example) by rst rotating the dial and then pressing it
to conrm your selection.
8. Press the [START/STOP]/[*/,] button to play back the
song.
The slide show of the pictures inside the Amazing Grace folder
begins.
NOTE
The slide show stops when you pause or stop song playback,
but the last picture is still displayed. You need to load a dierent
song that has no associated slide show to cause the background
or logo to be displayed (see “Using one of your own pictures as
background”).
Adding pictures to the music
74
Using one of your own pictures as
background
The BK-9 allows you to use one of your own pictures as screen
background, allowing you to customize your performances.
1. Connect the USB storage device that contains the picture
you want to use to the BK-9’s USB MEMORY port.
The display shows a list of the les on the USB storage device.
2. Select the .JPG le you want to use.
That picture now appears on the external screen (if connected).
This picture will be considered your “User setting and the
“Background Mode parameter (see p. 147) will be set to “User.
3. To revert to the colored background or logo, you must
select it using the “Background Mode” parameter (see p.
147).
If you once again select a .JPG picture (see above), the “Background
Mode” parameter is again set to “User.
‘User background and slide shows
Even after selecting a new background picture (“User”), you can still
take advantage of the BK-9’s slide show functionality.
If you select a song for which there is no picture folder on the
same le level as the song le, however, your “User background is
displayed.
Picture display and song lyrics
If the rst words (Lyrics data) of the last song you played back
remain on the external screen while they are no longer needed,
switch o the “External Lyrics” function (see p. 127) to make them
disappear.
75
18. Recording your Performance
Recording your Performance as
Audio Data
Your BK-9 allows you to record your performance and the
performance of your band on the optional USB memory.
The resulting audio le is stored in the “My Recordings” folder.
The recording format is WAVE (not mp3), which allows you to burn
your recordings onto a CD using your computer.
NOTE
Use USB memory sold by Roland (M-UF-series). We cannot
guarantee operation if any other USB memory is used.
Recording
The following procedure applies when the “Rec Audio Sync”
parameter is “On” (Default). For more information about this
parameter see “Rec Audio Sync” (p. 143).
1. Connect the USB memory to which you wish to save the
audio data.
2. Set the “Rec Mode” to Audio”. See p. 143.
This setting allow you to record your playing as audio le.
3. Prepare everything you want to record:
• Select the rhythm or song you want to use as accompaniment
• Set the levels and eects, etc.
4. Set the desired balance between the rhythm/song and
the real-time parts using the BALANCE knob.
5. If necessary, set the desired microphone volume and
reverb using the MIC VOLUME and MIC REVERB knobs.
6. Press the [SONG REC] button (its indicator ashes).
NOTE
If you pressed the [SONG REC] button by accident, press and
hold it until its indicator goes dark again.
7. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ]button.
The indicators of the [SONG REC] and [START/STOP] buttons light
and the BK-9 starts playing back the selected rhythm or song and
recording. Everything you play on the keyboard is recorded.
The Main page shows the recording time is running:
8. At the end of the song recording, press the [SONG REC] or
[START/STOP] / [ */, ] button to stop recording in case you
selected a rhythm. Otherwise press the [SYNC START]/[+]
button if you selected a song.
Rhythm or song playback and recording stop. The following
message appears:
Left Display
MEMO
The name suggestion displayed here depends on the rst
recording. It will, however, be followed by an incremental
number
You can now…
X Save the song under a new name.
a. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p.
27).
b. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to save
your recording under the new name and to return to the
main page.
If the USB memory already contains a le of that name, you will
be asked whether you want to overwrite it:
Left Display
In this case, select YES” and then push the dial to replace the
old le with the new one (the old le will be lost).
Otherwise, select “NO” and push the dial to return to the page
Recording your Performance
76
where you can change the name, and enter a dierent name,
then press the [WRITE] button.
MEMO
The audio les are saved to the “My Recordings” folder in the
USB memory.
X Save the song under the name suggested by the BK-9
The name suggestion depends on the rst recording. It will,
however, be followed by an incremental number
a. Press the [WRITE] button.
After a few seconds, the display will return to the main page. In
this case, your audio le is saved in the “My Recordings” folder.
X Decide to discard your recording
If you are unhappy with your recording you can discard it.
a. Press the [EXIT] button. The display changes to:
Left Display
b. Use the dial to select YES, then push the dial to erase
your recording.
Selecting “NO here takes you back to the state where you can
choose between options (a) and (b).
Listening to your recording
1. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ] button to start playback of
your recording.
If your recording seems too loud or too soft, you may want to
change the setting of the “Rec Audio Level” parameter.
[MENU] button “Global“ “Utility” “Rec Audio Level” (p. 143).
NOTE
The BK-9 provides a second recording mode that allows you to
start recording before the song you selected.
[MENU] button “Global“ “Utility” “Rec Audio Sync” (p.
143)
Recording your own as well as your
Band’s Performances
The BK-9 is an audio recorder too. You can record you performances
as a stand-alone musician as well as a band.
To record your band’s performances you need:
1. Connect the BK-9’s OUTPUT jack to an input of an
external mixing console.
See “Connecting External Audio Equipment” (p. 20).
2. Connect the other instrument of your band to the input
of same mixing console.
3. Connect the master outputs of an external mixing console
to the BK-9’s Audio INPUT jacks.
4. Set the Audio REC Routing” parameter to Audio In“. See
Audio REC Routing” (p. 143).
The BK-9 record the signal received from its BK-9’s Audio INPUT
jacks only.
Recording your Performance as MIDI
Data
You can record your music as “MIDI songs” and save them to an
optional USB memory. There is, however, a second function that
allows you to record your playing, anything the BK-9 can play,
including external audio sources, as WAVE les. See “Recording your
Performance as Audio Data (p. 75).
Two ways to start with MIDI data recorder
The BK-9 allows you to decide how the BK-9’s recorder can be
started and stopped.
1st way:
You can start recording simultaneously with Rhythm playback and you
can stop both Rhythm playback and the recorder.
Press the [SONG REC] button to enable the recording.
Press the [START/STOP] / [ */ , ] button to start recording
simultaneously with Rhythm playback.
Starting the recorder in this way, the [SONG REC] or [START/STOP]
/ [ */ , ] button stops both Rhythm playback and the recorder.
2nd way:
You can start recording before Rhythm playback starts.
In this case, you need to start recording by pressing the [AUDIO
REC] button twice:
• First, to enable the recording (it ashes).
• Second, to start the recording.
To stop recording, press the [SONG REC] button a third time.
In this mode, the [START/STOP] / [ */ , ] button will only stop
Rhythm playback if you started it while the recording was
running.
The following is based on the assumption that you choose the 1st
way to record.
1. Connect the USB memory to which you wish to save the
audio data.
2. Set the “Rec Mode” to “MIDI”. See p. 143.
This setting allows you to record your playing as MIDI le.
3. Prepare everything you want to record:
• Select the rhythm you want to use as accompaniment
• Select a Audio Key Set if you want.
• Set the levels and eects, etc.
4. Set the desired balance between the rhythm and the real-
time parts using the BALANCE knob.
5. Press the [SONG REC] button (its indicator ashes).
Recording your Performance as MIDI Data
77
NOTE
If you pressed the [SONG REC] button by accident, press and
hold it until its indicator goes dark again.
6. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ]button.
The indicators of the [SONG REC] and [START/STOP] buttons light
and the BK-9 starts playing back the selected rhythm and recording.
Everything you play on the keyboard is recorded.
The Main page shows the recording measure is running:
7. At the end of the song recording, press the [SONG REC] or
[START/STOP] / [ */, ] button to stop recording.
Rhythm playback and recording stop.
The following page appears:
Left Display
8. Rotate the dial to select “YES” to save your song in the USB
memory.
Otherwise, select “NO” to return to the main page.
This will take you to the following display page:
Right Display
9. Use the dial to select the folder where you want to save.
To return to a lower hierarchical level, you can press the [EXIT]
button.
10. Press the [WRITE] button.
The BK-9 suggests the name “new_song”.
Right Display
11. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
12. Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your desire to save
the song.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
main page.
If the USB memory already contains a song le of the specied
name, you will be asked whether you want to overwrite it:
Right Display
In this case, select YES” using the dial to replace the old le with the
new one (the old le will be lost). Otherwise, select “NO”.
Recording your Performance
78
Tracks, MIDI channels and 16-Track
Sequencer.
The Recorder allows for simultaneous multitrack recording.
You can use the 16-Track sequencer to add new tracks or change
existing ones later on.
To do this it is important to know the MIDI channel for the
respective Rhythm and keyboard parts:
Track/ MIDI
channel
Recorder part BK-9’s part
1 Accomp. 1 Rhythm Part
2 Accomp. Bass Rhythm Part
3 Accomp. 2 Rhythm Part
4 Upper 1 Keyboard Part
5 Accomp. 3 Rhythm Part
6 Upper 2 Keyboard Part
7 Accomp. 4 Rhythm Part
8 Accomp. 5 Rhythm Part
9 Accomp. 6 Rhythm Part
10 Accomp. Drum Rhythm Part
11 Lower Keyboard Part
12 Manual Bass Keyboard Part
13 Audio Key (RPS) Keyboard Part
14 --
15 Melody Intell. Keyboard Part
16 --
For detailed information to add new tracks or change existing ones
see “20. Working with the 16-Track Sequencer” (p. 81).
79
The Chord Loop of your BK-9 is a very powerful tool that allows you
to record a chord sequence.
The Chord Loop has two operation modes:
• Loop
Use this mode If you need to replicate a short chord pattern
several times during your performance while you concentrate
on the melody or solo.
• Sequencer
Use this mode if you need to prepare the accompaniment
(chord sequence) of an entire song before recording it.
“Realtime chord sequencing (Loop
Mode)
Recording and playing back in realtime means that the rhythm
playback is already running when you start recording your Chord
Loop.
1. Set the parameter Chord Loop Mode in”Loop. See p.
148.
As default the Chord Loop Mode is set on “Loop“.
2. Press [START/STOP] to start rhythm playback.
3. Press CHORD LOOP [REC] a little ahead of the bar (one or
two beats) where the BK-9 starts recording.
The indicator of the CHORD LOOP [REC] button will ash until the
next downbeat and then light steadily to indicate that the Chord
Sequencer is recording.
4. At the end of the your chord pattern press CHORD LOOP
[PLAY].
At the next downbeat the chord sequence starts at the beginning
of the pattern and plays it back again and again until you press the
CHORD LOOP [PLAY] button once more. The CHORD LOOP [PLAY]
button indicator goes o.
Recording a Chords Sequence for an
Entire Song (Sequencer Mode)
The Chord Loop allows you to record the accompaniment of an
entire song from start to nish.
1. Set the parameter Chord Loop Mode in”Sequencer. See
p. 148.
2. Select the Rhythm of the Music Style you want to use (p.
38).
3. If necessary, you can change the rhythms tempo:
• Press the TEMPO [] or [] button to decrease or increase the
tempo
• Press the [TAP TEMPO] button at least three times at the desired
tempo.
The BK-9 calculates the intervals between your presses and sets the
corresponding tempo value.
4. Activate the [SYNC START] function if that is how you
want to launch Style playback.
5. Press CHORD LOOP [REC] (indicator ashes).
6. Play the rst chord or press the [START/STOP] button to
manually start Rhythm playback, and do everything you
would do during a normal performance involving Music
Styles.
7. At the end of the song, press the [START/STOP] button.
MEMO
There is no need to press the [START/STOP] if you end the song
with the Ending or Fade Out function.
8. Press the CHORD LOOP [PLAY] button (indicator ashes).
Playback of the Chord sequence can be performed in the same
ways as playback of a Music Style.
Playing back a Chords Sequence
1. Record a chords sequence. See “Recording a Chords
Sequence for an Entire Song (Sequencer Mode)”.
2. Press the CHORD LOOP [PLAY] button. Its indicator
ashes.
3. Press the [START/STOP] to play the chords sequence that
you recorded before. Its indicator lights steady.
4. Press CHORD LOOP [PLAY] button to stop playing back
the chord sequence. Note that this does not stop the
rhythm playback. If you want to stop the rhythm playback
press the [START/STOP] button.
Saving the Chords Sequence
The BK-9 allows you to save your chord sequencer into a optional
USB memory.
1. Press the [MENU] button and using the dial to select the
Cord Loop“ page.
You can also select the Chord Loop page by pressing and hold the
CHORD LOOP [REC].
19. Recording a Chord Sequence (Chord Loop)
Recording a Chord Sequence (Chord Loop)
80
Right Display
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button to enter in the Chord
Loop Edit” page.
Left Display
3. Rotate the dial to select “Save and push the dial.
The display now shows the contents of the connected USB memory.
Select the location to save the le
NOTE
Your own chords sequence can only be saved to a USB memory.
If you forgot to connect one, the display now shows the
message “USB Device not inserted”.
4. Press the [WRITE] button
The BK-9 suggests the name “Chord Sequence.
Right Display
.
5. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
6. Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your desire to save
the chords sequence.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
“Chord Loop page.
If the USB memory already contains a rhythm le of the specied
name, you will be asked whether you want to overwrite it:
Right Display
In this case, select YES” using the dial to replace the old le with the
new one (the old le will be lost). Otherwise, select “NO”.
Loading a Chords Sequence
You can load a chords sequence previously saved.
1. Press the [MENU] button and using the dial to select the
Cord Loop“ page.
You can also select the Chord Loop page by pressing and hold the
CHORD LOOP [REC].
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button to enter in the Chord
Loop Edit” page.
3. Rotate the dial to select “Load” and push the dial.
The display now shows the contents of the connected USB memory.
4. Use the dial to select the chords sequence le to load and
push the dial. For example “Chord Sequence.CSQ”.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
“Chord Loop page.
MEMO
The chord sequence les have the extension .CSQ“
81
20. Working with the 16-Track Sequencer
Your BK-9 contains a powerful 16-Track sequencer with a host of
edit functions. This sequencer allows you to record MIDI data and is
therefore not available for WAVE recordings.
Important Things Before Using
16-Track Sequencer.
• The 16-Track sequencer does not recognize changes made to
a song using the “SMF MAKEUP TOOLS” functions. It only “sees
the original song data. You can, however, use the Freeze Data
function to modify the song le before you start editing it. See
To commit your changes (Freeze Data)” (p. 101).
• The 16-Track sequencer can be used to record onto 16 tracks
sequentially (one track at a time).
• The 16-Track sequencer can also be used to edit existing songs.
To do so, simply select an SMF song (p. 44), then select the
16-Track sequencer page.
• Tracks are assigned to MIDI channels on a 1:1 basis (i.e. Track 1=
MIDI channel 1,… Track 12= MIDI channel 12, etc.).
• In addition to the 16 “music” tracks, there is a “MASTER” track. It
is used for recording the time signature, the tempo, as well as
general SysEx data.
Selecting the 16-Track Sequencer
1. Press the [MENU] button, rotate the dial to select “16Track
Sequencer”, then push the dial.
The displays change to:
Left Display
Right Display
About the sequencers main pages
Left display
In this page you can select the track to play, record or edit. The rst
tone in the track is shown.
In the rst row the song name is shown.
Right display
This page shows the tracks (1~16) in the song. The horizontal bars
indicate that tracks contain musical data.
Right Display
If you look at the example above, you will notice a little arrow on
top of the horizontal bars. The little arrow refers to the current
position of play or record pointer within the song (which is also
indicated in the “M:xxx.x eld). The horizontal bars indicate that a
track contains musical data in that position.
Now look again at the illustration: only the tracks that contain note
data that are not muted have the “*” symbol.
MUTE & SOLO function
The MUTE function allows you to temporarily switch o the
selected track, which may be useful when you want to record or
edit additional parts without being distracted by already existing
parts.
The SOLO function allows you to listen to the selected track in
isolation (it mutes all other tracks).
a. To mute a track, select it and press the [TRACK MUTE]
button.
b. To listen to the track in isolation, select the track and
press and hold the [TRACK MUTE] button.
Soloed tracks are agged with an “S”, while muted tracks use
the letter “M”.
Recording a Song from Scratch
If you have already played back a song since switching on the BK-9,
the song internal memory already contains data we need to erase.
Initialize a Song
1. From the 16-Track Sequencer main pages press the
[QUICK MENU] button.
The left display changes to:
Left Display
2. Use the dial to select “Initialize Song”.
Working with the 16-Track Sequencer
82
Left Display
3. Use the dial to set the desired value of the following three
elds.
The following parameters can be set:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Tempo 20~250 (BPM)
Allows you to specify the initial tempo
of the new song (Q= 20~250). Choose a
tempo that is comfortable for recording.
Time
Signature
1/16 ~ 32/16,
1/8 ~ 32/8,,
1/4 ~ 32/4,
1/2 ~32/2
If your new song uses the 4/4 time
signature, there is no need to change
this value.
Otherwise, enter the desired time
signature.
Template
--- No template selected.
Orchestral
Selects orchestral sounds suitable for
classical music and lm scores.
Folk Selects sounds suitable for folk music.
Pop
Selects sounds often used in pop
arrangements.
Baroque
Selects instrument sounds suitable for
chamber music.
Country
Selects sounds suitable for country
music.
Jazz Selects sounds suitable for jazz combos.
Rock Selects sounds suitable for rock music.
Electronic Selects sounds suitable for dance music.
Ethnic Selects sounds suitable for world music.
4. Press the [WRITE] button to initialize the song internal
memory. The display changes to:
Left Display
5. Use the dial to select “YES”, then push the dial to initialize
the song internal memory.
The BK-9 now initializes the song internal memory and jumps to the
main 16-Track Sequencer page.
Otherwise, select “NO” and push the dial to return to the “Initialize
Song” page.
Before Starting to Record
6. Press the [SONG REC] button (the indicator ashes).
The left display changes to:
Left Display
7. Use the dial to select the track (“REC Track“) you want to
record.
8. Use the dial to select and set the other desired
parameter(s).
The following parameters are available:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Rec Track 1~16 Select the track you want to record.
Rec Type
Track REC Type
1~3 STD
4 STD, UPPER1
5 STD
6 STD, UPPER2
7~10 STD
11 STD, LOWER
12 STD, M.BASS
13 STD, RPS
14 STD
15 STD, MI
16 STD
Specify how the track should
behave (some are always “STD”
tracks).
STD
The sequencer uses song parts.
Track
Song part
Use this setting to create a song
that can be compatible with other
instruments.
UPPER1, UPPER2, LOWER,
M.BASS, MI (Melody Int)
The sequencer uses keyboard
parts.
Track
Keyboard
part
Use this setting to have the same
“sound” that you can obtain when
you use the real time parts.
RPS
Use this setting to create an
Audio Key track.
Rec Mode Replace, Mix
Replace
Select “Replace if the track
contains data you wish to replace
with new data. This erases all data
of the selected track from the
place where you start recording
until the end. (“Replace is
selected by default for empty
tracks.)
Mix
Select “Mix” to add new notes
to the ones already recorded in
the selected track. This recording
mode is particularly useful for
recording the rhythm track (10)
because you can rst record the
bass and snare drums, then add a
few tom hits here and there and
record the HiHat, for example.
(“Mix” is selected by default for
tracks that already contain data.)
Recording an Existing Song
83
Parameter Setting Explanation
Count In
O, 1Meas, 2Meas, Wait
Note
Specify how long the count-in
should be before recording starts.
O
No count-in.
1Meas
Recording starts after a 1-bar
count-in.
2Meas
Recording starts after a 2-bar
count-in.
Wait Note
Recording starts as soon as you
play a note on the keyboard.
(There will be no count-in.)
Tempo Rec
Sw
O, On
If you want to record tempo
changes, select “On”.
This option allows you to use the
TEMPO buttons to vary the tempo
while recording. Those changes are
recorded to the MASTER track.
Input
Quantize
O, 1/4, 1/8, 1/8T, 1/16,
1/16T, 1/32, 1/32T, 1/64.
Quantize corrects the timing of
your notes by shifting them to the
nearest grid mark.
Here is an example:
1 2 3
4 1
1 2 3
4 1
1 2 3
4 1
1/8
1/16
This is
how you
played it.
This Quantize function changes
the way in which your notes are
recorded.
Octave -4~0~4
Set the required octave transposi-
tion.
This allows you to record “special
noises” (usually assigned to the
lowest notes numbers), like the
ones of ngers sliding over guitar
strings, etc., if the selected sound
provides them.
Punch In O, On
If you select “On” the sequencer
will activate recording as soon as it
reaches the “Punch In Bar” position.
Punch In
Bar
001, 998
Set this parameter to specify the
measure where recording should
start.
Recording is activated when the
sequencer reaches the “Punch In
Bar” position.
Punch Out O, On
If you select “On” the sequencer
will deactivate recording as soon
as it reaches the “Punch Out Bar”
position.
Punch Out
Bar
002, 999
Set this parameter to specify the
measure where recording should
end.
Recording is deactivated when the
sequencer reaches the “Punch Out
Bar” position.
Foot Punch
I/O
O, On
Setting the “Foot Punch I/O”
parameter “On, the Punch In/Out
function can be assigned to an
optional FC-7 pedal unit (p. 146) or
a optional Pedal Switch (p. 144).
For those applications, there is
no need to set the “Punch In Bar
and Punch Out Bar” positions
beforehand.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Rec Select
Note
O, On
Select O to avoid recording note
messages.
Rec Select
CC
O, On
Select O to avoid recording
control change messages, such
as modulation (CC01), expression
(CC11), etc.
(CC00) and (CC32) bank select
messages also belong to this group.
Rec Select
PC
O, On
Select O to avoid recording
program change messages.
Select On” if the track should use
dierent sounds.
Rec Select
PBend
O, On
Select O to avoid recording pitch
bender messages.
Rec Select
SysEx
O, On
Select O to avoid recording SysEx
messages for the MASTER track.
9. Select the desired tone for your new track, if you need.
See “Selecting Tones and Playing the Keyboard” (p. 28).
10. Select the bar where playback and/or recording should
start (for a full track only):
• Press the [INTRO] / [' ]button to return to the beginning of the
song (measure “1”).
—or—
• Use the [ENDING]/[ & ] button to select a measure slightly
ahead of where you want to start recording
11. To start recording either press the [START/STOP]/[ */, ]
button or play the rst notes (if you selected “Count In”=
“Wait Note”).
12. Play the new part.
13. Press the [START/STOP]/[ */, ] button to stop recording.
14. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ] button to start playback of
your recording.
15. You can start from step 6 to record other tracks.
16. The Song internal memory is erased when you switch o
your BK-9. Save your song in an optional USB memory (p.
84).
NOTE
The Song internal memory is erased when you switch o your
BK-9.
Recording an Existing Song
Heres how to add a track to an existing song.
1. Load a SMF song.
See “Selecting a Song or Rhythm on a USB Memory (p. 44).
NOTE
If the song you wish to supplement contains MAKEUP TOOLS
settings, be sure to “freeze” those data and to save your new
version before changing it. See To commit your changes (Freeze
Data)” (p. 101).
2. Press the [MENU] button, rotate the dial to select “16Track
Sequencer”, then push the dial.
The displays show the song tracks.
3. Now you can proceed from the step 6 “Before Starting
to Record” (p. 82) to record a new track or modify an
Working with the 16-Track Sequencer
84
existing track.
4. The Song internal memory is erased when you switch o
your BK-9. Save your song in a optional USB memory.
NOTE
The Song internal memory is erased when you switch o your
BK-9.
Saving Your Song
The 16-Track sequencer uses the internal memory where all editing
takes place. To avoid loosing data you need to save your song in a
optional USB memory. The Song internal memory is erased when
you switch o your BK-9.
1. Connect the USB memory to which you wish to save your
song.
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button from a 16-Track
sequencer pages.
3. Rotate the dial to select “Save“ and push it.
This will take you to the following display pages:
Left Display
Right Display
4. Use the dial to select the folder where you want to save.
To return to a lower hierarchical level, you can press the [EXIT]
button.
5. Press the [WRITE] button.
The BK-9 suggests the name “new_song”.
Right Display
.
6. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
7. Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your desire to save
the song.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
“16-Track sequencer” page.
If the USB memory already contains a song le of the specied
name, you will be asked whether you want to overwrite it:
Right Display
In this case, select YES” using the dial to replace the old le with the
new one (the old le will be lost). Otherwise, select “NO”.
If You Leave the 16-Track Sequencer
Without Save Your Song.
To ensure that you do not forget to save your song after recording
and/or editing it, you are given the opportunity to do so upon
leaving the 16-Track Sequencer page (by pressing the [EXIT]
button):
1. Press [EXIT] from the 16-Track Sequencer page.
The display changes to:
Left Display
2. Use the dial to select “YES” to save your changes (and the
entire song). This will take you to the following display
page:
Right Display
Select “NO to return to the main page without saving the song.
3. Now you can proceed from the step 4 “Saving Your Song”
(p. 84).
Editing one or several tracks (Track
Edit)
The Track Edit environment of the 16-Track Sequencer provides 12
functions:
Editing one or several tracks (Track Edit)
85
Track Edit Function Page
QUANTIZE
ERASE
DELETE
COPY
INSERT
KEY
CHANGE VELO
CHANGE GATE TIME
MERGE
GLOBAL CHANGE
SHIFT CLOCK
TRACK EXCHANGE
NOTE
The BK-9 has no Undo function. Saving your song before editing
will allow you to load the previous version if something goes
wrong.
Here is how to select functions:
1. Load the song you wish to edit (if it does not yet reside in
the BK-9’s Song internal memory).
See “Selecting a Song or Rhythm on a USB Memory (p. 44).
2. Press the [MENU] button, rotate the dial to select “16Track
Sequencer”, then push the dial.
3. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
The left display changes to:
Left Display
4. Use the dial to select Track Edit”.
The displays change to:
Left Display
Right Display
5. Use the dial to select the desiderate Track Edit function.
The BK-9 changes the focus from the left to the right display.
6. Use the dial to select the track(s) you wish to modify.
7. Use the dial to select the range (“From and To”) for the
edit operation.
The “From” and To” parameters allow you to specify the positions
(measure/beat/clock) of the track excerpt you want to change.
Parameter Setting Explanation
From Bar
1~[last measure
of the track or
song]
Refers to the rst measure to be edited.
By default, the “From value is set to the
beginning of the selected track(s).
From Beat
1~[number of
beats per bar]
Species the beat position. The number
of available beats depends on the time
signature in the selected area.
From Cpt 1~119
Refers to the starting CPT position.
“CPT” is short for “Clock Pulse Time, the
smallest unit used by the BK-9. (There
are 120 CPTs to every beat of a 4/4 bar.)
Change this setting only if your edit
operation should start after the selected
beat.
To Bar
1~[last measure
of the track or
song]
This is where you specify the bar position
of the last measure to be edited.
To Beat
1~[number of
beats per bar]
Species the beat position. The number
of available beats depends on the time
signature in the selected area.
To Cpt 1~119
Refers to the last clock that should be
aected by the edit operation. Change
this setting only if your edit operation
should not end exactly on the selected
beat.
Example: to change measures 1~4 of the selected track, enter the
following values:
From: Bar= 0001 To: Bar= 0005
Beat= 01 Beat= 01
Cpt= 000 Cpt= 000
8. Use the dial to specify what you want to change and how
it should change.
9. Conrm the operation by pressing the [WRITE] button.
10. Save your song.
See “Saving Your Song” (p. 84).
QUANTIZE
Use this function if you chose not to quantize your music during
recording and now realize that the timing is not quite what you
expected it to be. Quantizing after recording has the advantage
that you can rst listen to the original and then correct only those
notes whose timing is denitely o.
Left Display
Right Display
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track All, Trk 1~ Trk 16
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
Working with the 16-Track Sequencer
86
Parameter Setting Explanation
From Bar
For details information see p. 85.
From Beat
From Cpt
To Bar
To Beat
To Cpt
Resolution
1/4, 1/8, 1/8T,
1/16, 1/16T, 1/32,
1/32T, 1/64
This parameter sets the resolution of
the Quantize function. Be sure to always
select the value of the shortest note you
recorded. Otherwise, your part no longer
sounds the way you played it, because
shorter notes are shifted to the wrong
positions.
Strength 0%~100%
Use this parameter to specify how
precise the timing correction should
be. “0%” means that the selected
“Resolution” value is not applied (“0%
correction”), while “100%” means that all
notes are shifted to the mathematically
correct positions.
Maybe rst try values between “50%”
and “85%” to preserve at least part
of the original feel. If the result is not
acceptable, repeat the operation with
the same or a higher value.
From Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set the
note (or lower limit of the note range)
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
To Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set
the upper limit of the note range
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
ERASE
ERASE allows you to selectively delete data either within a specied
range of measures, beats or clocks or from the entire track(s). When
“Data Type is set to ALL, ERASE substitutes the required number of
rests for the data you delete, so that you end up with the equivalent
number of blank measures. If you also want to eliminate the
measures themselves, use DELETE (see below).
Erase NOTE From 2.1.0 To 4.1.0
Left Display
Right Display
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track All, Trk 1~ Trk 16
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
Parameter Setting Explanation
From Bar
For details information see p. 85.
From Beat
From Cpt
To Bar
To Beat
To Cpt
Data Type
ALL, Note,
P.Bender, Control
Change, Program
Change, NRPN,
RPN, CAF,
Allows you to select the data to be
erased.
From Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set the
note (or lower limit of the note range)
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
To Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set
the upper limit of the note range
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
If “Data Type” (see above) is set to “Note” the following parameters
are displayed also.
Parameter Setting Explanation
From Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set the
note (or lower limit of the note range)
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
To Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set
the upper limit of the note range
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
If “Data Type” (see above) is set to “Control Change the following
parameters are displayed also.
Parameter Setting Explanation
From CC 0~127
It allows you to set the lower limit of
the control change numbers or values
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
To CC 0~127
This parameter allows you to set the
upper limit of the control change
numbers or values to be modied within
the specied “From”/“To time range.
DELETE
Unlike the ERASE function, DELETE not only erases the data but also
the measures, beats and/or CPT units, so that all data that lie behind
the TO position are shifted towards the beginning of the track(s).
For this reason, you cannot choose the data type to be erased.
Delete From 2.1.0 To 4.1.0
Editing one or several tracks (Track Edit)
87
Left Display
Right Display
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track All, Trk 1~ Trk 16
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
From Bar
For details information see p. 85.
From Beat
From Cpt
To Bar
To Beat
To Cpt
COPY
The COPY function allows you to copy one track to another or
excerpts of one or all tracks to a dierent location. The latter is
useful if you need to repeat the chorus several times at the end of
the song but do not feel like recording all those notes.
Left Display
Right Display
Parameter Setting Explanation
Source Track All, Trk 1~ Trk 16
Allows you to select the track whose
data you wish to copy
From Bar
For details information see p. 85.
From Beat
From Cpt
To Bar
To Beat
To Cpt
Dest Trk Trk 1~ Trk 16
This is where you select the track to
which you want to copy the selected
data. If you set “Source Track to ALL, the
“Dest Trk” setting cannot be changed.
Into Bar
1~[last measure
of the track or
song]
The bar, beat and CPT values of the
position the rst data of the source track
will be copied to.Into Beat
1~[number of
beats per bar]
Into Cpt 1~119
Parameter Setting Explanation
Copy Mode Replace, Mix
Allows you to specify how the data
should be copied:
Replace
The selected FROM/TO range overwrites
the data (of the destination track) in
the area to which the selected data are
copied.
Mix
The data in the selected range of the
source track are added to the data on
the destination track.
Copy Times 1~999
Sets the number of copies you wish to
make. The value “3” means that you will
end up with 3 contiguous copies.
Data Type
ALL, Note,
P.Bender, Control
Change, Program
Change, NRPN,
RPN, CAF,
Allows you to select the data to be
copied.
If “Data Type” (see above) is set to “Note” the following parameters
are displayed also.
Parameter Setting Explanation
From Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set the
note (or lower limit of the note range)
to be copied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
To Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set the
upper limit of the note range to be
copied within the specied “From”/“To”
time range.
If “Data Type” (see above) is set to “Control Change the following
parameters are displayed also.
Parameter Setting Explanation
From CC 0~127
It allows you to set the lower limit of the
control change numbers or values to be
copied within the specied “From”/“To”
time range.
To CC 0~127
This parameter allows you to set the
upper limit of the control change
numbers or values to be copied within
the specied “From”/“To time range.
INSERT
INSERT allows you to insert space and shift data that lie behind
the “From position further towards the end of the song (this is the
exact opposite of DELETE).
These empty measures can be “lled using the COPY function or by
recording new phrases in that area (using Punch In/Out).
Left Display
Right Display
Working with the 16-Track Sequencer
88
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track All, Trk 1~ Trk 16
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
From Bar
For details information see p. 85.From Beat
From Cpt
For Bar 0~997
Species how many bars, beats and CPTs
are to be inserted.
For Beat
1~[number of
beats per bar]
For Cpt 1~119
If Track” (see above) is set to All” the following parameter is
displayed also.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Time Sig
Num
1~32
If Track”= ALL, you can use these elds
to set the time signature of the new
measures.
Time Sig Den 2, 4, 8, 16
KEY (Transpose)
This function allows you to transpose the notes of the selected track
(non-note data obviously cannot be transposed).
Left Display
Right Display
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track All, Trk 1~ Trk 16
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
From Bar
For details information see p. 85.
From Beat
From Cpt
To Bar
To Beat
To Cpt
Parameter Setting Explanation
Value -127~0~127
This is where you can set the transposi-
tion interval in semitone steps. If you
wish to transpose a “C” part to “D”, enter
“2”. As you see, you can transpose the
highest possible MIDI note all the way
down to the lowest (and vice versa).
WARNING
“0” represents the lowest note the
MIDI standard (and the 16-Track
sequencer) can handle, while “127” is
the highest note. If you select “127” for
note number “74 (D5)”, for example,
the resulting note number would be
“201”, which is impossible. Therefore,
the sequencer will subtract “12” (one
octave) from “201” until the result
is less than or equal to “127” – and
therefore use the value “117” in our
example.
This happens to all notes that would
otherwise lie below “0” or above “127”.
NOTE
Be careful when applying transpose
to a drum track (track 10 or any other
track that uses a Drum Set). This results
in a dramatic change of your rhythm
section (with a triangle playing the
kick notes, for example).
From Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set the
note (or lower limit of the note range)
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
To Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set
the upper limit of the note range
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
CHANGE VELOCITY
The CHANGE VELO function allows you to modify the dynamics
(called “velocity”) of a track or excerpt.
Increasing the velocity values means that the notes in question will
be louder and brighter than before, while reducing the velocity
values means the opposite.
Use this function when you are happy with the timing of the notes
but would like the sound to be brighter/louder or rounder/softer.
You can decide to add/subtract a xed velocity value (“BIAS”) or to
change them proportionally (“MAGNIFY”).
Left Display
Right Display
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track All, Trk 1~ Trk 16
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
Editing one or several tracks (Track Edit)
89
Parameter Setting Explanation
From Bar
For details information see p. 85.
From Beat
From Cpt
To Bar
To Beat
To Cpt
Bias –99~99
The BIAS parameter allows you to
specify by how much the velocity
values should change. Select a positive
value to increase the velocity (the
value is added to the velocity value
of the aected notes) or a negative
value to decrease the velocity values
(that value is subtracted). Select “0” if
you prefer to work with the MAGNIFY
parameter (see below).
Magnify 0~200%
This parameter works like a
“Compander” eect (a dynamics
processor that simultaneously acts as
compressor and expander), although
it processes MIDI data: by selecting a
value above “100%” you increase the
dierences between high and low
velocity values in the selected range.
Values below “64” are lowered, while
values above “64” are increased. The
result is therefore that the dierence
between pianissimo and fortissimo
becomes far more pronounced.
“Magnify” values below “100%” have
the opposite eect: they push all
velocity towards the imaginary center
of “64”, thus reducing dierences in
playing dynamics.
From Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set the
note (or lower limit of the note range)
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
To Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set
the upper limit of the note range
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
CHANGE GATE TIME
This function allows you to modify the duration of the notes in
the selected time (From/To) and note (From/To Note) ranges.
We recommend you only use this function to shorten notes that
suddenly seem too long when you assign a dierent sound to the
track in question. You cannot view the duration of the notes here,
which makes editing the data enbloc a little bit hazardous. Use
the MICRO EDIT environment to change the duration of individual
notes.
Left Display
Right Display
After selecting a sound with a slow release (i.e. a sound that lingers
on after all notes have been released), however, CHANGE GATE TIME
will help you cut the notes down to size and thus avoid undesirable
overlaps.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track All, Trk 1~ Trk 16
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
From Bar
For details information see p. 85.
From Beat
From Cpt
To Bar
To Beat
To Cpt
Bias (Cpt) –4800~4800
This parameter sets the amount by
which the duration (or gate time) of
the selected notes is to change. The
shortest possible GATE TIME value is
“1” (used for all drum notes), so that
selecting “–1000” for notes with a GATE
TIME value of “1” in the specied time
range still leaves you with the same
value.
Magnify 0~200%
Use this parameter rather than BIAS to
produce proportional changes to the
aected GATE TIME values.
Values below “100%” decrease the
duration, while anything above “100%”
increases it. Select “100%” if you prefer
to work with the BIAS (CPT) parameter
(see above).
From Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set the
note (or lower limit of the note range)
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
To Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set
the upper limit of the note range
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
MERGE
Use this parameter to combine the data of two tracks (i.e. of all data
the two tracks contain – from start to nish). The combined version
can be found on the destination track (Dest Trk). Be aware that all
data will use the same MIDI channel. The “Source Trk” track could
therefore be used for recording a new part.
Left Display
Right Display
Parameter Setting Explanation
Source Track Trk 1~ Trk 16
Allows you to select the track whose
data should be added to those of the
“Dest Trk” track.
Dest Trk
Trk 1~ Trk 16
(except the track
selected as
“Source Trk”)
Use this parameter to specify the track
that should contain a combination of its
original data and those of the selected
source track.
Working with the 16-Track Sequencer
90
GLOBAL CHANGE
This function allows you to make quick changes to certain settings.
The changes always apply to entire tracks (you cannot use GLOBAL
CHANGE for just a few measures). Designed to help you enhance
Standard MIDI Files, it is a wonderful tool for the following
applications:
“Upgrading” older Standard MIDI Files to take advantage of the
BK-9’s new sounds.
• Global changes to the Reverb and/or Chorus Send values, which
is very convenient when you suddenly notice that the eect is
too prominent or not strong enough.
Left Display
Right Display
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track All, Trk 1~ Trk 16
Allows you to select the track you
wish to edit. You can also select ALL
here, in which case the operation
applies to all tracks.
From CC00
--, 0~127, ALL
This control change is the so
called “MSB” bank select message.
It allows you to select the Capital
Tone (select “0”) of a sound
address if you don’t want to use
variations or to select another
variation level. The To CC00” value
= 0” can be useful for ensuring
GM compatibility, because that
standard (unlike GM2 or GS) does
not support tone variations.
Select “---” if the current setting
must not change.
To CC00
From CC32
--, 0~127, ALL
This control change is the so
called
“LSB” bank select message.
Select “---” if the current setting
must not change.
To CC32
From PC
--, 1~128, ALL
Use this parameter to change the
program change number, (e.g.
from “1” to “2”).
Select “---” if the current setting
must not change.
To PC
Inc/dec Volume
–127~127
These parameters allow you to
add (+ or subtract (–) a given
value to/from the current Volume,
Expression, Pan, Reverb Send or
Chorus Send values. This may
come in handy if the real-time
changes you recorded turn out to
be too high or too low.
Inc/dec Reverb
Inc/dec Expression
Inc/dec Chorus
Inc/dec Panpot
SHIFT CLOCK
SHIFT CLOCK allows you to shift the notes within the selected
FROM/TO range. It can be used for two things:
• To correct “slow” notes due to a slow(er) attack.
You may want to use SHIFT CLOCK after assigning a sound to
a track that has a considerably slower attack than the sound
you used for recording the part in question. This technique
is frequently used in pop music to “time” 1/16-note string
arpeggios played with a “slow” pad sound.
Rather than have the notes begin at the mathematically correct
time (e.g. 2-1-0), you could shift them to the left (e.g. to 1-4-115),
so that the peak volume of the attack is reached on the next
beat:
Original positions (slow attack,
timing seems o
Shift= –5
(timing sounds OK)
• To correct the timing of notes recorded via MIDI without
quantizing them.
You can use external sequences as raw material for your songs.
Recording such excerpts via MIDI may cause a slight delay (e.g.
5 CPT). If that is not acceptable, use SHIFT CLOCK to “push” the
recorded data to the left (select “–5”). That allows you preserve
any irregularities the original may contain because it was not
quantized.
Left Display
Right Display
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track All, Trk 1~ Trk 16
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
From Bar
For details information see p. 85.
From Beat
From Cpt
To Bar
To Beat
To Cpt
Data Type
ALL, Note,
P.Bender, Control
Change, Program
Change, NRPN,
RPN, CAF,
Allows you to select the data to be
shifted.
Value (Cpt) –4800~4800
This parameter sets the amount by
which the notes are shifted. The value
refers to CPT units (one CPT= 1/120 Q).
Notes on the rst beat of the rst bar
cannot be shifted further to the left,
because that would mean shifting them
to the “0” measure, which doesn’t exist.
If “Data Type” (see above) is set to “Note” the following parameters
are displayed also.
Parameter Setting Explanation
From Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set the
note (or lower limit of the note range)
to be copied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
To Note C-~G9
This parameter allows you to set the
upper limit of the note range to be
copied within the specied “From”/“To”
time range.
If “Data Type” (see above) is set to “Control Change the following
Editing Song using Micro Edit
91
parameters are displayed also.
Parameter Setting Explanation
From CC 0~127
It allows you to set the lower limit of the
control change numbers or values to be
copied within the specied “From”/“To”
time range.
To CC 0~127
This parameter allows you to set the
upper limit of the control change
numbers or values to be copied within
the specied “From”/“To time range.
TRACK EXCHANGE
TRACK EXCHANGE allows you to move the data of the source track
(left) to the destination track (right) and –at the same time– the
data of the destination track to the source track.
Left Display
Right Display
Parameter Setting Explanation
Source Track Trk 1~ Trk 16
This is where you select the rst track to
be exchanged.
Dest Trk
Trk 1~ Trk 16
(except the track
selected as
“Source Trk”)
This is where you select the second track
to be exchanged.
NOTE
Be careful when exchanging a drum
track and a “melodic” track. The result
may not be what you had in mind.
Editing Song using Micro Edit
Select this mode whenever you only need to change small details
of an otherwise perfect Standard MIDI File.
In this section, we will use the word event for any kind of message.
You can only view and edit one track at a time.
1. Load the song you wish to edit (if it does not yet reside in
the BK-9’s Song internal memory).
See “Selecting a Song or Rhythm on a USB Memory (p. 44).
2. Press the [MENU] button, rotate the dial to select “16Track
Sequencer”, then push the dial.
3. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
The left display changes to:
Left Display
4. Use the dial to select “Micro Edit”.
The displays change to:
Left Display
Right Display
5. In the left display use the dial to select the track you want
to edit.
The right display shows you the events of the selected track.
6. In the right display rotate the dial to scroll the events list.
7. Push the dial several times until the desired eld is
selected.
The selected eld is shown in reverse.
Right Display
In the example we selected a “Note” event.
8. Rotate the dial to change the value (In the example the
note number).
9. Push the dial several times until the eld is deselected.
The display shows the led deselect:
Right Display
Working with the 16-Track Sequencer
92
10. Change all events you need.
11. Press [EXIT] button to return to the main page of 16-Track
Sequencer.
MEMO
The Song internal memory is erased when you switch o your
BK-9. Save your song in an optional USB memory (p. 84).
Other edit operations
The Micro Edit function allow you to:
Function Explanation
Create Event Use this function to add new events to the selected track.
Erase Event Use this function to erase events.
Move Event This function allows you to move one or several events.
Copy Event Use this function to copy events to the selected track.
Place Event Use this function to paste events previously copied.
MEMO
The Song internal memory is erased when you switch o your
BK-9. Save your song in an optional USB memory (p. 84).
1. From the Micro Edit pages press the [QUICK MENU]
button.
The left display changes to:
Left Display
2. Use the dial to select the edit function you need.
Create Event
Select this function to add a new event to the selected track.
The left display changes to:
Left Display
1. Use the dial to select to edit the event eld.
Parameter Setting Default Event Created
Event
Note
Note Number: 60: C4
On Velocity: 100
Gate Time: 60
Control Change CC01 Modulation, value “0”
Program Change Program Change Number “1”
Pitch Bender Value “0”
Aftertouch,
Note Number: 60 C4
Aftertouch Value: “0”
Channel Pressure Value “0”
Parameter Explanation
To Bar
Specify the position where your new event should be insertedTo Beat
To Cpt
2. Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your settings and add
the new event.
The event is added and the Micro Edit pages is displayed.
3. Use the Micro Edit function to change the default value of
the event inserted.
Erase Event
This function erase the selected event in the Micro Edit function.
1. Use the dial to select the event you want to delete.
To select more than event push and hold the dial and rotate it.
Right Display
The example shows two selected events.
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button and use the dial select the
“Erase Event” function.
The events will be erased.
Move Event
Use this function to move on or several events
1. From the Micro Edit use the dial to select the event you
want to move.
To select more than event push and hold the dial and rotate it.
Editing the Master Track
93
Right Display
The example shows two selected events.
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button and select the “Move
Event” function.
The left display changes to:
Left Display
3. Use the dial to specify the position to which the rst event
(in chronological order) of the selected group should be
shifted.
Parameter Explanation
To Bar
Specify the position where your new event should be insertedTo Beat
To Cpt
4. Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your settings and
move the new event.
The events are moved and the Micro Edit pages is displayed.
Copy Event and Place Event
This functions allows you to copy one or several events and place
them (Paste) in a specic position in the same track or in the
another track.
1. From the Micro Edit use the dial to select the event you
want to copy.
To select more than event push and hold the dial and rotate it.
Right Display
The example shows two selected events.
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button and select the “Copy
Event” function.
The events are copied and the Micro Edit pages is displayed.
3. If necessary, use the dial to select another track.
Left Display
4. Press the [QUICK MENU] button and select the “Place
Event” function.
The left display changes to:
Left Display
Parameter Explanation
To Bar
Specify the position where the rst event you copied should
be inserted
To Beat
To Cpt
5. Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your settings and add
the new event in the selected track.
The events are places and the Micro Edit pages is displayed.
Editing the Master Track
The BK-9’s sequencer uses one track called “MASTER” for each song.
It is used for recording the time signature, the tempo, as well as
general SysEx messages that apply to all song tracks.
NOTE
You can only edit the MASTER track of songs that already exist,
so be sure to record or load a song beforehand.
1. From the 16-Track Sequencer main pages press the
[QUICK MENU] button.
The left display changes to:
Working with the 16-Track Sequencer
94
Left Display
2. Use the dial to select “Master Track.
The right display changes to
Right Display
This page lists all events already present on the MASTER track. It
allows you to modify the existing data, to delete data you do not
need and to add information that is missing.
NOTE
We suggest to save your song before editing the MASTER track.
The MASTER track of each Standard MIDI File contains at least
the following information:
Event Explanation
Tempo Tempo
Change
This is the Tempo Change” value located at 001:01:000.
It cannot be erased.
TS Beat Change
(Time signature)
This is the “Beat Change” value located at 001:01:000. It
cannot be erased.
SysEx
The “SysEx” string located close to the beginning of
the song. It tells the sound source what format is being
used, how the eects processors should be set (types,
parameter settings), etc.
EOT End Of track
The “End of Track value refers to the position of the last
event (which can be located on any track) and thus to
the end of the song. This value cannot be edited manu-
ally. You can, however, extend the song by recording
additional data or by inserting blank measures (p. 87).
To change information already available on the MASTER track,
proceed as follows:
3. In the right display use the dial to select the list entry you
want to edit.
4. Push the dial to select the (rst) value.
5. Rotate the dial to set the value.
The parameters you can change are:
Tempo Change (BPM)
Value Explanation
20~250 (BPM)
Species the song tempo. If necessary, you can insert
tempo changes anywhere within the song.
TS Beat Change (Numerator/Denominator)
1st Value 2nd Value Explanation
1~32
(Numerator)
2, 4, 8, 16
(Denominator)
Species the song’s time signature. If
necessary, you can insert time signature
changes anywhere within the song.
After pushing the dial for the rst time, you
can specify the numerator (the number of
beats per bar). Push it again to specify the
denominator (the note value of each beat).
SysEx
After selecting a “SysEx” line and push the dial, the display looks
more or less as follows:
Right Display
a. Use the dial to set a byte value (a pair of numbers).
“SysEx” refers to messages only the BK-9 (or another compatible
sound source) understands. Changing these values requires a
thorough understanding of the purpose and structure of SysEx
messages.
b. Press the [QUICK MENU] button to select useful SysEx
functions:
Function Explanation
Delete
Use this function to remove the selected byte.
All subsequent bytes will move one position to
the left.
Insert
Use this function to insert “00” at the current
position. The originally selected byte –and all
subsequent bytes– move one position to the right.
You can then replace the inserted “00” with the
value you need.
Send Sysex
Use this function to transmit the SysEx string in its
current state to the tone generator.
This allows you to check the result before
conrming it.
6. Press [WRITE] button to conrm your settings.
The BK-9 return to the Master Track Edit page.
Editing the Master Track
95
Other edit operations
1. From the Master Track Edit page press the [QUICK MENU]
button:
The left display shows:
Left Display
Function Explanation
Create Event Use this function to add new events.
Erase Event Use this function to erase events.
Move Event This function allows you to move one or several events.
Copy Event Use this function to copy events.
Place Event Use this function to paste events previously copied.
MEMO
The Song internal memory is erased when you switch o your
BK-9. Save your song in an optional USB memory (p. 84).
Create Event
Select this function to add a new event to the selected track.
The left display changes to:
Left Display
1. Use the dial to select to edit the event eld.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Event
Tempo Tempo events
Beat Time signature events
SysEx SysEx strings
Parameter Explanation
To Bar
Specify the position where your new event should be insertedTo Beat
To Cpt
2. Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your settings and add
the new event.
The event is added and the Master Track Edit pages is displayed.
3. Use the Master Track Edit function to change the default
value of the event inserted.
Erase Event
This function erase the selected event in the Master Track Edit
function.
1. Use the dial to select the event you want to delete.
To select more than event push and hold the dial and rotate it.
Right Display
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button and select the “Erase
Event” function.
The events will be erased.
NOTE
Tempo” and TS Beat Change” (time signature) events located at
“001:01:000” cannot be erased.
Move Event
Use this function to move on or several events
1. From the Master Track Edit use the dial to select the event
you want to move.
To select more than event push and hold the dial and rotate it.
Right Display
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button and select the “Move
Event” function.
The left display changes to:
Left Display
Working with the 16-Track Sequencer
96
3. Use the dial to specify the position to which the rst event
(in chronological order) of the selected group should be
shifted.
Parameter Explanation
To Bar
Specify the position where your new event should be insertedTo Beat
To Cpt
4. Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your settings and
move the new event.
The events are moved and the Master Track Edit pages is displayed.
Copy Event and Place Event
This functions allows you to copy one or several events and place
them (Paste) in a specic position.
1. From the Master Track Edit use the dial to select the event
you want to copy.
To select more than event push and hold the dial and rotate it.
Right Display
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button and select the “Copy
Event” function.
The events are copied and the Master Track Edit pages is displayed.
3. Press the [QUICK MENU] button and select the “Place
Event” function.
The left display changes to:
Left Display
Parameter Explanation
To Bar
Specify the position where the rst event you copied should
be inserted
To Beat
To Cpt
4. Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your settings and add
the new event.
The events are places and the Master Track Edit pages is displayed.
97
21. How to Edit Rhythm or SMF (Makeup Tools)
These functions allow you to actually edit the selected rhythm or
SMF song (Standard MIDI File) without paying too much attention
to the underlying parameters.
NOTE
The “Rhythm Makeup Tools” and “SMF Makeup Tools” functions
cannot be used to edit Standard MIDI Files that use the
XG format.
Using the Makeup Tools
1. Select the rhythm or SMF song you wish to modify on the
connected USB memory (See “Selecting a Song or Rhythm
on a USB Memory (p. 44).
You can also select an internal rhythm.
2. Press the [START/STOP] button to start playback of the
song or rhythm.
This allows you to listen to the song or rhythm before you start
editing it. Press the [START/STOP] button again to halt playback.
3. Press the [MAKEUP TOOLS] button.
If you selected a rhythm in step (1), the displays change to:
Left Display
Right Display
If you selected an SMF song in step (1), the display changes to:
Left Display
Right Display
The left display shows all instruments used by the selected rhythm
or SMF song.
The right display shows the “Palette page where you can set the
most fundamental parameters of the instruments selected in the
left display.
1. Select the left display if it is not selected.
2. Rotate the dial to select the instrument parameters you
want to change.
3. If you want, press the [MENU] button to jump to the
location where the instrument is used.
4. Push the dial to conrm the selection.
The right display is automatically selected.
Playback starts automatically from that point.
5. Use the dial to edit the parameter in the “Palette page.
NOTE
If you select a Drum Set in step (2) above, the parameter list
looks slightly dierent than for instruments that do not use a
Drum Set. “Drum Sets” are special Tones” that assign dierent
sounds to most keys/note numbers, allowing you (and the BK-9)
to play realistic drum and percussion parts.
6. If you are satised with your changes and wish to
preserve them, save your rhythm/ song to the USB
memory.
See “Saving Your New Rhythm or Song (SMF) Version in USB
Memory (p. 101)
NOTE
The changes you make using the procedure described above
can be “burned” into the rhythm/song le using the “Freeze
Data command (p. 101). Doing so will allow you to hear those
changes on any sequencer (software) you use. Changes you
don’t “freeze are nevertheless stored when you save the edited
rhythm/song le—but only the BK-9 can read them.
Parameters in the “Palette page” :
Icon legend
The following icons refer to parameters that are respectively
available for:
T Tones of regular instruments only
D Drum Sets only
How to Edit Rhythm or SMF (Makeup Tools)
98
Tone (T), Drum (D )
Allows you to select a dierent Tone within the active Tone family.
While selecting a Tone, you can press a TONE button to select a
dierent family.
Parameter Setting
Tone
or
Drum
The number of Tones depends on the selected family.
Mute (T)/Drum Mute (D )
Switches the selected instrument o. The corresponding part is
no longer played back. (This setting only applies to the selected
instrument and thus not necessarily to the entire track.)
NOTE
In the case of the drums, you can mute two instrument groups
(“Drum Mute” and “Perc Mute, see below) separately.
Parameter Setting
Mute
or
Drum Mute
O, On
Solo
Switches o all instruments except the selected instrument.
Parameter Setting
Solo O, On
Perc Mute (D )
Suppresses (or adds) the percussion sounds used by the drum part.
Parameter Setting
Perc Mute O, On
Volume
Adjusts the volume of the selected instrument. Negative values
decrease the current volume, positive values increase it. (This is a
relative setting that is added to, or subtracted from, the original
setting.)
Parameter Setting
Volume -127~0~+127
Reverb
Use this parameter to set the reverb send level. Negative values
decrease the current reverb send level, positive values increase it.
(This is a relative setting that is added to, or subtracted from, the
original setting.)
Parameter Setting
Reverb -127~0~+127
Chorus
Use this parameter to set the chorus send level. Negative values
decrease the current chorus send level, positive values increase it.
(This is a relative setting that is added to, or subtracted from, the
original setting.)
Parameter Setting
Chorus -127~0~+127
Panpot
Use this parameter to change the stereo placement of the selected
instrument. “0” means “no change, negative (–) values shift the
instrument towards the left and positive (+) values shift it towards
the right.
Parameter Setting
Panpot -127~0~+127
NOTE
In the case of Drum Sets, this setting applies to all drum/
percussion instruments. There is also a parameter that can be set
for specic drum instruments (p. 57).
Octave (T)
Use this parameter to transpose the selected instrument up or
down by up to 4 octaves.
Parameter Setting
Octave -4~0~+4
Velocity
This parameter allows you to modify the velocity range of the
instrument in question. “0” means that the recorded velocity values
are left untouched, negative values reduce all velocity values by
the same amount (leaving dierences between notes intact), while
positive settings increase all velocity values.
Parameter Setting
Velocity -127~0~+127
Cut O
This lter parameter allows you to make the selected sound darker
or brighter. Positive settings mean that more overtones are allowed
to pass, so that the sound becomes brighter. The further this value
is set in the negative direction, the fewer overtones will be allowed
to pass and the sound will become softer (darker).
Characteristics of a low-pass lter
Setting
Frequency
Cuto frequency
Parameter Setting
Cut O -127~0~+127
NOTE
For some sounds, positive (+) “Cut O settings will cause no
noticeable change because the pre-programmed “Cut O
parameter is already set to its maximum value.
Resonance
When the “Resonance” value is increased, the overtones in the area
of the cuto frequency will be emphasized, creating a sound with a
strong character.
Using the Makeup Tools
99
Parameter Setting
Resonance -127~0~+127
NOTE
For some sounds, negative (–) “Resonance” settings may
produce no noticeable change because the resonance is already
set to the minimum value.
The following parameters allow you to set the sound’s envelope”.
The envelope parameters aect both the volume (TVA) and the
lter (TVF). The cuto frequency will rise as the envelope rises and
will fall as the envelope falls.
Attack (T)
This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound. Negative values
speed up the attack, so that the sound becomes more aggressive.
Parameter Setting
Attack -127~0~+127
Decay (T)
This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound’s volume and
cuto frequency fall from the highest point of the attack down to
the sustain level.
Parameter Setting
Decay -127~0~+127
NOTE
Percussive sounds usually have a sustain level of “0”. Piano and
guitar sounds are in this category. Holding the keys for a long
time will have little eect on the duration of the notes you are
playing, even if you select a high value here.
Release (T)
This parameter adjusts the time over which the sound will decay
after the note is released until it is no longer heard. The cuto
frequency will also fall according to this setting.
Parameter Setting
Release -127~0~+127
NOTE
Some sounds already contain natural (sampled) vibrato whose
depth or speed cannot be changed.
Use the following three parameters if you think the instrument in
question has too much (or could use a little more) vibrato.
Vibrato Rate (T)
This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch modulation. Positive
(+) settings make the preset pitch modulation faster, and negative
(–) settings make it slower.
Parameter Setting
Vibrato Rate -127~0~+127
Vibrato Depth (T)
This parameter adjusts the intensity of the pitch modulation.
Positive (+) settings mean that the “wobble” becomes more
prominent, while negative (–) settings make it shallower.
Parameter Setting
Vibrato Depth -127~0~+127
Vibrato Delay (T)
This parameter adjusts the time required for the vibrato eect to
begin. Positive (+) settings increase the time before vibrato will
begin and negative settings (–) shorten the time.
Parameter Setting
Vibrato Delay -127~0~+127
Mfx
The BK-9 contains 3 multi-eects processors (“Mfx”), one reverb
processor and one chorus processor that can be used to process
Rhythms or Standard MIDI Files.
Select “O for instruments that don’t need to be processed by any
Mfx.
Parameter Setting
Mfx O, A, B, C
MEMO
If you select A, “B” or “C”, additional parameters can be edited
(see below).
Mfx Type
Allows you to select the desired Mfx type, i.e. the kind of eect
you need. Each Mfx (“A , “B” and C”) can be assigned to as many
instruments as you like. Be aware, however, that selecting a
dierent type will aect all instruments that use this Mfx processor.
For a list of the available Mfx types see p. 131.
NOTE
While the “Mfx” parameter is set to “O, you cannot select a
dierent type. In that case, the display will show the message
“---”.
Mfx Edit
If you also want to edit the parameters of the selected eect
type, push the dial to jump to the “Mfx Edit page. You can then
edit the available parameters.
Equalizer
Activate this setting if you want to change the timbre of the
selected instrument.
Parameter Setting
Equalizer O, On
Edit EQ
To edit the equalizer parameters, push the dial to jump to the “Edit
EQ” page. You can then edit the available parameters:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Equalizer O, On
Activate this setting if you want to
change the timbre of the selected
instrument.
This parameter duplicates the
“Equalizer” above and was added for
your convenience.
High Freq
1500 Hz, 2000 Hz,
3000 Hz, 4000 Hz,
6000 Hz, 8000 Hz,
12000 Hz
Allows you to set the cuto frequency of
the high band (this is a shelving lter).
How to Edit Rhythm or SMF (Makeup Tools)
100
Parameter Setting Explanation
High Gain –15~+15 dB
Use this parameter to set the level of
the selected “High frequency. Positive
values boost (increase the volume of)
that frequency, negative values cut
(attenuate) it.
Mid Freq 200~8000 Hz
Allows you to set the cuto frequency of
the middle band (this is a peaking lter).
Mid Q 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8
Use this parameter to specify the width
of the “Mid Freq” band that you want to
boost or cut. Smaller values mean that
neighboring frequencies above/ below
that value are also aected.
Mid Gain –15~+15 dB
Use this parameter to set the level of the
selected “Mid Freq.
Positive values boost (increase the
volume of) that frequency, negative
values cut (attenuate) it.
Low Freq
90 Hz, 150 Hz, 180
Hz, 300 Hz, 360
Hz, 600 Hz
Allows you to set the cuto frequency of
the low band (this is a shelving lter).
Low Gain –15~+15 dB
Use this parameter to set the level of the
selected “Low” frequency.
Drum Instrument (D )
If you want to edit the settings for specic instruments of the
selected Drum Set, push the dial to jump to the “Drum Instrument
page.
Left Display
Right Display
All instruments of the Drum Set being used are displayed.
1. Select the left display if it is not selected.
2. Rotate the dial to select the instrument parameters you
want to change.
3. If you want, press the [MENU] button to jump to the
location where the instrument is used.
4. Push the dial to conrm.
The right display is automatically selected.
5. Use the dial to edit the parameter in the “Drum
Instrument” page:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Instr.
All Drum Set
Instruments
Select the drum instrument you want
to edit.
Parameters for the selected instrument
Parameter Setting Explanation
Mute O, On
Suppress (or add) the selected
instrument.
Solo O, On
Switch o all instruments except the
selected instrument.
Volume -127~0~+127
Use this parameter to set the volume of
the selected drum instrument.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Reverb -127~0~+127
Use this parameter to set the reverb send
level of the selected drum instrument.
The eect itself can be changed on the
“Common page.
Chorus -127~0~+127
Use this parameter to set the chorus send
level of the selected drum instrument.
The eect itself can be changed on the
“Common page.
Panpot -127~0~+127
Use this parameter to set the stereo place-
ment of the selected drum instrument.
“0” means no change”, negative values
shift the instrument towards the left and
positive values shift it towards the right.
Velocity -127~0~+127
This parameter allows you to modify the
velocity range of the drum instrument
in question. “0” means that the recorded
values are left untouched, a negative
setting reduces all velocity values by the
same amount (leaving variations intact). A
positive setting shifts all velocity values in
a positive direction.
Pitch -127~0~+127
Use this parameter to tune the selected
drum instrument higher or lower. “0”
means that the pitch is left unchanged.
Instr
Equalizer
Global, Instr, O
Global: The drum instrument uses the
equalizer settings of the Drum Set it
belongs to.
Instr: The drum instrument uses its own
equalizer settings (see below).
O: The drum instrument is not
equalized.
Edit EQ (Push the dial)
Provides access to the EQ parameters of
the currently selected drum instrument
(if “Instr. Equalizer” is set to “Int”). See
“Edit EQ” (p. 99) for a description of the
available parameters.
Undo
Changes
(Push the dial)
This function allows you to cancel the
“Drum Instrument” settings of the
currently selected instrument and to
revert to the previously saved version.
Undo Changes
This function allows you to cancel the settings of the currently
selected instrument and to revert to the previously saved version.
To commit your changes (Freeze Data)
101
Common
The “Common parameters on this page apply to the entire song or
rhythm.
1. Use the dial to edit the parameter in the “Common page.
Left Display
The following parameters are available:
Parameter Setting Meaning
Reverb Type
Original
Original This setting means that the song
uses its own (programmed) reverb settings.
Room1,
Room2,
Room3
These types simulate the reverb
characteristics of a room. The higher the
number (1, 2 or 3), the bigger the “room
becomes.
Hall1,
Hall2
These types simulate the reverb of a small
(1) or large (2) concert hall and thus sound
much “bigger than the Room types above.
Plate
This algorithm simulates the acoustics of a
concert hall.
Delay
A delay eect (no reverb). Works a lot like
an echo eect and thus repeats the sounds
Pan Delay
This is a stereo version of the above delay
eect. It creates repetitions that alternate
between the left and right channels.
Reverb Level -127~0~+127
These parameters allow you to modify the
output level of the Reverb processor.
Chorus Type
Original
The song uses its own (programmed)
chorus settings.
Chorus
1~4
These are conventional chorus eects that
add spaciousness and depth to the sound.
Fbk Chorus
This is a chorus with a anger-like eect
and a soft sound.
Flanger
This is an eect that sounds somewhat like
a jet airplane taking o and landing
ShortDly
This is a full-edged delay eect that can
be used instead of a chorus or anger. As
you will see, there are a lot of parameters
you can program
ShortDlyFb This is a short delay with many repeats
Chorus Level -127~0~+127
These parameters allow you to modify the
output level of the Chorus processor.
Rhythm
Volume/Song
Volume
-127~0~+127
This parameter allows you to set the overall
volume of the selected rhythm or song if
you think it is too loud/soft.
Rhythm
Tempo/Song
Tempo
20~250
Allows you to change the rhythm’s or
song’s tempo
Key -12~+12
This parameter allows you to transpose
all song parts (except the drums) up to
12 semitones (1 octave) up or down. This
value is written to the song data and used
every time you play back this song.
NOTE
This parameter is not available for
rhythms.
Parameter Setting Meaning
Undo
Changes
Select this entry to cancel all “Rhythm/SMF
Makeup Tools” settings you have made and
to revert to the previously saved version.
To commit your changes (Freeze
Data)
Before saving your “made-up” rhythm/song to a USB memory, you
can (but you don’t have to) commit your changes, thereby turning
them into “regular” rhythm or song data.
This may come in handy if you also want to play back your new
rhythm/song version on another backing instrument, sequencer or
your computer. This operation is unnecessary for les you only want
to use with the BK-9 or one of the Roland backing models.
1. Press the [QUICK MENU] button.
Left Display
2. Use the dial to select “Freeze Data“ and push it.
A message conrms that the data have been committed.
Saving Your New Rhythm or Song
(SMF) Version in USB Memory
MEMO
You will need an optional USB memory to save your new rhythm
or song (SMF).
NOTE
Use USB memory sold by Roland (M-UF-series). We cannot
guarantee operation if any other USB memory is used.
1. If you are happy with your changes and wish to preserve
them, press the [QUICK MENU] button.
2. Use the dial to select the “Save parameter and push it.
How to Edit Rhythm or SMF (Makeup Tools)
102
The right display shows the contents of the USB memory.
NOTE
Even rhythms or songs for which you did not perform the
“Freeze Data command need to be saved using this procedure if
you want to keep the changes.
3. Use the dial to select a dierent location if you do not
want to overwrite the original version.
4. Press the [WRITE] button (it ashes).
The BK-9 automatically adopts the name of the selected rhythm or song.
If you want to save the new version under that name (and overwrite the
previous version), skip to step (6) below.
5. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
6. Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your desire to save
the rhythm or song.
If the USB memory already contains a rhythm or song le of that
name, you will be asked whether you want to overwrite it:
Right Display
In this case, select YES” using the dial and push it to replace the old
le with the new one (the old le will be lost).
Otherwise, select “NO” and push the dial to return to the “Save
page and enter a dierent name.
103
22. Rhythm Composer
The BK-9 allows you to program your own rhythms.
Before explaining the details, there are a few concepts you need to
familiarize yourself with.
What are Rhythms?
Patterns (Divisions)
Rhythms are short sequences, or patterns (of four or eight
measures) you can select in real-time. Pattern-based
accompaniments usually consist of the following elements:
The basic groove, i.e. the rhythm that is the backbone of the
song.
Several alternatives for the basic groove that keep the
accompaniment interesting and suggest some kind of
evolution” or “variation.
Fill-Ins to announce the beginning of new parts.
An introduction and a closing section (ending).
Programming four to eight patterns for a three-minute song is
usually enough. Just use them in the right order to make them
suitable for your song.
The BK-9 allows you to program 54 dierent patterns per rhythm,
some of which can be selected via dedicated buttons (VARIATION
[1]~[4], etc.). Some Patterns are selected on the basis of the chords
you play in the chord recognition area of the keyboard (major,
minor, seventh).
Tracks
Unlike a drum machine, a BK-9 rhythm not only contains the rhythm
part (drums & percussion) but also a melodic accompaniment, such
as piano, guitar, bass and strings lines. That is why the rhythms work
with tracks – eight to be precise.
The reason why the AccDrums part is assigned to the rst track
and the ABass part to the second is that most programmers and
recording artists start by laying down the rhythm section of a song.
There are exceptions to this rule, however, so feel free to start with
any other part if that is easier for the rhythm you are programming.
NOTE
Though there are six (melodic) ACC tracks, most rhythms
only contain two or three melodic accompaniment lines. In
most cases, less means more, i.e. do not program six melodic
accompaniments just because theBK-9 provides that facility. If
you listen very carefully to a CD, you will discover that it is not
the number of instruments you use that makes a song sound
“big” but rather the right notes at the right time.
Looped vs. one-shot patterns
The BK-9 uses two kinds of patterns: looped divisions and one-shot
divisions.
Looped divisions: Looped divisions are accompaniments that are
repeated until you select another division or press [START/STOP] / [
*/, ]to stop Arranger playback.
The BK-9 provides four programmable looped divisions (VARIATION
[1]~[4]).
Looped divisions do not select other divisions when they are
nished (because they never end): they keep playing until you
select another division by hand (or by foot).
One-shot divisions: One-shot patterns (or “Divisions”) are only
played once and then select a looped division or stop the Arranger.
The BK-9 uses the following one-shot divisions: INTRO [1]~[4], FILL
UP [1]~[3], FILL DOWN [1]~[3] and ENDING [1]~[4].
The division type also determines how the respective tracks are
played back. Any track of a looped pattern that is shorter than
another track is repeated until the longest track is nished. Then, a
new cycle begins.
Heres how you can take advantage of that: if the drums play the
same notes during four measures, while the rhythm guitar or piano
needs four measures to complete a cycle, recording only one drum
measure is enough, because it is automatically repeated until the
longest track is nished.
Several drum tracks are possible
The Rhythm Composer allows you to assign a Drum Set to any
Accomp track, thereby turning it into an additional drum track.
Starting to Make your Own Rhythm
The rst thing we need to do is clear the BK-9’s rhythm memory,
because it is not empty when you select the Rhythm Composer.
1. Press the [MENU] button, select “Rhythm Composer”, then
push the dial.
The displays change to:
Left Display
Right Display
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button (its indicator ashes).
The left display changes to:
Left Display
3. “Initialize Rhythm is already selected, so push the dial.
The display changes to:
Left Display
The settings shown on this display page are suggested as defaults
for every new rhythm you program.
Feel free to change them depending on the kind of accompaniment
Rhythm Composer
104
you want to prepare:
4. Use the dial to edit the available parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Rec Track
ADrum, ABass,
Acc1, Acc2,
Acc3, Acc4,
Acc5, Acc6
This parameter allows you to select
the track whose settings you want to
change.
Inst
(Tone assigned to
the track)
This is where you select a sound (or
Drum Set) for the track marked for
recording (“Rec Track”).
Tempo 20~250
You can already set the tempo here or
leave that for later.
Time
Signature
1~32/16, 1~32/8,
1~32/4, 1~32/2
This value needs to be set when you
initialize the Rhythm memory (i.e. now).
All Divisions and Modes use this time
signature.
You could, however, edit the patterns
at a later stage (see p. 116) and specify
that VARIATION [1] should use “4/4”,
MAIN [2] “6/ 8”, etc.
Expression 0~127 Temporary volume changes (CC11).
Reverb 0~127
Reverb Send (CC91), i.e. how strongly the
selected track should be processed by
the reverb eect.
Chorus 0~127
Chorus Send (CC93), i.e. how strongly
the selected track should be processed
by the chorus eect.
Panpot 0~127
The track’s stereo placement (00[L]~64~
127[R]).
5. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings.
The display changes to:
Left Display
6. Use the dial to select “YES” and push it.
The display returns to the “Rhythm Composer” page, which only
contains the sound assignments you have just made.
Select “NO if you don’t want to initialize the rhythm area.
The right display changes to indicate that all track are empty:
Right Display
Getting ready for the rst track
1. On the “Rhythm Composer” left page, use the dial to
select the “Division” you want to record (“Intro, “Main”,
“Fill” or “Ending”).
Left Display
2. Press the [SONG REC] button.
The display changes to:
Left Display
3. If necessary, use the dial and push it to edit the available
parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Rec Track
ADrum, ABass,
Acc1, Acc2,
Acc3, Acc4,
Acc5, Acc6
This parameter allows you to select the
track whose settings you want to record.
Inst
(Tone assigned to
the track)
This is where you select a sound (or
Drum Set) for the track marked for
recording (“Rec Track”).
Starting to Make your Own Rhythm
105
Parameter Setting Explanation
Key (Not for
ADrum)
C, C#, D, Eb, E,
F, F#, G, Ab, A,
Bb, B
If you want to use the accompaniment in
a musically meaningful way, you need to
tell the BK-9 what key you are recording
in. This is to ensure that the chords you
play during everyday use of your rhythm
with the BK-9’s Arranger lead to the
correct real-time transpositions of the
selected Division.
The BK-9 allows you to record rhythms in
any key. But do set the KEY parameter to
the right value before recording.
The key of AccDrums parts cannot be set
(because that doesn’t make sense).
Octave –4~+4
This parameter allows you to transpose
the keyboard in octave steps, which may
be convenient for extremely high or low
notes – or for using the special “noises
of certain sounds.
Mode
Major, Minor,
7th, M=m,
M=7, m=7,
M=m=7
This parameter allows you to specify
whether you are about to record the
accompaniment for major, minor or
seventh chords. If you listen to the
rhythm prepared by Roland, you will
notice that there are slight dierences
in the looped patterns – and sometimes
striking dierences for Intros and
Endings, with completely dierent
phrases. Such variations can be prepared
using the “Mode” parameter.
M (Major)
m (Minor)
7 (7th)
Division
Intro, Main, Fill,
Ending
Select the pattern you want to
create. This parameter is linked to the
division you select on the main “Rhythm
Composer” page.
Tempo 20~250
The tempo value you set here is
recorded and regarded as preset tempo.
You can change it at any stage in Rhythm
Composer mode, so start by selecting
a tempo that allows you to record the
music the way you want it to sound.
Input
Quantize
O, 1/4, 1/8, 1/8T,
1/16, 1/16T, 1/32,
1/32T, 1/64
This corrects minor timing problems.
It shifts the notes whose timing is not
exactly right to the nearest correct” unit.
Always select a resolution value that is
ne enough to accept all note values
you play. If the shortest notes of your
accompaniment are 1/16th-note triplets,
set the value to “1/16T.
The preset value, “1/16”, is OK for most
situations.
If you do not want to quantize your
playing while recording, set this
parameter to “O.
You can also quantize the track after
recording it (p. 109).
Count In
O, 1Meas,
2Meas, Wait Note
Species how long the count-in should
be before recording starts.
O: No count-in.
Recording starts as soon as you press
the [START/STOP] button (while [SONG
REC] ashes).
1Meas: Recording starts after a 1-bar
count-in.
2Meas: Recording starts after a 2-bar
count-in.
Wait Note: Recording starts as soon as
you play a note on the keyboard.
(There will be no count-in.)
Parameter Setting Explanation
Measure
Length
O, 1~136
Species the number of bars the pattern
should contain. The setting range is
1~136 (or more, depending on the time
signature) and “O. Select O if you
haven’t decided how long the pattern
should be. In that case, the length is set
when you stop recording.
It is perfectly possible to specify a
dierent length value for each track and
Division.
Rec Mode Replace, Mix
Replace: Everything you record
replaces the data of the selected track.
This mode is automatically selected
when you activate the record function
for a track that does not yet contain
data. If you select a track that already
contains data, this parameter is set
to “Mix but could be changed to
“Replace” if you wanted to overwrite
the previous version.
Mix: The data you record are added to
the existing data of the selected track.
More information about the “Rec Track“.
The AccDrums track can only use Drum Sets (only the TONE
[DRUMS] button is available for this track). On the other hand, you
can use a second (or third) drum track by assigning the value 111
to control change CC00 of the Acc1~Acc6 track(s). See “Editing
individual rhythm events (Micro Edit)” on p. 116. You can, however,
turn any Acc1~6 track into an additional drum track when you start
recording.
The AccBass track, however, can only be used for bass parts.
More information about the “Mode“.
You can use one clone function that allows you to record one part
and copy it to up to three Modes each. The “=” sign means that
more than one pattern will be recorded.
More information about the “Measure Length“.
Every rhythm pattern must have a set length. Setting the “Measure
Length value now will help you avoid a lot of confusion once you
start recording.
If you specied the Measure Length before recording, the Rhythm
Composer jumps back to the beginning of the pattern after the set
number of measures. The second time around you could add the
snare drum, the third time the HiHat, and so on.
When recording another part (ABass~Acc6), do everything you
would do during a live performance: add modulation, Pitch Bend
and to use an optional hold pedal connected to the HOLD PEDAL
jack.
If you set the “Measure Length to “O the BK-9 tends to add blank
bars at the end of a track, which is usually due to the fact that you
stopped recording a little late (i.e. after the last bar you played). This
means that you often “record” 5 measures instead of 4, for example:
If you press [START/STOP] after bar 4…
…your rhythm looks like this (5 bars):
Furthermore, in Rhythm Composer mode, all patterns are looped
and played back until you press the [START/STOP] button. A wrong
Rhythm Composer
106
number of measures (5 rather than 4, for example) is very likely to
put you o, so do take the time to set the pattern length before you
start recording.
Recording a rhythm pattern
1. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ] button.
Left Display
Right Display
Depending on the count-in setting, the metronome now counts
down, after which recording starts.
NOTE
If you need a metronome during your performance, press the
[METRONOME] button while the main Rhythm Composer page
is displayed. If you also need the metronome while listening to
what you have recorded, select another metronome mode. See
“Metronome Settings” (p. 55).
NOTE
You can also start recording using an optional pedal switch
connected to the PEDAL CONTROL jack or an optional FC-7
connected to the FC-7 PEDAL jack. See “Pedal Switch and Pedal
Control” (p. 144) and “Pedal Controller FC-7” (p. 146)
2. If necessary, use the rst four sliders on the to left to
change Expression, Reverb. Chorus and Panpot before
and during the recording.
Using the Panpot, you can create interesting panning eects by
slowly shifting the selected track from left to right (or vice versa) in
the course of a pattern. Continuous changes mean that you have to
keep recording until the end of the pattern.
3. Play on the keyboard your drum sequence.
4. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ] again to stop recording.
The right display changes to indicate with a bar that the ADRUM”
track was recorded:
Right Display
Auditioning your rhythm and adding more
tracks
1. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ] button to listen to your
track.
The main Rhythm Composer page contains two parameters that
allow you to select the pattern you want to audition. Heres how to
select it:
Left Display
2. Rotate the dial to select the “MODE” parameter, then push
the dial.
3. Rotate the dial to select “Major”, “Minor or “7th”.
Only one mode can be selected for playback.
4. Rotate the dial to select the “DIVISION” eld, then push
the dial.
5. Rotate the dial to select one of the Divisions (Intro 1~4,
Main 1~4, Fill Dwn 1~3, Fill Up 1~3, End 1~4).
Only one Division can be selected for playback.
If you like your drum part, continue with “Saving your rhythm.
If not, record a new version, see “Getting ready for the rst track”
(p. 104). In that case, set the “Rec Mode” (p. 105) parameter
according to what you want to do:
• “Replace”= replace the previous recording with new data
• “Mix”= add notes you forgot to record the rst time
Saving your Rhythm
Make it a habit to save your rhythms as frequently as possible. After
all, if someone decided to switch o your BK-9 now, you would lose
everything you have programmed so far.
1. Press the [QUICK MENU] button (its indicator ashes).
The display changes to:
Starting to Make your Own Rhythm
107
Left Display
2. Rotate the dial to select “Save and push the dial.
The display now shows the contents of the connected USB memory.
NOTE
Your own rhythms can only be saved to a USB memory. If you
forgot to connect one, the display now shows the message “USB
Device not inserted”.
3. Press the [WRITE] button
If you initialized the RAM memory before recording your rst part,
the BK-9 suggests the name “User_Rhythm”. Otherwise, it suggests
the name of the rhythm you have been editing.
Right Display
.
4. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
desired name. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
5. Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your desire to save
the rhythm.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
main Rhythm Composer page.
If the USB memory already contains a rhythm le of the specied
name, you will be asked whether you want to overwrite it:
Right Display
In this case, select YES” using the dial to replace the old le with the
new one (the old le will be lost). Otherwise, select “NO”.
Recording Other Tracks and Divisions
You can now record the second track – probably the bass. If youd
like to do the guided tour again, return to page 104. Do not forget
to set the “key for the bass part.
Once the rst Division is nished, you can record other Divisions.
Use the clone functions (“=”) to record several patterns in one go.
Do not forget to record the Fills, Intros and Endings to complete
your rhythms. There are two groups of three lls:
• “Up 1~3 lls are used when you switch on the [AUTO FILL]
button and then press a VARIATION button of a higher number
(transition from [1] to [2], for example).
• “Dwn 1~3 lls are used when you switch on the [AUTO FILL]
button and then press a VARIATION button of a lower number.
• “Intros and “Ends are usually used at the beginning of a song
and end patterns provide professional closing sections.
NOTE
The ABass track is monophonic. You can only record single note
patterns.
Muting tracks while recording others
After programming a few tracks, you may nd that certain parts
tend to confuse you. That is why the BK-9 allows you to mute tracks
that you do not want to hear during recording.
1. On the left Rhythm Composer page, use the dial to select
a track.
Left Display
The eld below the TRACK” parameter shows the name of the
Tone or Drum Set assigned to the selected track (“New Rock in our
example).
2. Press the [TRACK MUTE] button.
An “m appears next to the track you have just muted.
Rhythm Composer
108
Right Display
3. Press the [TRACK MUTE] button again to switch o the
mute function (the “m disappears).
NOTE
This mute setting only applies to the Rhythm Composer page.
During normal Arranger playback, all tracks that contain data
are played back. Use the “Erase” function to remove parts that
should not appear in your accompaniments (see p. 109).
Solo
4. If you need to listen to a track in isolation, press and hold
the [TRACK MUTE] button and start playback.
This mutes all other tracks, while the selected track is agged with
an “s”.
Right Display
5. Press the [TRACK MUTE] button again to switch o the
function of the Solo function.
NOTE
If the track you solo was muted, it will be soloed like any other
track. After switching o the Solo function, the track in question
is once again muted.
Try the Rhythm Outside of the Composer
Once you have created your own rhythm, you may want to try it
using the “normal” playback.
NOTE
Save your rhythm before trying it out of the composer. See
“Saving your Rhythm (p. 106).
1. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the Rhythm Composer
environment.
If you have not saved the Rhythm the following message
appears:
Left Display
Select YES” to save your Rhythm. See “Saving your Rhythm” (p.
106).
2. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ] button to listen to your
Rhythm.
3. Play chords on the left part of the keyboard.
If the rhythm stops unexpectedly during playback, try dierent
chords. Chances are that you only programmed the major pattern,
so that the playback selects an empty pattern when you play a
minor or seventh chord. Remember to set the Mode parameter to
“M=m=7” until you have come to grips with the possibilities of the
BK-9’s Arranger. That way, those three patterns will sound alike, but
at least you are sure that the Arranger does not stop when you play
a minor or seventh chord.
4. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ] button again to stop the
playback.
If your own Rhythm is not satisfactory, you can modify it pressing
[MENU] “Rhythm Composer”.
Rhythm Track Edit functions
The Track Edit” level of the Rhythm Composer provides 12
functions:
Function Page
Quantize 109
Erase 109
Delete 110
Copy 111
Insert 112
Key 112
Change Velo 113
Change GateTime 113
Global Change 114
Shift Clock 114
Track Length 115
Time Signature 116
There is also a “Micro Edit environment that allows you to add,
delete or change individual events. See page 116 for details.
1. In the Rhythm Composer environment press the [QUICK
MENU] button (its indicator ashes).
The display changes to:
Rhythm Track Edit functions
109
Left Display
2. Rotate the dial to select Track Edit”, then push the dial.
The display changes to:
Left Display
Right Display
3. Rotate the dial and push it to select the available
functions on the left display.
Quantize
Use this function if you chose not to quantize your music during
recording and now realize that the timing is not quite what you
expected it to be. If only certain notes in a given time range need
to be quantized, you should narrow down the edit range using the
“From”/“To” parameters.
Right Display
1. Use the dial to edit the following parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track
ADrums~Acc6,
ALL
Allows you to select the track you
wish to edit. You can also select ALL
here, in which case the operation
applies to all tracks.
Mode Major, Minor, 7th
Allows you to select the Mode to be
edited.
Division
Intro 1~4, Main
1~4, Fill Dwn 1~3,
Fill Up 1~3, End
1~4
Use this parameter to select the
Division you want to edit.
From Bar
1~[last measure
of the track or
pattern]
Refers to the rst measure to be
edited. By default, the “From value is
set to the beginning of the selected
track(s).
Parameter Setting Explanation
From Beat
1~[number of
beats per bar]
Species the beat position. The
number of selectable beats depends
on the selected time signature.
From CPT 0~119
Refers to the starting CPT position.
“CPT” is short for “Clock Pulse Time,
the smallest unit used by the BK-9.
(There are 120 CPTs to every beat of
a 4/4 bar.) Change this setting only if
your edit operation should start after
the selected beat.
To Bar
1~[last measure
of the track or
pattern]
This is where you specify the last
measure to be edited. By default, the
To” position is set to the last event of
the selected track (or the last event
of the longest track when you select
All”).
To Beat
1~[number of
beats per bar]
Species the beat position.
The number of selectable beats
depends on the selected time
signature.
To CPT 0~119
Refers to the last clock that should be
aected by the edit operation.
Change this setting only if your edit
operation should not end exactly on
the selected beat.
Resolution
1/4, 1/8, 1/8T,
1/16, 1/16T, 1/32,
1/32T, 1/64
This parameter sets the resolution
of the Quantize function. Be sure to
always select the value of the shortest
note you recorded.
Otherwise, your part no
longer sounds the way you played it,
because shorter notes are shifted to
the wrong positions.
Strength 0%~100%
Use this parameter to specify how
precise the timing correction should
be. “0%” means that the selected
“Resolution” value is not applied (“0%
correction”), while “100%” means
that all notes are shifted to the
mathematically correct positions.
From Note 0 C-~127 G9
This parameter allows you to set the
note (or lower limit of the note range)
to be modied within the specied
“From/To time range.
To Note 0 C-~127 G9
This parameter allows you to set the
upper limit of the note range to be
modied within the specied “From/
To” time range.
2. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Erase
“Erase” allows you to selectively delete data either within a specied
range of measures, beats or clocks or from the entire track(s). When
“Data Type is set to All”, “Erase” substitutes the required number of
rests for the data you delete, so that you end up with the equivalent
number of blank measures. If you also want to eliminate the
measures themselves, use “Delete” (see below).
Rhythm Composer
110
Right Display
1. Use the dial to edit the following parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track
ADrums~Acc6,
ALL
Allows you to select the track you
wish to edit. You can also select ALL
here, in which case the operation
applies to all tracks.
Mode Major, Minor, 7th
Allows you to select the Mode to be
edited.
Division
Intro 1~4, Main
1~4, Fill Dwn 1~3,
Fill Up 1~3, End
1~4
Use this parameter to select the
Division you want to edit.
From Bar
1~[last measure
of the track or
pattern]
Refers to the rst measure to be
edited. By default, the “From value is
set to the beginning of the selected
track(s).
From Beat
1~[number of
beats per bar]
Species the beat position. The
number of selectable beats depends
on the selected time signature.
From CPT 0~119
Refers to the starting CPT position.
“CPT” is short for “Clock Pulse Time,
the smallest unit used by the BK-9.
(There are 120 CPTs to every beat of
a 4/4 bar.) Change this setting only if
your edit operation should start after
the selected beat.
To Bar
1~[last measure
of the track or
pattern]
This is where you specify the last
measure to be edited. By default, the
To” position is set to the last event of
the selected track (or the last event
of the longest track when you select
All”).
To Beat
1~[number of
beats per bar]
Species the beat position.
The number of selectable beats
depends on the selected time
signature.
To CPT 0~119
Refers to the last clock that should be
aected by the edit operation.
Change this setting only if your edit
operation should not end exactly on
the selected beat.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Data Type
(select the
data to be
edited)
ALL All parameters listed below.
Note Only note messages.
Modulation
CC01 messages usually used for add-
ing vibrato (i.e. use of the BENDER/
MODULATION lever).
PanPot
CC10 messages that specify the
stereo position.
Expression
CC11 messages that are used for
temporary volume changes.
Reverb
Reverb Send messages (how strongly
the part should be processed by the
reverb eect).
Chorus
Chorus Send messages (how strongly
the part should be processed by the
chorus eect).
Program Change
Program change messages, used to
select sounds or Drum Sets.
NOTE
By deleting program change
messages you also dispose of the
related CC00 and CC32 (bank select)
messages.
P.Bender:
Pitch Bend data (i.e. use of the
BENDER/MODULATION lever).
From Note 0 C-~127 G9
This parameter is only displayed
if “Data Type (see above) is set to
“Note”. It allows you to set the note
(or lower limit of the note range)
to be modied within the specied
“From/To time range.
To Note 0 C-~127 G9
This parameter allows you to set
the upper limit of the note range
to be modied within the specied
“From/To time range.
2. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Delete
Unlike the “Erase” function, “Delete not only erases the data but
also the measures, beats and/or CPT units, so that all data that lie
behind the To” position are shifted towards the beginning of the
track(s). You cannot choose the data type to be erased.
Right Display
1. Use the dial to edit the following parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track
ADrums~Acc6,
ALL
Allows you to select the track you wish to
edit. You can also select ALL here, in which
case the operation applies to all tracks.
Mode Major, Minor, 7th Allows you to select the Mode to be edited.
Rhythm Track Edit functions
111
Parameter Setting Explanation
Division
Intro 1~4, Main
1~4, Fill Dwn 1~3,
Fill Up 1~3, End
1~4
Use this parameter to select the Division you
want to edit.
From Bar
For the settings and explanation see page 109.
From Beat
From CPT
To Bar
To Beat
To CPT
2. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Copy
This function can be used to copy individual tracks, Modes and
Divisions to replace existing parts while keeping the remaining
parts of the rhythm already in the memory.
Right Display
1. Set “Location to “Source.
The following parameters are displayed:
Param-
eter
Setting Explanation
Location Source, Destination
Allows you to select the rhythm whose
tracks you wish to copy (“Source”) to another
rhythm (“Destination”).
Track ADrums~Acc6, ALL
Allows you to select the track you wish to
copy. Select ALL to edit all tracks.
Mode Major, Minor, 7th, ALL Allows you to select the Mode to be copied.
Division
Intro 1~4, IntroALL,
Main 1~4, MainALL,
Fill Dwn 1~3, Fill
DwnALL,
Fill Up 1~3, Fill
UpALL,
End 1~4, EndALL
Use this parameter to select the Division you
want to copy.
From Bar
For the settings and explanation see page 109.
From Beat
From CPT
To Bar
To Beat
To CPT
The “Copy page now displays a “USB MEMORY” eld to indicate that
you can select a rhythm on the connected USB memory.
Right Display
2. Select a rhythm.
• Selecting a factory rhythm: Use the RHYTHM FAMILY buttons
and the displayed parameters to select the desired rhythm. Skip
to step (3) below.
• Selecting an external’ rhythm: You can also work with a rhythm
on a USB memory:
a. Press the [USB MEMORY] button to jump to the “USB
Memory” page.
b. Select the rhythm that contains the track(s) you
want to copy.
NOTE
When you import a rhythm, the “Location parameter is set to
“Destination. To continue as explained below, you need to
select the “Source” setting.
3. Rotate the dial to select the Track parameter, then push
the dial.
4. Rotate the dial to select the track to be copied.
You can also select ALL to copy all tracks of a given Mode/Division.
In that case, “Destination–Track” (see below) is also set to ALL.
5. Repeat this operation with the “Mode” and “Division”
parameters to select the Mode (Major, Minor, 7th, ALL)
and Division (Int 1~4, Int ALL, Main 1~4, Main ALL, FDw
1~3, FDw ALL, FUp 1~3, FUp ALL, End 1~4, End ALL).
6. Press the [KEY] button to listen to the Source or
Destination pattern you are about to copy .
NOTE
This audition function is not available when you select ALL for
the “Mode” or “Division” eld.
7. Use the “From and “To” parameters (3 each) to specify the
beginning and end of the excerpt you want to copy.
By default, the “From parameters are set to “Bar 1, Beat 1, CPT 0”,
while the To” values are set to include the entire track.
8. Set “Location to “Destination”. The following parameters
Rhythm Composer
112
are displayed:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Location Source, Destination
Allows you to select the rhythm whose
tracks you wish to copy (“Source”) to another
rhythm (“Destination”).
Track ADrums~Acc6, ALL
Allows you to select the track you wish to
copy. Select ALL to edit all tracks.
Mode Major, Minor, 7th, ALL Allows you to select the Mode to be copied.
Division
Intro 1~4, Main 1~4,
Fill Dwn 1~3, Fill Up
1~3, End 1~4
Use this parameter to select the Division.
Into Bar The” Into” position indicates where the beginning of the source
excerpt will be after the copy operation. To copy the source data to
the beginning of the destination track, select BAR= “1”, BEAT= “1”
and CPT= “0”.
Into Beat
Into CPT
Copy Mode
Replace
The data in the selected range of the source
track overwrite the destination track.
Mix
The data in the selected range of the
source track are added to the data on the
destination track.
Copy Times 1~999
Allows you to to specify the number of
copies to be made. Select “1” to copy the
excerpt only once.
9. Set “Copy Mode to “Replace” or “Mix.
In either case, the length of the destination track may change to
include all data of the source track.
10. Use the dial to set Track” to the track you wish to copy
the data to.
NOTE
AccDrums data can also be copied to other tracks (preferably
Acc1~Acc6). You can only copy ABass data to other ABass tracks.
If you selected ALL for “Source – Track”, this Track” parameter is
also set to ALL.
11. Repeat this operation with the “Mode” (Major, Minor, 7th,
ALL) and “Division” parameters (Intro 1~4, Main 1~4, Fill
Dwn 1~3, Fill Up 1~3, End 1~4, ALL).
NOTE
If you selected ALL for “Source – Mode” or “Source – Division”,
this “Mode” or “Division” parameter is also set to ALL.
12. Use the dial to select Copy Time” and specify the number
of copies you need.
Select “1” to copy the excerpt only once.
13. Use the dial to specify the target position using the three
“Into parameters.
14. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Insert
“Insert” allows you to insert space and shift data that lie behind
the “From position further towards the end of the track (this is the
exact opposite of “Delete”). The empty measures you create can be
“lled” using the “Copy” function or by recording new phrases in
that area.
NOTE
This function provides no To pointer. Instead, you need to
specify the length of the insert using the “For” values.
Right Display
1. Use the dial to edit the following parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track
ADrums~Acc6,
ALL
Allows you to select the track you wish to
edit. You can also select ALL here, in which
case the operation applies to all tracks.
Mode Major, Minor, 7th Allows you to select the Mode to be edited.
Division
Intro 1~4, Main
1~4, Fill Dwn 1~3,
Fill Up 1~3, End
1~4
Use this parameter to select the Division you
want to edit.
From Bar
For the settings and explanation see page 109.From Beat
From CPT
For Bar
Species how many bars, beats and CPTs are to be insertedFor Beat
For CPT
2. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Key (transposition)
This function allows you to transpose the notes of the selected track
(non-note data obviously cannot be transposed).
Right Display
1. Use the dial to edit the following parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track ADrums~Acc6, ALL
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
Mode Major, Minor, 7th,
Allows you to select the Mode to be
edited.
Division
Intro 1~4, Main 1~4,
Fill Dwn 1~3, Fill Up
1~3, End 1~4
Use this parameter to select the
Division you want to edit.
Rhythm Track Edit functions
113
Parameter Setting Explanation
From Bar
For the settings and explanation see page 109.
From Beat
From CPT
To Bar
To Beat
To CPT
Value –127~127
This is where you set the transposition
interval in semi-tone steps. Select “2”,
for example, to transpose a pattern in
“C” to “D”.
Be careful when applying “Key to the
AccDrums track. Transposing all notes
of this track leads to dramatic changes.
From Note 0 C-~127 G9
This parameter allows you to set the
note (or lower limit of the note range)
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
To Note 0 C-~127 G9
This parameter allows you to set the
upper limit of the note range to be
modied within the specied “From”/
To” time range.
2. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Change Velocity
The “Change Velo function allows you to modify the dynamics
(called “velocity”) of a track or excerpt. Only note events can be
changed.
Right Display
1. Use the dial to edit the following parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track ADrums~Acc6, ALL
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
Mode Major, Minor, 7th,
Allows you to select the Mode to be
edited.
Division
Intro 1~4, Main 1~4,
Fill Dwn 1~3, Fill Up
1~3, End 1~4
Use this parameter to select the
Division you want to edit.
From Bar
For the settings and explanation see page 109.
From Beat
From CPT
To Bar
To Beat
To CPT
Parameter Setting Explanation
Bias* –99~99)
Allows you to specify by how much the
velocity values should change. Select a
positive value to increase the velocity
(the value is added to the velocity value
of the aected notes) or a negative
value to decrease the velocity values
(that value is subtracted).
Select “0” if you prefer to work with the
“Magnify” parameter (see below).
Magnify** 0~200%
This parameter works like a “Com-
pander” eect (a dynamics processor
that simultaneously acts as compressor
and expander), although it processes
MIDI data: by selecting a value above
“100%” you increase the dierences
between high and low velocity values
in the selected range. Values below “64”
are lowered, while values above “64”
are increased. The result is therefore
that the dierence between pianissimo
and fortissimo becomes far more
pronounced.
From Note/
To Note
0 C-~127 G9
“From Note” refers to the lower limit of
the note range you want to change. To
Note” represents the upper limit.
[*] Even the highest positive or negative value doesn’t allow you
to go beyond “1” or “127”. There is a reason why “0” is impossible:
that value is used to indicate the end of a note (note-o). “127”, on
the other hand, is the highest velocity value the MIDI standard can
muster. Adding a high positive velocity value may thus lead to all
notes being played at “127”.
[**] “Magnify values below “100%” have the opposite eect: they
push all velocity towards the imaginary center of “64”, thus reducing
dierences in playing dynamics.
2. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Change Gate Time
This function allows you to modify the duration of the notes in
the selected time (“From”/“To”) and note (“From Note”/“To Note”)
ranges. We recommend you only use this function to shorten notes
that suddenly seem too long when you assign a dierent sound
to the track in question. You cannot view the duration of the notes
here, which makes editing the data en bloc” a little bit hazardous.
See “Editing Individual Rhythm Events (Micro Edit)” (p. 116) for
how to change the duration of individual notes.
After selecting a sound with a slow release (i.e. a sound that lingers
on after all notes have been released), however, “Change Gate Time”
will help you cut the notes down to size and thus avoid undesirable
overlaps.
Right Display
1. Use the dial to edit the following parameters.
Rhythm Composer
114
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track ADrums~Acc6, ALL
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
Mode Major, Minor, 7th,
Allows you to select the Mode to be
edited.
Division
Intro 1~4, Main 1~4,
Fill Dwn 1~3, Fill Up
1~3, End 1~4
Use this parameter to select the
Division you want to edit.
From Bar
For the settings and explanation see page 109.
From Beat
From CPT
To Bar
To Beat
To CPT
Bias –1920~1920
This parameter sets the amount by
which the duration (or gate time) of
the selected notes is to change. The
shortest possible Gate Time” value is
“1” (used for all drum notes), so that
selecting “–1000” for notes with a “Gate
Time value of “1” in the specied time
range still leaves you with the same
value.
Magnify 0~200%
Use this parameter rather than “Bias” to
produce proportional changes to the
aected “Gate Time” values. Values
below “100%” decrease the duration,
while anything above “100%” increases
it. Select “100%” if you prefer to work
with the “Bias” parameter (see above).
From Note/
To Note
0 C-~127 G9
“From Note” refers to the lower limit of
the note range you want to change. To
Note” represents the upper limit.
2. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Global Change
This function allows you to make quick changes to certain settings.
The changes always apply to entire tracks (you cannot use “Global
Change” for just a few measures). You can apply global changes
to the four editable rhythms track parameters (“Express, “Reverb,
“Panpot” and “Chorus”) when you notice that the eect is too
prominent or not strong enough.
You can also use it to “upgrade older rhythms to ensure that they
use theBK-9’s new sounds.
Right Display
1. Use the dial to edit the following parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track ADrums~Acc6, ALL
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
Mode Major, Minor, 7th, ALL
Allows you to select the Mode to be
edited.
Division
Intro 1~4, IntroALL,
Main 1~4,
Fill Dwn 1~3,
Fill Up 1~3,
End 1~4, ALL
Use this parameter to select the
Division you want to edit.
Alteration
Mode*
Nearest, Degree, --
This message type is only available
for melodic rhythm tracks (i.e. not
for ADrums or ABass tracks). Rhythm
tracks you only just recorded do not
contain it..
Nearest**: Refers to a more musical
system for real-time shifts of the
recorded rhythm notes during
Arranger playback. See p. 117.
Degree: This setting refers to the
old” system for real-time conversion
of track information during rhythm
playback. See p. 117.
Select “--- if the selected pattern
should ignore this setting.
From/To
CC00, CC32,
PC
---, 0~127, ALL
1~128
Enter the original data value (i.e. the
value that is being used right now by
the selected track(s)) for “From. For
To”, specify the new value that should
replace the “From value. These are what
we call “absolute changes: you don’t
add or subtract values, you replace
them with other values. This system is
only available for messages that allow
you to select sounds or sound banks.***
Inc/Dec…
Expression,
Reverb,
Chorus,
Panpot
–127~127
These parameters allow you to add (+)
or subtract (–) a given value to/from
the current Expression, Pan, Reverb
Send or Chorus Send values. This may
come in handy if the real-time changes
you recorded turn out to be too high
or too low.
[*] This parameter is not available for: ADrums and ABass tracks,
Intro3 & 4 and End3 & 4 patterns.
[**] The notes of the melodic rhythm tracks are compared against
the chords played in the recognition area. If the next chord you play
contains the note the selected part is already sounding (based on
the previous chord), that note is maintained. If the new chord does
not contain that note, the rhythm part in question uses the closest
(“Nearest”) note. This produces a more musical behavior than any
other system on the market.
[***] CC00 messages are the so-called “MSB” bank select messages.
They allows you to select the Capital Tone (select “0”) of a sound
address. Select “---” if the current setting must not change. The
CC32 control change is the so-called “LSB” bank select message.
Use the PC parameter to change the address, a.k.a. program change
number, of a sound (e.g. from “1” to “2”).
2. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Rhythm Track Edit functions
115
Shift Clock
Right Display
“Shift Clock allows you to shift the notes within the selected
“From”/“To” range. It can be used for two things:
• To correct “slow” notes due to a slow(er) attack. You may want
to use “Shift Clock after assigning a sound to a track that has
a considerably slower attack than the sound you used for
recording the part in question. This technique is frequently used
in pop music to “time” 1/16-note string arpeggios played with
a “slow pad sound. Rather than have the notes begin at the
mathematically correct time (e.g. 2-1-0), you could shift them to
the left (e.g. to 1-4-115), so that the peak volume of the attack is
reached on the next beat:
Original positions
(slow attack, timing seems o)
Shift= –5
(timing sounds OK)
• To correct the timing of notes recorded via MIDI without
quantizing them. You can use external sequences as raw
material for your songs. Recording such excerpts via MIDI may
cause a slight delay (e.g. 5 CPT). If that is not acceptable, use
“Shift Clock to “push” the recorded data to the left (select “–5”).
That allows you to preserve any irregularities the original may
contain because it was not quantized. After selecting a sound
with a slow release (i.e. a sound that lingers on after all notes
have been released), however, “Change Gate Time” will help you
cut the notes down to size and thus avoid undesirable overlaps.
1. Use the dial to edit the following parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track ADrums~Acc6, ALL
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
Mode Major, Minor, 7th,
Allows you to select the Mode to be
edited.
Division
Intro 1~4, Main 1~4,
Fill Dwn 1~3, Fill Up
1~3, End 1~4
Use this parameter to select the
Division you want to edit.
From Bar
For the settings and explanation see p. 109.
From Beat
From CPT
To Bar
To Beat
To CPT
Data Type For the settings and explanation see p. 110.
Value (CPT) –4800~4800
This parameter sets the amount by
which the notes are shifted. The value
refers to CPT units (one CPT= 1/120 Q).
Notes on the rst beat of the rst bar
cannot be shifted further to the left,
because that would mean shifting them
to the “0” measure, which doesn’t exist.
Parameter Setting Explanation
From Note,
To Note
0 C-~127 G9
“From Note” allows you to set the
note (or lower limit of the note range)
to be modied within the specied
“From”/“To time range.
To Note” allows you to set the upper
limit of the note range to be modied.
2. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Track Length
This function allows you to modify the length (number of bars,
beats and clocks) of a pattern after recording. Data that lie outside
the range you decided to keep are discarded. Obviously, you only
need to change the settings of the Mode whose length you want
to modify.
NOTE
There is no way to recall the previous version, so be sure to save
your rhythm before continuing. See “Saving your Rhythm (p.
106).
Right Display
1. Use the dial to edit the following parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Track ADrums~Acc6, ALL
Allows you to select the track you wish
to edit. You can also select ALL here,
in which case the operation applies to
all tracks.
Division
Intro 1~4, Main 1~4,
Fill Dwn 1~3, Fill Up
1~3, End 1~4
Use this parameter to select the
Division you want to edit.
Length Bar 000~999
Use the dial to set the length of the
selected pattern(s) in steps of one bar.
You can also make an existing track
longer by specifying a “Bar value that
lies beyond the last notes.
Length Beat
1~[number of beats
per bar]
Species the beat position.
The number of selectable beats
depends on the selected time
signature.
Length CPT 0~119
This parameter allows you to “ne-tune”
the length. In most cases, you will
probably work with multiples of Q notes
(i.e. 120CPT) because 120CPT represent
one beat of an X/4 bar (1/4, 2/4, 3/4,
4/4, etc.).
Mode
Major, Minor, 7th,
Major+Minor,
Major+7th,
Major+Minor+ 7th,
Minor+7th
Choose the Modes to which the new
length setting should apply.
You can also switch on two or all three
button icons. If you set Track” to ALL,
all three Modes are selected automati-
cally (and that cannot be changed).
2. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
Rhythm Composer
116
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Time Signature
The Time Signature” parameter allows you to check and set the
time signature of the patterns. The major, minor and seventh Modes
of a pattern must always use the same time signature, which is why
you cannot edit them separately.
Use this parameter to specify the time signature of the selected
pattern (“Division, see below). The MAIN, INTRO and ENDING
instances comprise four variations, which is why there are four
Time Signatures” values you can select using the VARIATION [1]~[4]
button icons. When you select “Fill Up or “Fill Dwn” for “Division,
only three Time Signature instances can be edited.
The most commonly used time signatures are: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 6/8 and
12/8. Other values (such as 7/4, 13/8, etc.) are also possible.
NOTE
When you change the time signature of an already recorded
pattern, its notes and events are “reshued”, so that you may
end up with incomplete measures. None of your data are
deleted, however.
Right Display
1. Use the dial to edit the following parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Division
Intro, Main, FillDwn,
FillUp, End, ALL
Use this parameter to select the
Division you want to edit.
Time
Signature
1~32/16, 1~32/8,
1~32/4, 1~32/2
This parameter allows you to set the
time signature.
Var1
On, O
Use these parameters to select the
pattern you want to change. If you set
“Division” to “Fill Dwn” or “Fill Up”, there
are only three button icons. You can
switch on several or all button icons if
you like. (But you cannot switch o all
four or three.)
Var2
Var3
Var4
2. Press the [WRITE] button (its indicator ashes) to conrm
your settings and edit the data.
The display briey conrms the operation and then returns to the
current Composer page.
Editing Individual Rhythm Events
(Micro Edit)
Select this mode if you need to change just one aspect of an
otherwise perfect rhythm.
In this section, we will use the word event for any kind of message.
An event is thus a command (or instruction) for the Arranger.
You can only view and edit one track at a time. Therefore, be sure
to check the Track” setting before editing the events displayed on
this page.
1. Press the [QUICK MENU] button (its indicator ashes).
The display changes to:
Left Display
2. Rotate the dial to select “Micro Edit”, then push the dial.
The displays changes to:
Left Display
Right Display
3. Select the left “Micro Edit“ page.
4. Use the Track”, “Mode” and “Division parameters to
select the pattern you want to edit.
The Right display will show the list of events of the selected track.
Right Display
Each event is executed at a
given point in time, which is
why they all have a position
indication.
Single Event
Value
To change information already available on the selected track,
proceed as follows:
5. Rotate the dial to select the list entry you want to edit.
When you move the cursor to a note event, it is played back. This
may help you identify the occurrence you want to edit.
6. Push the dial to select the rst value.
In the following examples, we selected the CC00 message (left) and
the rst parameter of a note event (right):
Editing Individual Rhythm Events (Micro Edit)
117
Right Display
Right Display
7. Rotate the dial to set the value.
8. Push the dial to select the next value and edit it if
necessary.
9. When youre done, press the [EXIT] button to return to
the Rhythm Composer pages, then save your rhythm. See
“Saving your Rhythm” (p. 106).
Event
type
Explanation
Note
velocity
and gate
time
messages
These messages always come in pairs. The rst value
(“42:F#2”, for example) refers to the note itself and the
second (“72”) to the velocity (playing dynamics).
The “Micro Edit” page adds a third message to that pair. It
describes the duration of the note in question. You may
remember this value from the Track Edit” environment,
where it is called “Gate Time.
The range for note numbers is “0 (C–)”~“127 (G9)”.
Velocity messages can be set anywhere between “1”
(extremely soft) and “127”. The value “0” cannot be entered,
because it would eectively switch o the note
NOTE
CC64 (Hold) events generated by a pedal switch
connected to the PEDAL HOLD jack are converted into
the equivalent GATE TIME values at the time of recording.
You may therefore have to change the duration of the
notes themselves.
CC
These messages usually add something to the notes being
played, like modulation, a dierent volume, a new stereo
position… The BK-9 recognizes (and allows you to edit) all
control change numbers the Rhythm uses (CC01, 10, 11, 91,
93) and displays their ocial” name.
These messages can be set to the desired value (0~127)
when the corresponding eect is needed – but they also
need to be reset to “0” to avoid unpleasant surprises
PC/
Program
Change
These messages are used to select sounds within the
current bank. As there are only 128 possibilities, these
messages are usually preceded by control changes CC00
and CC32. That’s why the BK-9 inserts all three when you
use the “Create Event” function. To assign a Drum Set to
an Acc1~6 track, you must create a “CC00” event with the
value “111”.
NOTE
The CC00 value of ADrums tracks cannot be edited.
Pitch Bend
These messages are used for temporary changes to
the pitch of the notes being played at that time. Pitch
Bend messages can be positive or negative (the range is
–128~128). The value “0” means that the pitch of notes
being played in that area is not altered.
If a Pitch Bend occurrence is not reset to “0” at some stage,
all notes will keep sounding at when you no longer want
them to.
Event
type
Explanation
Alteration
Mode
This message type is only available for melodic rhythm
tracks (i.e. not for ADrums or ABass tracks) and needs to be
inserted by hand (using “Create Event”). Rhythm tracks you
only just recorded do not contain it.
It allows you to use a revolutionary system for adapting the
recorded notes to a more natural behavior (also known as
“voicing”). There are two options:
Degree
This setting refers to the old” system for real-time
conversion of rhythm track information for Rhythm
playback. Based on the fundamentals of the chords you
play during Arranger playback, it often leads to odd
jumps of certain parts.
Nearest
Refers to a more musical system for real-time shifts of the
recorded rhythm notes during Rhythm playback.
Let us rst look at an illustration:
Recorded strings track Result with “Degree”
Result with “Nearest
Chords played in the
recognition area.
This new system is called Adaptive Chord Voicing”.
The notes of the melodic rhythm tracks are compared
against the chords played in the recognition area. If the
next chord you play contains the note the selected part is
already sounding (based on the previous chord), that note
is maintained.
If the new chord does not contain that note, the rhythm
part in question uses the closest (“Nearest”) note. In the
example above, the “G” is closer to the A sounded by the
strings part than the “C”. This produces a more musical
behavior than any other system on the market.
Both “Degree” and “Nearest allow you to specify the note
range (“Limit Low” and “Limit High”) the selected part
may play. Notes that would fall outside that range during
Arranger playback are automatically transposed to values
inside the selected range.
Rather than specifying two note values, you can also
choose “Std”, which means that the BK-9 decides automati-
cally when extremely high (or low) notes need to be shifted
down (or up) by one or several octaves.
Rhythm Composer
118
Other Edit Operations
The “Micro Edit” page allows you to select several functions.
Right Display
You can select several consecutive events and edit them in one
go: select the rst event of a series, push and hold the dial and
rotate it.
1. Select the event you want to edit.
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button (its indicator ashes).
The display changes to:
Left Display
The top line shows the event type that can be edited (“CC 10
Panpot” in our example) and its location (“001:01:000”).
If you selected several events the top line shows “Multiple
Events Selected“.
3. Use the dial to select the desired edit function.
4. Depending on the selected function, press [WRITE] button
or push the dial.
Create Event
Select this function to add a new event to the selected track.
Left Display
If the position for which you create a new event already contains
other events, the new event is added at the end of that group.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Event
Note, Control Change,
Program Change,
Pitch Bend, Alteration
Mode
Allows you to specify the event type
you want to add.
To Bar
See page 110.
Species the position where your new
event will be inserted.
To Beat
To CPT
The selected event is inserted with a default value:
Event Default Value
Note
Number 60 (C4)
On Velocity 100
Gate Time 60
Program Change
CC00 Bank Select MSB 0
CC32 Bank Select LSB, 4
P. Change Number
(The bank select messages
are added automatically:
you don’t have to worry
about that)
1
Pitch Bend 0
Alteration Mode
Nearest Limit Low Std
Nearest Limit High Std
Obviously, you will then need to change the default settings
depending on the result you want to achieve.
Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your settings and add
the new event.
The BK-9 returns to the “Micro Edit” page.
Erase Event
This function allows you to remove one or several events without
changing the positions of the remaining events.
MEMO
To select several consecutive events, push the dial button and
rotating the dial towards the left (upward direction) or the right
(downward direction).
Push the dial to remove the event you selected.
The BK-9 returns to the “Micro Edit” page.
Move Event
This function allows you to move one or several events.
Parameter Setting Explanation
To Bar
See page 110.
Species the position to which the
rst event (in chronological order) of
the selected group should be shifted.
To Beat
To CPT
NOTE
If the position to which you move the selected event already
contains other events, the moved event is added at the end of
that group.
NOTE
Events located at “1-01-00” cannot be moved further to the left.
Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your settings and add
the new event.
Editing Individual Rhythm Events (Micro Edit)
119
The BK-9 returns to the “Micro Edit” page.
Copy Event
This function allows you to copy one or several events. Use
“Place Event” to insert a copy of those events at the desired
position.
MEMO
To select several consecutive events, push the dial button and
rotating the dial towards the left (upward direction) or the right
(downward direction).
Push the dial to copy the event you selected.
The BK-9 returns to the “Micro Edit” page.
Place Event
This function is only available if the Rhythm Composer’s
clipboard already contains events that you copied using “Copy
E v e n t ”.
Parameter Setting Explanation
To Bar
See page 110.
Species the position where the rst
event you copied should be inserted.
To Beat
To CPT
Press the [WRITE] button to conrm your settings and
paste the new event(s).
The BK-9 returns to the “Micro Edit” page.
NOTE
Events inserted with “Place Event” are added to any events that
may already exist in that area. Existing events are not pushed
towards the end of the track.
120
23. User Drum Kit function
This function lets users from any country and any culture use
BK-9 Drum sounds in a exible manner, according to their own
inspiration and musical tastes.
BK-9 comes with a series of preset Drum Kits, each one containing a
variety of Drum sounds.
The User Drum Kit function adds another ve Drum Kits to your
instrument, which you can customize as you wish, by creating your
new combinations of up to 88 the Drum sounds, spanned over
sharp and natural keys.
The additional ve User Drum Kits are divided into two types:
Type Name Scope
Keyboard
User
KBU1
KBU2
KBU3
KBU4
Contain drum sounds dedicated to
the keyboard real-time parts
(i.e. UP1, UP2, LWR, MBass)
Rhythm/SMF
User
RSU1
Contains drum sounds dedicated to
a Rhythm or Song
Creating your own User Drum Kit
The following explanation tells you how to obtain your customized
Drum Kit.
NOTICE
If you need to create a User Drum Kit, that is just a little bit dierent
from a preset one, before proceeding with the following steps, copy a
preset Drum Kit into one of the available User Drum Kit areas.
See “Copying a Preset Drum Kit” (p. 123).
Changing a supplied User Drum Kit
(KBU1~4, RSU1)
This option is handy if you need to freely create your own Drum Kit
without any starting point.
You can edit a supplied User Drum Kit (KBU1~4, RSU1), by copying
drum sounds (notes) from the available preset drum kits, so as to
precisely collect only the note sounds you like.
Selecting a User Drum Kit
1. Select only one real-time keyboard part (e.g. UP1).
2. Press the TONE [DRUM] button to list all Drum Kits.
The whole preset Drum Kit list is shown in the right display.
3. Rotate the dial to scroll the list till the end , where you
will nd the ve additional User Drum Kits (KBU1, KBU2,
KBU3, KBU4 and RSU1).
TIPS
You can press the TONE [DRUM] button twice to directly view
the ve available User Drum Kits.
Right Display
4. Push the dial to select the User Drum Kit (KBU1~4, RSU1),
you wish to edit.
Editing the User Drum Kit
5. Press the [QUICK MENU] button, that is ashing.
The right display shows the page that allows you to edit the
selected Drum Kit:
Right Display
NOTE
If you wish you can rename the selected User Drum Kit.
To do it, rotate the dial to select the current “Destination Drum
Kit” name and push the dial to jump to the rename page.
For details see “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
6. Play the note in the keyboard, whose drum sound you
want to change.
You will hear the current drum sound corresponding to that note
and the display will show its name in the Destination Drum Kit note
eld.
7. Rotate and push the dial to select the “Source Drum
Kit” eld, where you want to take your desired drum
instruments from.
8. Rotate the dial to choose the desiderate Drum Kit and
push it.
NOTE
At the end of Drum Kit list that came with the BK-9, you will nd
some virtual Drum Kits created for your convenience. These
addition Drum Kits contain the Drum Instruments grouped by
category.. See Additional Drum Kits” (p. 126).
9. Rotate the dial to select the Source Drum Kit Note eld
and push it.
10. Rotate the dial to start scrolling the drum instruments
available in the chosen source drum kit, while playing the
note you want to change in your keyboard.
This way the note (drum instrument) is automatically changed and
you can hear it directly from the keyboard.
The destination Drum Kit note eld now shows the newly chosen
Creating your own User Drum Kit
121
drum instrument name for the note key you have just pressed.
11. If you don’t need to edit some parameters that
characterize the sound of a single drum instrument,
proceed from the step 15.
Editing a Single Drum Instrument
12. Press the [QUICK MENU] button, that is ashing.
The BK-9 shows the following page:
Left Display
13. Use the dial to select the “Rhythm Tone Edit function.
The following page is shown:
Right Display
The rst row shows the name of selected Drum instrument.
14. Press a note in the keyboard or use the dial to select the
Drum instrument to edit.
The name of the Drum instrument corresponding to the played
note is shown in the rst row.
15. Use the dial to edit the following parameters:
Parameter Value Explanation
Pitch Fine -50~0~+50
This parameter allows you to set the ne tune of the
selected Drum Instrument.
Pitch Coarse 0~127
This parameter allows you to set the coarse tune of
the selected Drum Instrument.
Chorus Send 0~127
Use this parameter to set the chorus send level of
the selected Drum Instrument.
Reverb Send 0~127
Use this parameter to set the chorus send level of
the selected Drum Instrument.
Parameter Value Explanation
TVF Type
OFF, LPF,
BPF, HPF,
PKG, LPF2,
LPF3,
Selects the type of lter. A lter modies the
brightness or thickness of the sound by cutting a
specic frequency range:
OFF”: No lter used
LPF”: Low Pass Filter. This reduces the volume
of all frequencies above the cuto frequency
(Cuto Freq) in order to round o, or un-brighten
the sound. This is the most common lter used in
synthesizers.
BPF”: Band Pass Filter. This leaves only the
frequencies in the region of the cuto frequency
(Cuto Freq), and cuts the rest. This can be useful
when creating distinctive sounds.
HPF”: High Pass Filter. This cuts the frequencies
in the region below the cuto frequency (Cuto
Freq). This is suitable for creating percussive
sounds emphasizing their higher tones.
PKG”: Peaking Filter. This emphasizes the
frequencies in the region of the cuto frequency
(Cuto Freq). You can use this to create wah-wah
eects by employing an LFO to change the cuto
frequency cyclically.
LPF2”: Low Pass Filter 2. Although frequency
components above the Cuto frequency (Cuto
Freq) are cut, the sensitivity of this lter is half
that of the LPF. This makes it a comparatively
warmer low pass lter. This lter is good for use
with simulated instrument sounds such as the
acoustic piano.
LPF3”: Low Pass Filter 3. Although frequency
components above the Cuto frequency (Cuto
Freq) are cut, the sensitivity of this lter changes
according to the Cuto frequency. While this
lter is also good for use with simulated acoustic
instrument sounds, the nuance it exhibits diers
from that of the LPF2, even with the same TVF
Envelope settings
TVF Cuto 0~127
Selects the point at which the lter begins to have
an eect on the waveforms frequency components.
TVF Resonance 0~127
Emphasizes the portion of the sound in the region
of the cuto frequency, adding character to the
sound. Excessively high settings can produce
oscillation, causing the sound to distort.
TVF Env Depth -63~0~+63
Species the depth of the TVF envelope. Higher
settings will cause the TVF envelope to produce
greater change. Negative (-) settings will invert the
shape of the envelope.
TVF Env A
0~127
Specify the TVF envelope times (Time A–Time R).
Higher settings will lengthen the time until the next
cuto frequency level is reached
A D S R
L3
L1
L0
4L2L
Note off
Cutoff
Frequency
Time
Note on
TVF Env D
TVF Env S
TVF Env R
TVA Pan -63~+64 Set the pan of the tone.
TVA Level 0~127
Sets the volume of the tone. This setting is useful
primarily for adjusting the volume balance between
tones.
TVA A
0~127
Specify the TVA envelope levels (Level A–Level R).
These settings specify how the volume will change
at each point, relative to the standard volume (the
Tone Level value specied in the TVA screen).
RSDA
L3
L1
L2
Note off
Level
Time
Note on
T: Time L: Level
TVA D
TVA S
TVA R
User Drum Kit function
122
16. While you edit the parameter value you can play the note
in the keyboard and listen the result of the variation.
17. Press the [EXIT] button to go back to the “User Drum Edit”
Page.
18. To change another drum sound, play another note in
the keyboard and keep on rotating the dial, so that you
can hear and choose any other available drum sound
belonging to the selected source drum kit.
To create your own drum kit you can also pick drum sounds
belonging to dierent preset (source) drum kits.
19. Repeat from step 6 to change other drum sounds.
Of course, you can bypass the steps 7-8 if you don’t need to change
the source drum kit.
Saving the User Drum Kit
20. Press the [QUICK MENU] button, that is ashing.
If you selected a User Drum Kit related to real time keyboard parts
(KBU1,2,3,4), the left display shows:
Left Display
21. Use the dial to select the proper save option and your
changes will be stored in your BK-9.
The right display shows “Operation Complete.
If you selected a User Drum Kit related to rhythm (RSU1), the left
display shows:
Left Display
If you selected a User Drum Kit (RSU1) related to a song (SMF) the
left display shows:
Left Display
In these cases you have to choose the location in the USB memory
where you wish to save your les . Therefore simply execute steps
5~8 described in “Exporting and Importing a User Drum Kit (p.
124).
At the end the right display shows “Operation Complete”.
MEMO
If you have made some note changes and have forgotten
to save them in your BK-9, when pressing the EXIT button, a
message will appear asking you to save your new User Drum Kit
(whether it is a mere Drum Kit, a Rhythm or a Song/SMF).
So, simply use the dial to choose either YES” or “NO”.
If you choose “YES”, your new User Drum Kit will be permanently
saved in your BK-9.
If you choose “NO”, it will be kept in your BK-9 only temporarily,
as it will be erased once you have turned your BK-9 o.
Exporting a new User Drum Kit
If you are not interested in saving your newly created User Drum
kit into your BK-9, because you prefer to store it in a USB memory
immediately, after executing all steps from 1 to 12 in the paragraph
“Creating your own User Drum Kit” (p. 120), you can
1. Choose the option “Export Drumkit”, by rotating and
pushing the dial.
Left Display
2. Then execute steps 4~8 described in “Exporting and
Importing a User Drum Kit” (p. 124).
3. Press the [EXIT] button.
A message will appear asking you whether you want to
permanently save your new User Drum Kit in your BK-9. Choose
either “YES” or “NO”.
Restoring Notes
If you are not happy with the latest notes you chose for certain keys
when creating your User Drum Kit, you can restore the previously
saved drum sounds corresponding the those precise note keys.
To do it, simply press the MENU button, that is ashing.
Creating your own User Drum Kit
123
Alternatively, you can proceed as follows:
1. Play the keys on the keyboard, whose notes you wish to
restore as previously saved.
2. Press the [QUICK MENU] button, that is ashing.
The left display shows:
Left Display
3. Use the dial to select “Restore Note and push it.
The left display shows “Operation Complete.
4. Press and hold the [EXIT] button to go back to the main
page.
This way the latest drum sound that you saved for that precise note
is restored.
Restoring User Drum Kits
While you are editing your User Drum Kit, if you are not happy with
the combination of drum sounds you have just selected and wish to
go back to the original condition, you can:
1. Press the [QUICK MENU] button, that is ashing.
2. Use the dial to select “Restore Drum Kit” and push it.
Left Display
The left display shows “Operation Complete.
3. Press and hold the [EXIT] button to go back to the main
page.
This way the latest saved version of your User Drum Kit is restored.
Copying a Preset Drum Kit
This function allows you to copy a whole preset Drum Kit into a
User Drum Kit.
1. Press the [MENU] button.
Right Display
2. Use the dial to select “User Drumkits Utilities”.
The right display shows:
Right Display
3. Rotate the dial to choose “Copy Preset To User DrumKit
and push it to select this option.
The right display shows:
Right Display
4. In the “Destination: User DrumKit” eld select one of the
available User Drum Kit areas, in which you want to copy a
preset full Drum Kit.
5. In the “Source: Preset Drumkit eld select your desired
preset Drum Kits among those available in your BK-9.
6. Press the [WRITE] button, that is ashing red.
The following message appears on the right display:
Right Display
7. Use the dial to select “YES”, if you want to save your
change.
User Drum Kit function
124
Otherwise select “NO” if you do not want to conrm your choice.
MEMO
Once you have copied a whole preset Drum Kit into a User Drum
Kit, if you wish, you can replace any “source drum sounds with
any other one available in BK-9 to obtain your customized User
Drum kit. See “Changing a supplied User Drum Kit (KBU1~4,
RSU1)” (p. 120).
8. Press and hold the [EXIT] button to leave the “User
Drumkit Utilities” and go back to the main page directly.
Initializing a User Drum Kit
If you are not happy with the User Drum Kit(s) you have created, you may
want to erase all your changes and restore factory data. To do it:
1. Press the [MENU] button.
2. Use the dial to select “User Drumkits Utilities”.
The right display shows:
Right Display
3. Use the dial to select “Initialize User Drumkit” and push it.
The right display shows:
Right Display
4. Rotate the dial and push it to select the User Drum Kit that
you wish to initialize.
The right display shows:
Right Display
5. Use the dial to choose YES and conrm your decision to
initialize the selected User Drum Kit.
Otherwise choose “NO” if you do not want to initialize the User
Drum Kit you selected.
6. Press and hold the [EXIT] button to leave the “User
Drumkit Utilities” menu and go back to the main page
directly.
Exporting and Importing a User Drum Kit
Once you have created your own User Drum Kits, you may want to save
them into a USB memory as a backup of your work.
Moreover, you can create only four User Drum Kits (KBU’s) at a time in
your BK-9 instrument but this does not mean that you cannot create your
own larger library of customized Drum Kits. Indeed if you want an array
of User Drum Kits ready for your musical performances, you just need to
progressively export them into a USB memory. This way there is virtually
no limit to your personal library of User Drum Kits.
To export your User Drum Kits, you have to:
1. Press the [MENU] button.
2. Use the dial to select “User Drumkits Utilities”.
The right display shows:
Right Display
3. Rotate the dial and push it to select “Export User DrumKit
to File”.
The right display shows:
Right Display
4. Rotate the dial and push it to select the User Drum Kit you
want to export into your USB memory.
The right display shows:
Right Display
Using your User Drum Kits in real-time
125
5. Use the dial to choose the location where you want to
save your le.
6. Press the [WRITE] button, that is ashing red.
The right display shows:
Right Display
7. Give a name to the le to be exported.
For details see “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
NOTE
If you do not want to change the le name, simply press the
WRITE button.
NOTE
Naming a le (containing your own User Drum Kit) to be
exported does not alter the original Drum Kit name. This means
that when viewing the whole Drum Kit list in BK-9, the original
User Drum Kit name will be shown, which is not necessarily the
name of the exported le.
8. Press the [WRITE] button again.
If your USB memory already contains a le with the same name, you
can either overwrite it or change its name.
The right display shows “Operation Complete.
9. Repeat steps 3~8 for every le you wish to export.
10. Press and hold the [EXIT] button to leave the “User
Drumkit Utilities” menu and go back to the main page
directly.
Alternatively, you can save every User Drum Kit into a USB memory as soon
as you have created it. See “Changing a supplied User Drum Kit (KBU1~4,
RSU1)” (p. 120).
To import a User Drum Kit, you have to:
1. Press the [MENU] button.
2. Use the dial to select “User Drumkits Utilities”.
The right display shows:
Right Display
3. Rotate the dial and push it to select “Import User DrumKit
From File.
The right display shows:
Right Display
4. Rotate the dial to choose the User Drum Kit (.UDK) le you
wish to import into your instrument and push it to select.
The right display shows:
Right Display
5. Use the dial to select your desired destination Drum Kit.
The right display shows:
Right Display
6. Use the dial to select “YES”, if you want to conrm your
choice to import that precise le.
7. If you select “NO”, you’ll go back to the previous page,
where you can either change the destination User Drum
Kit area or leave the import function by pressing the EXIT
button.
8. Repeat steps 3~6 for any additional le you wish to
import.
9. Press and hold the [EXIT] button to leave the “User
Drumkit Utilities” menu and go back to the main page
directly.
Using your User Drum Kits in real-
time
Once you have created your desired User Drum Kits you can freely
perform your musical pieces using the drum sounds you judge to
be the most appropriate to your taste and musical inspiration in
real time.
User Drum Kit function
126
Interacting with Rhythms & Songs
(SMF)
Once you have created your own User Drum Kits you may want to
use those sounds in combination with rhythms or songs, that you
use as musical accompaniments to your performances.
To do it, you have to create your rhythm or song using either the
Rhythm Composer (for rhythms) or the 16-track sequencer (for
songs) functions and select the RSU1 (Rhythm/Song User Drum Kit)
you have previously created as your drum track.
Remember you can also use the MakeUp Tool functions to edit
both, rhythms and songs.
NOTE
Rhythms and Songs can use only the RSU1 (Rhythm and Song
User Drum Kit) area.
NOTE
Your BK-9 always loads the rst User Drum Kit related to
keyboard real time parts (KBU1) into the RSU1 area, unless you
save/export any other desired one into that area.
Of course, you’ll need to save every new rhythm or song you
created into your USB memory. These rhythms or songs will include
also your customized drum kit data, so that you can smoothly play
them back in any other BK-9 instrument.
For details see chapters “20. Working with the 16-Track Sequencer”
(p. 81), “21. How to Edit Rhythm or SMF (Makeup Tools)” (p. 97)
and “22. Rhythm Composer” (p. 103).
NOTE
Every time you import a rhythm or song using a User Drum
Kit, the content of the RSU1 area will be replaced with the User
Drum Kit contained in the rhythm/song le you loaded.
Additional Drum Kits
At the end of Drum Kit list that came with the BK-9, you will nd
some virtual Drum Kits created for your convenience. These
addition Drum Kits contain the Drum Instruments grouped by
category. See also “Editing the User Drum Kit (p. 120).
Additional Drum Kits
M_Kick_Pop
M_Kick_Rock
M_Kick_Jazz
M_Kick_Elec1
M_Kick_Elec2
M_Snare_Pop
M_Snare_Rock
M_Snare_Jazz
M_Snare_Ele1
M_Snare_Ele2
M_HiHat_Acou
M_HiHat_Elec
M_Tom_Acou1
M_Tom_Acou2
M_Tom_Elect
M_Cymb_Acou1
M_Cymb_Acou2
M_Cymb_Elect
M_Perc_Acou1
M_Perc_Acou2
M_Perc_Acou3
M_Perc_Acou4
M_Perc_Acou5
M_Perc_Acou6
M_Perc_Acou7
M_Perc_Acou8
M_Perc_Acou9
M_Perc_Acu10
M_Perc_Elect
M_Orchestral
M_Phrases
M_Voices1
M_Voices2
M_FX1
M_FX2
M_FX3
M_FX4
M_FX5
M_FX6
127
24. Menu options
The BK-9’s [MENU] button provides access to the available
parameters and functions.
General procedure
1. Press the [MENU] button (its indicator lights).
The display changes to:
Right Display
2. Use the dial to select the desired function group.
The following function groups are available:
Function group Explanation
External Lyrics
Allows you to cancel (“O”) or activate (“On”) the display
of song lyrics on an external screen.
Performance Edit
This function group allows you to select dierent
Tones and eects settings for the keyboard parts, the
selected rhythm, to set the Arranger’s behavior, the
split point, etc. All settings of this group can be saved
to a Performance memory. See “‘Performance Edit’
parameters” (p. 127).
Global
This function group contains parameters that apply
to all sections of the BK-9. See ‘Global’ parameters” (p.
142).
Audio Key
This function lets you assign an audio le to 7 right most
keys of BK-9’s keyboard, and play those audio les by
pressing the corresponding keys. For more details see
“16. Using Audio Phrases (Audio Key)” (p. 65).
One Touch Edit
This functions allows you to edit the
ONE TOUCH memories (and to save your changes). See
“Programming Your Own ONE TOUCH Settings (One
Touch Edit)” (p. 42).
Chord Loop
This page contains parameters for the Chord Loop
function (p. 148).
Rhythm
Composer
This function group allows you to create new rhythms or
to edit existing ones (p. 103).
16Track
Sequencer
Your BK-9 contains a powerful sequencer with a host
of edit functions. Even so, you will quickly notice that
the “16 track Sequencer is as simple to operate as it is
powerful (p. 81).
Mastering Tools
These functions allow you to set the compressor and
equalizer for Rhythm/Song and Tone separately (p.
149)
MIDI
This function group allows you to edit the BK-9’s MIDI
parameters (p. 151).
Wireless
By inserting the wireless USB Adapter (WNA1100-RL;
sold separately) into the BK-9’s USB MEMORY port,
you’ll be able to use wireless compatible applications
(p. 162).
Factory Reset
This command allows you to load the BK-9’s factory
settings (p. 159).
Format USB
Device
This command allows you to format an optional USB
memory (p. 159).
3. Push the dial to go to the display page where you can edit
the parameters of the selected group, or to execute the
selected command.
External Lyrics
This is, in fact, a switch that allows you to cancel (“O”) or activate (“On”)
the display of song lyrics on an external screen.
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
The following parameters can be set for each Performance memory:
Function group Explanation
Tone Part View
This is where you can edit settings related to Tones
(p. 127).
Tone Part Eects
Contains the eects parameters for the keyboard
parts (LWR, UPP) (p. 131).
Organ Commons
This settings allow you to specify some organ
(Harmonic Bars) parameters (p. 134).
Split
This parameter allows you to change the split point,
i.e. the separation between the lower and upper
keyboard zones. (p. 136).
Key
Allows you to transpose the BK-9 in semi-tone steps
up or down (p. 136).
Rhythm Parts
This group contains all parameters of the rhythm
parts (p. 137).
Arranger Setting
This function group allows you to specify where
and how the selected rhythm should scan the note
messages generated by your playing for chord
information (p. 137).
Dynamic Arranger
The DYNAMIC ARRANGER function allows you to
control the volume and timbre of the Arranger
parts via the way you strike the keys in the chord
recognition area (velocity sensitivity) (p.139).
Assign Switches
In this page you can assign functions to the Assign
Switches [S1], [S2], [S3], [S4] (p. 53).
Scale Tune Switch
This parameter allows you to specify which parts
should be aected by the “Scale Tune” setting “Scale
Tune Switch (p. 140).
Scale Tune
Use these parameter to change the tuning system
(p. 140).
Melody Intelligent
Allows you to set the “Melody Intelligent” function (p.
141). This page can also be selected by pressing and
holding the [MELODY INTELL] button.
D Beam
Here you can access the D-Beam functions. This
function can be reached by pressing and holding
one of the D-BEAM buttons. See “Using the D-BEAM
Controller” (p. 53).
MIDI Set Link
This parameter allows you to link a User MIDI Set to
the Performance memory.
See “MIDI Set Link (p. 142).
Save As Default
This function allows you to save all “Performance Edit”
settings as the new defaults that will be loaded each
time you switch on the BK-9 (p. 142).
Tone Part View parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] button“Performance
Edit” Tone Part View.
Right Display
Menu options
128
1. Rotate the dial to move the cursor on the “Keyboard Part
eld. Use the [INC] or [DEC] button to select the keyboard
part you want to edit UP1 (Upper1), UP2 (Upper2), LWR
(Lower), MBAS (Manual Bass).
The display shows the settings for the selected keyboard part.
2. Select and set the desired parameter(s). See “Browsing
Windows and Setting Parameter Values” (p. 26).
The following parameters are available:
Tone
Allows you to select a dierent Tone. While selecting a Tone, you
can press a Tone selection button to select a dierent family.
Parameter Explanation
Tone The number of Tones depends on the selected family
Volume
Adjusts the volume of the selected keyboard part.
Selecting “0” means that the part in question is no longer audible.
Parameter Setting
Volume 0~127
MEMO
You can also adjust the volume of the keyboard parts using
the sliders. See “Setting the Volume of the Real-Time Parts or
Rhythm Parts (Mixer)” (p. 33).
Reverb Send
Use this parameter to set the reverb send level (i.e. the amount of
eect that should be added).
Parameter Setting
Reverb Send 0~127
Chorus Send
Use this parameter to set the chorus send level (i.e. the amount of
eect that should be added).
Parameter Setting
Chorus Send 0~127
Panpot
Use this parameter to change the stereo placement of the selected
keyboard part. “L63” means hard left” and “R63” represents “hard
right”. Choose “0” if the sound should be at the center of the stereo
image.
Parameter Setting
Panpot L63~0~R63
Key Touch (velocity sensitivity)
The BK-9’s keyboard is velocity sensitive, allowing you to control the
timbre and volume of the keyboard parts by varying the strength
with which you strike the keys.
1. If you want to edit this setting, you have to push the dial
to select the “Key Touch” page.
Right Display
2. Select and set the desired parameter(s). See “Browsing
Windows and Setting Parameter Values” (p. 26).
The following parameters are available:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Curve
High, Medium,
Low, Fixed*
High”:
Select this setting for maximum expressive-
ness. Even small variations of the force with
which you strike a key produce audible
changes. The trade-o is, however, that you
have to strike the keys forcefully to reach
the maximum volume.
Medium”:
Medium velocity sensitivity. The keyboard
responds to velocity changes, but the
maximum volume can be obtained more
easily than the with “high” curve. (This is the
default setting.)
Low”:
Select this setting if you are used to playing
on an electronic organ or if you do not
want velocity changes to bring about major
volume changes.
Fixed”:
Select this setting if all notes you play on
the keyboard should have the same veloc-
ity value. When you set this parameter, the
“Fixed value” eld can be edited.
Min Value 1~127
This parameter allows you to set the
smallest velocity value with which you can
trigger the selected part.
Max Value 1~127
This parameter allows you to set the
highest velocity value with which you can
trigger the selected part.
Fixed value* 1~127
Allows you to set the value when “Curve” is
set to “Fixed”.
[*] This parameter can only be edited if the “Curve” parameter is set
to “Fixed”.
Eq Part Edit
1.
If you want to edit the parameters of the equalizer, you
have to push the dial to select the “Eq Edit Part” page.
Right Display
2. Select and set the desired parameter(s). See “Browsing
Windows and Setting Parameter Values” (p. 26).
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
129
The following parameters are available:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Switch O, On
This parameter allows you to switch the
equalizer on and o.
High Freq
1500 Hz, 2000 Hz,
3000 Hz, 4000 Hz,
6000 Hz, 8000 Hz,
12000 Hz
Allows you to set the cuto frequency of
the high band (this is a shelving lter).
High Gain –15~+15 dB
Use this parameter to set the level of the
selected “High” frequency.
Positive values boost (increase the
volume of) that frequency band,
negative values cut (attenuate) it.
Mid Freq 200~8000 Hz
Allows you to set the cuto frequency of
the middle band (this is a peaking lter).
Mid Gain –15~+15d B
Use this parameter to set the level of the
selected “Mid” frequency.
Mid Q 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0
Use this parameter to specify the width
of the “Mid Frequency band that you
want to boost or cut. Smaller values
mean that neighboring frequencies
above/below that value are also aected.
Low Freq
90 Hz, 150 Hz, 180
Hz, 300 Hz, 360 Hz,
600 Hz
Allows you to set the cuto frequency of
the low band (this is a shelving lter).
Low Gain –15~+15 dB
Use this parameter to set the level of the
selected “Low” frequency.
3. Press the [EXIT] button to leave the “Eq Part Edit page.
Mfx
The BK-9 contains two multi-eects processor (“Mfx”) that can be
used to process the desired keyboard part(s). Select “O for parts
that don’t need to be processed by this Mfx.
Parameter Setting
Mfx O, Mfx1, Mfx2
Expression Pedal
Select “O if you don’t need pedal expression for the selected part.
This means that the keyboard part in question no longer responds
to an expression pedal you may have connected to the PEDAL
EXPRESSION jack.
Parameter Setting
Expression Pedal O, On
Exp Pedal Down and Exp Pedal Up
The expression pedal allows you to control the volume of all parts
by foot.
“Up and “Down” refer to the volume that is used when the
expression pedal is pressed (“Up, highest volume) or in the upright
position (“Down, lowest volume).
You do not need to specify “0” for the “Down” position.
Selecting any other values will reduce the volume of the selected
part up to the “Down” value.
Likewise, you do not need to specify “127” as maximum value for
“Up.
NOTE
The expression pedal sends MIDI Expression commands (CC11).
It is perfectly possible to set the “Down value to “127” and the
“Up value to “0”, so that the selected part only sounds when the
expression pedal is in the upright position. This can be used for
some clever eects: instead of alternating between the Upper1
and Upper2 parts by varying your velocity (which requires a
considerable amount of “striking precision”, see “Min Value” and
“Max Value on p. 128), you could invert Uppert2 response
to the expression pedal, so that Upper1 doesn’t sound when
Upper2 does, and vice versa.
Parameters Setting
Pedal Exp Down
Pedal Exp Up
0~127
Hold Pedal
This parameter allows you to specify whether and how a hold
damper pedal you connect to the “PEDAL HOLD” jack should
respond to Hold messages (CC64).
Parameter Setting
Hold Pedal Auto, On, O
• “Auto means that the part in question only responds to Hold
messages if it is assigned to the right half (Split) or the entire
keyboard.
• “On means that the part in question always responds to Hold
messages, even if it is assigned to the left half of the keyboard.
• “O, nally, means that the part does not respond to Hold
messages.
Octave Shift
Allows you to transpose the selected keyboard part in octave steps
Parameter Setting
Octave Shift –4~0~+4
Coarse Tune
Changes the pitch of the selected keyboard part in semi-tone steps.
Parameter Setting
Coarse Tune –24~0~+24
Fine Tune
Changes the pitch of the selected part in steps of 1 cent (1/100
semi-tone).
Parameter Setting
Fine Tune –100~0~+100
Portamento Mode
You can set the selected part to mono(phonic) mode.
Parameter Setting
Portamento Mode Patch, Poly, Mono
“Patch means that the setting depends on Tone’s Mono/Poly
setting.
• “Poly”, on the other hand, means that you can play chords using
the selected part
• “Mono means that you can only play one note at a time. You
could select this mode to play a trumpet or woodwind part in a
more natural way.
Portamento Time
“Portamento means that the pitch doesn’t change in clearly
dened steps: it produces glides from one note to the next. Use this
parameter to specify the speed at which those glides are carried
out. The higher is the value, the slower is the transitions.
Menu options
130
Parameter Setting
Portamento Time 0~127
Bender Assign
This parameter allows you to specify for each keyboard part how it
should respond to Pitch Bend messages.
Parameter Setting
Bender Assign Auto, On, O
• “Auto”: The keyboard part only responds to left/right
movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever when no
split setting causes it to be to the left of other keyboard parts.
In other words: parts you can play with your left hand after
selecting a split no longer respond to pitch bend messages. But
they will while the keyboard is not split.
• “On”: The keyboard part always responds to left/right
movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever.
• “O”: The part in question does not respond to left/ right
movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever.
NOTE
If a SuperNATURAL tone is selected and its “Bend Mode
parameter is “On”, the Auto” and “On” value of “Bender Assign”
do not act.
For more information about “Bend Mode see “SuperNATURAL
Edit (Only if a SuperNATURAL tone is selected)” (p. 131).
Bender Range
This parameter sets the pitch interval, i.e. the value that will be used
when the BENDER/MODULATION lever is pushed all the way to the
left or right.
Parameter Setting
Bender Range 0~+24
NOTE
If a SuperNATURAL tone is selected and its “Bend Mode
parameter is “On”, the “Bender Range” parameter does not act.
For more information about “Bend Mode see “SuperNATURAL
Edit (Only if a SuperNATURAL tone is selected)” (p. 131).
Modulation Assign
This parameter allows you to specify for each keyboard part how it
should respond to Modulation messages (CC01).
Parameter Setting
Modulation Assign Auto, On, O
• “Auto”: The keyboard part only responds to backward
movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever when no
split setting causes it to be to the left of other keyboard parts.
In other words: parts you can play with your left hand after
selecting a split no longer respond to modulation messages. But
they will while the keyboard is not split.
• “On”: The keyboard part always responds to backward
movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever.
• “O”: The part in question does not respond to backward
movements of the BENDER/MODULATION lever.
Slider CC1, Slider CC2, Slider CC3
You can assign to the Sliders CC1~CC3 a function.
Parameter Setting
Slider CCx
OFF, Cut O, Resonance, Attack, Decay, Release,
Vibrato Rate, Vibrato Depth, Vibrato Delay, C1, SN
Noise*, SN Speed*, SN Growl Sense*,
* For details regarding this settings refer to the“Tone & Drum Kit
List “ supplementary manual.
Download it from the Web http://www.roland.com/manuals/).
Tone Edit (Not for all tone)
NOTE
The Tone Edit function is not applicable to some tones,
SuperNATURAL tones and Harmonic Bar.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Cut O –64~+63
This lter parameter allows you to make the
selected sound darker or brighter. Positive
settings mean that more overtones will be
allowed to pass, so that the sound becomes
brighter. The further this value is set in the
negative direction, the fewer overtones will
be allowed to pass and the sound will become
softer (darker).
Characteristics of a low-pass lter
Setting
Frequency
Cuto frequency
NOTE
For some sounds, positive (+) Cuto settings
will cause no noticeable change because
the pre-programmed Cuto parameter is
already set to its maximum value
Resonance –64~+63
When the Resonance value is increased, the
overtones in the area of the cuto frequency
will be emphasized, creating a sound with a
strong character.
NOTE
For some sounds, negative (–) “Resonance”
settings may produce no noticeable change
because the Resonance is already set to the
minimum value.
Attack –64~+63
This parameter adjusts the onset of the sound.
Negative values speed up the attack, so that
the sound becomes more aggressive.
Decay –64~+63
This parameter adjusts the time over which
the sound’s volume and cuto frequency fall
from the highest point of the attack down to
the sustain level.
NOTE
Percussive sounds usually have a sustain
level of “0”. Piano and guitar sounds are in
this category. Holding the keys for a long
time will have little eect on the duration of
the notes you are playing, even if you select
a high value here
Release –64~+63
This parameter adjusts the time over which
the sound will decay after the note is
released until it is no longer heard. The cuto
frequency will also fall according to this
setting.
Vibrato Rate –64~+63
This parameter adjusts the speed of the pitch
modulation. Positive (+) settings make the
preset pitch modulation faster and negative
(–) settings make it slower.
Vibrato Depth –64~+63
This parameter adjusts the intensity of the
pitch modulation. Positive (+) settings mean
that the “wobble” becomes more prominent,
while negative (–) settings make it shallower.
Vibrato Delay –64~+63
This parameter adjusts the time required
for the vibrato eect to begin. Positive (+)
settings increase the time before vibrato will
begin and negative settings shorten the time
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
131
Parameter Setting Explanation
C1 0~127
The function of this parameter depends on
the sound you assigned to the selected part. It
may inuence the lter and resonance setting,
switch between the organ samples with the
fast and slow Rotary modulation, etc.
SuperNATURAL Edit (Only if a SuperNATURAL tone is
selected)
You can make parameters settings for the selected SuperNATURAL
instrument.
Refer to “SuperNATURAL INST Parameters” in the Tone & Drum Kit
List “ supplementary manual.
Download it from the Web http://www.roland.com/manuals/).
Tone Part Eects’ parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] button “Performance
Edit” Tone Part Eects” or pressing and holding the [MFX] button. Your
BK-9 contains two multi-eects processor that can be used for processing
any keyboard part you like.
MEMO
There are also 3 multi-eects processors (“Mfx”), one reverb
processor and one chorus processor that can be used to process
Rhythm or Standard MIDI Files).
Right Display
1. Use the dial to select the desired function (Mfx1, Mfx2,
Reverb, Chorus,Upper1, Upper2, Lower, M.Bass). See
“Browsing Windows and Setting Parameter Values” (p.
26).
Mfx1
Right Display
Mfx(1) Switch
Select “O if you don’t need the Mfx processor.
Parameter Setting
Mfx Switch O, On
Mfx(1) Type
The BK-9 provides 84 dierent multi-eect types, some of which
are combinations of two eects for added exibility. This parameter
allows you to select the desired type. The available types are:
N. Mfx Type N. Mfx Type N. Mfx Type
1 Thru 29
0OD Delay
57 VK Rotary
2 Stereo EQ 30
DST Chorus
58 3D Chorus
3 Overdrive 31
DST Flanger
59 3D Flanger
4 Distortion 32
DST Delay
60 3D Step Flgr
5 Phaser 33
EH Chorus
61 Band Chorus
6 Spectrum 34
EH Flanger
62 Band Flanger
7 Enhancer 35
EH Delay
63 Band Step Flg
8 Auto Wah 36.
ChorusDLY
64 VS Overdrive
9 Rotary 37
Flanger DLY
65 VS Distortion
10 Compressor 38
CHO Flanger
66 GT Amp Simul
11 Limiter 39 CHO/DLY 67 Gate
12 Hexa-Chorus 40 Flanger/DLY 68 Long Delay
13 Trem Chorus 41 CHO/Flange 69 Serial Delay
14 Space-D 42 Isolator 70 MLT Tap DLY
15 St. Chorus 43 Low Boost 71 Reverse DLY
16. St. Flanger 44 Super Filter 72 Shue DLY
17 Step Flanger 45 Step Filter 73 3D Delay
18 St. Delay 46 Humanizer 74 Long DLY
19 Mod. Delay 47 Speaker Sim 75 Tape Echo
20 3 Tap Delay 48 Step Phaser 76 LoFi Noise
21 4 Tap Delay 49 MLT Phaser 77 LoFi Comp
22 Time Delay 50 Inf Phaser 78 LoFi Radio
23 2 Pitch Shifter 51 Ring Modul 79 Telephone
24 FBK Pitch 52 Step Ring 80 Phonograph
25 Reverb 53 Tremolo 81 Step Pitch
26 Gate Reverb 54 Auto Pan 82 Sympa Reso
27
ODChorus
55 Step Pan 83 Vib-Od-Rotary
28
ODFlanger
56 Slicer 84 Center Canc
NOTE
Some of the names shown above may be abbreviated in the
display.
Mfx(1) Edit
1.
If you want to edit the parameters of the selected eect
type, you have to push the dial to select the “Mfx Edit
page.
Right Display
2. Select and set the desired parameter(s). See “Browsing
Windows and Setting Parameter Values” (p. 26).
The rst two parameters for each Mfx type are “Chorus Send”
(0~127) and “Reverb Send” (0~127).
They allow you to specify whether—and to what extent—the Mfx
signal should be processed by the Chorus and/or Reverb eect.
Menu options
132
The other parameters in the page depend on the Mfx type that you
selected.
Mfx(1) Controls
1.
If you want to assign a control to a Mfx(1), you have to
push the dial to select the “Mfx Controls page.
Right Display
2. Select and set the desired parameter(s). See “Browsing
Windows and Setting Parameter Values” (p. 26).
Parameter Setting
Control1 Source MFX1 Ctrl, MFX2 Ctrl
Control1 Sens -63~+63
Control1 Assign
The eects to assign depend on the Mfx type that you
selected
Control2 Source As Control1 Source
Control4 Assign As Control1 Assign
Mfx2
For the Mfx2 parameters refer to Mfx1.
Reverb
Parameter Setting Explanation
Reverb Switch O, On
Select O you don’t need any reverb
eect.
Reverb Type
1: SRV Room,
2: SRV Hall,
3: SRV Plate,
4: GM2 Reverb,
5: Room1,
6: Room2,
7: Stage1,
8: Stage2,
9: Hall1,
10: Hall2,
11: Delay,
12: Pan Delay
This parameter allows you to select one
of the twelve eects types, two of which
are actually delay eects.
Reverb Edit
The parameters to assign depend on
the Reverb Type that you selected. See
below.
Reverb Edit “1: SRV Room”, “2: SRV Hall, “3: SRV Plate Types
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Output level of the reverb signal.
Reverb Edit “1: SRV Room”, “2: SRV Hall, “3: SRV Plate Types
Parameter Setting Explanation
Pre Delay 0.0~100.0 ms
Adjusts the delay time between the
direct sound until the reverb sound
is heard. This is used to simulate the
distance between the original signal and
the reective surfaces.
Time 0~127
The duration of the reverb signal.
The higher the value, the longer” the
simulated room becomes.
Size 1~8
Determines how the later reverberations
are propagated, which gives the listener
important clues about the height of the
simulated room.
High Cut
160~12500Hz,
Bypass
Adjusts the frequency above which the
highfrequency content of the reverb
will be reduced. If you do not want to
attenuate the high frequencies, set this
parameter to BYPASS.
Density 0~127 Density (number) of the reections.
Diusion 0~127
Adjusts the change in density of the
reverb over time. The higher the value,
the more the density increases with
time. (The eect of this parameter is
most noticeable with long reverb times.)
LF Damp Freq 50~4000Hz
Adjusts the frequency below which the
lowfrequency content of the reverb
sound will be reduced.
LF Damp Gain –36~0dB
Adjusts the amount of damping applied
to the frequency range selected with “LF
Damp”. With a setting of “0”, there
will be no reduction of the reverbs
low-frequency content.
HF Damp Freq
4000~
12500Hz
Adjusts the frequency above which the
highfrequency content of the reverb
sound will be reduced.
HF Damp Gain -36~0dB
Adjusts the amount of damping applied
to the frequency range selected with “HF
Damp”. With a setting of “0”, there will be
no reduction of the reverbs high-
frequency content.
Reverb Edit ”4. GM2Reverb” Type
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Output level of the reverb signal.
Character
Room1,
Room2,
Room3, Hall1,
Hall2, Plate,
Delay, Pan
Delay
Type of reverb
Pre LPF 0~7
Cuts the high frequency range of
the sound coming into the reverb.
Higher values will cut more of the high
frequencies.
Level 0~127 Output level of the reverb signal.
Time 0~127 Time length of reverberation.
Feedback 0~127
Adjusts the level of the delay sound
that is fed back into the eect when the
“Character” setting is “Delay” or “Pan
Delay”.
Reverb Edit “5. Room1” ~ “12. Pan Delay” Types
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Output level of the reverb signal.
Time 0~127 Time length of reverberation
HF Damp
200~8000Hz,
Bypass
Adjusts the frequency above which the
highfrequency content of the reverb
sound will be cut. If you do not want
to cut the high frequencies, set this
parameter to BYPASS.
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
133
Reverb Edit “5. Room1” ~ “12. Pan Delay” Types
Parameter Setting Explanation
Feedback 0~127 Adjusts the amount of delay feedback.
Chorus
Parameter Setting Explanation
Chorus Switch O, On
Select O if you don’t need any chorus
eect.
Chorus Type
1: Chorus1,
2: Chorus2,
3: Chorus3,
4: Flanger,
5: GM2Chorus,
6: Delay
This parameter allows you to select one
of the twelve eects types, one of which
is actually a delay eect.
Chorus Edit
The parameters to assign depend on
the Chorus Type that you selected. See
below.
Chorus Edit “1: Chorus1” ~ “4: Flanger” Types
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Output level of the chorus signal.
Output Select
Main, Rev,
Main+Rev
Allows you to specify where the
processor’s output signal should go: to
the OUTPUT “Main”, the Reverb processor
(“Rev”) or both (“Main+Rev”). The latter
two options mean that the chorus signal
is also processed by the reverb eect
you select
Filter Type OFF, LPF, HPF
This allows you to specify whether or not
the incoming signal should be ltered
before being processed by the chorus.
This may be helpful to avoid a cluttered
sound image or to preserve the “punch
of bass signals. Select “OFF” if you
don’t need any ltering. “LPF” cuts the
frequency range above the “Cuto
Freq”. “HPF” cuts the frequency range
below the “Cuto Freq”.
Cuto Freq 200~8000Hz
Basic frequency of the lter. This has no
eect if you select “OFF” as lter type.
Pre Delay 0.0~100.0 ms
Adjusts the delay time from the direct
sound until the chorus sound is heard.
Rate Sync Hz, Note
Use this parameter to specify whether
(“Note”) or not (“Hz”) the modulation
rate should be synchronized to the
Arranger or Recorder tempo.
Depending on your choice, the setting
range of the following parameter refers
to a speed (Hz) or a note value.
Rate Hz 0.05~10.00Hz
Species the modulation speed. This
can be either a frequency (Hz) or a
note value, depending on how you set
the “Rate Sync” parameter above. T”
means “triplet and a . refers to a dotted
note. “2/1” means that each cycle takes
two measures/bars. The advantage of
working with a note value is that the
chorus will undulate in sync with the
current Arranger or Recorder tempo.
Rate Note
1/64T, 1/64, 1/
32T, 1/32, 1/
16T, 1/32., 1/
16, 1/8T, 1/16.,
1/8, 1/4T, 1/8.,
1/4, 1/2 T, 1/4.,
1/2, 1/1 T, 1/2.,
1/1, 2/1 T, 1/1.,
2/1
Depth 0~127
This parameter sets the depth at which
the chorus sound is modulated. Higher
values result in a more pronounced
modulation.
Phase 0~180 deg
Spatial spread of the sound (i.e. the
“stereoness” of the eect).
Chorus Edit “1: Chorus1” ~ “4: Flanger” Types
Parameter Setting Explanation
Feedback 0~127
This parameter sets the level at which
the chorus sound is re-input (fed back)
into the chorus. By using Feedback, a
denser Chorus sound can be created.
Higher values result in a greater
feedback level.
Chorus Edit “5: GM2Chorus” Type
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Output level of the chorus signal.
Output Select
Main, Rev,
Main+Rev
Allows you to specify where the
processor’s output signal should go: to
the OUTPUT “Main”, the Reverb processor
(“Rev”) or both (“Main+Rev”). The latter
two options mean that the chorus signal
is also processed by the reverb eect
you select
Pre LPF 0~7
Cuts the high frequency range of
the sound coming into the chorus.
Higher values will cut more of the high
frequencies.
Level 0~127 Output level of the chorus signal
Feedback 0~127
Adjusts the amount of the chorus sound
that is fed back into the eect.
Delay 0~127
Adjusts the delay time from the direct
sound until the chorus sound is heard.
Rate 0~127
This parameter sets the speed
(frequency) at which the chorus sound is
modulated.
Higher values result in faster modula-
tion.
Depth 0~127
This parameter sets the depth at which
the chorus sound is modulated.
Higher values result in a more
pronounced modulation.
Reverb Send 0~127
This parameter sets the amount of
chorus sound that is sent to the Reverb
processor.
The value “127” eectively allows you to
connect the chorus and reverb eects in
series (Chorus before Reverb).
If you do not want the chorus signal to
be processed by the
Reverb eect, set this value to “0”.
Chorus Edit “6: Delay Type
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127 Output level of the chorus signal.
Output Select
Main, Rev,
Main+Rev
Allows you to specify where the
processor’s output signal should go: to
the OUTPUT “Main”, the Reverb processor
(“Rev”) or both (“Main+Rev”). The latter
two options mean that the chorus signal
is also processed by the reverb eect
you select
L Delay Sync msec, Note
Use this parameter to specify whether
(“Note”) or not (“msec”) the delay time
should be synchronized to the tempo.
Depending on your choice, the setting
range of the following parameter refers
to a time (msec) or a note value.
Menu options
134
Chorus Edit “6: Delay Type
Parameter Setting Explanation
L Delay msec 0~1000m
Species the delay time. This can be
either a time value (“msec”) or a note
value, depending on how you set the
“Delay Sync” parameter above. T” means
“triplet” and a . refers to a dotted note.
“2/1” means that each repetition comes
after two measures/bars. The advantage
of working with a note value is that the
delay eect always runs in sync with the
current tempo.
L Delay Note
1/64T, 1/64,
1/32T, 1/32,
1/16T, 1/32.,
1/16, 1/8T,
1/16., 1/8,
1/4T, 1/8., 1/4,
1/2T, 1/4., 1/2,
1/1T, 1/2., 1/1,
2/1T, 1/1., 2/1
L Level 0~127
Volume of each delay line (there are
three – left, center and right).
HF Damp
200~8000Hz,
Bypass
Adjusts the frequency above which
sound fed back to the eect will be cut. If
you do not want to cut the high frequen-
cies, set this parameter to BYPASS.
C Delay Sync See “L Delay Sync”
C Delay msec See “L Delay msec”
C Delay Note See “L Delay Note
C Level See “L Level”
C Feedback –98~+98%
Adjusts the proportion of the delay
sound that is fed back into the eect.
Negative (–) settings invert the phase.
R Delay Sync See “L Delay Sync”
R Delay msec See “L Delay msec”
R Delay Note See “L Delay Note
R Level See “L Level”
Upper1, Upper2, Lower, MBass
For each keyboard part you can choose which MFX (Mfx1, Mfx2)
processor should act. Select “O for parts that don’t need to be
processed by this Mfx.
Parameter Setting
Upper1
O, Mfx1, Mfx2
Upper2
Lower
M.Bass
Organ Commons
This page allows you to make additional detailed settings for the
tonewheel organ.
It can be selected using [MENU] button “Performance Edit”
“Organ Commons” or pressing and holding the [HARM. BAR].
Right Display
Organ Volume
Use this parameter to set the organ volume.
Parameter Setting
Organ Volume 0~127
Organ Reverb Send
Use this parameter to set the reverb send level.
Parameter Setting
Organ Reverb Send 0~127
On Click
Volume of noise when you press a key
Parameter Setting
On Click 0~31
O Click
Volume of noise when you release a key
Parameter Setting
O Click 0~31
PercSoftLevel
For details for each “Percussion” parameter, refer to “Organ eects”
(p. 32).
Parameter Setting
PercSoftLevel 0~15
PercNormalLevel
Parameter Setting
PercNormalLevel 0~15
PercSlowTime
Parameter Setting
PercSlowTime 0~127
PercFastTime
Parameter Setting
PercFastTime 0~127
PercRecharge
Parameter Setting
PercRecharge 0~10
PercHBarLevel
Parameter Setting
PercHBarLevel 0~127
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
135
Percussion N/S (Normal/Soft)
You can enable the Percussion Soft in the Organ Parameters page
also. See “Organ eects” (p. 32).
Parameter Setting
Perc N/S NORM, SOFT
NOTA
The volume when percussion is softened (On) can be adjusted
by the “PercSoftLevel” (p. 134).
Leakage
You can adjust the TONE WHEEL Leakage in the Organ Parameters
page also. See “Organ eects” (p. 32)
Parameter Setting
Leakage 0~127
VibCho Switch
You can apply vibrato or chorus to the organ sound.
You can switch the vibrato or chorus in the Organ Parameters page
also. See “Organ eects” (p. 32)
Parameter Setting
VibCho Switch O, On
NOTA
Vibrato and chorus will not apply to the percussion sound.
VibCho Type
You can change the Vibrato or Chorus type
You can change the vibrato or chorus type in the Organ Parameters
page also. See “Organ eects” (p. 32)
Parameter Setting
VibCho Type V-1, V-2, V-3, C-1, C-2, C-3
VibCho Vintage
Tonewheel used in tonewheel organs of 1950, 1960, 1970.
Parameter Setting
VibCho Vintage ‘50, ‘60, ‘70
Rot Switch
Enable or disable the rotary.
Parameter Setting
Rot Switch O, On
Rot Speed
Change the speeds of the Rotary eect.
Parameter Setting
Rot Speed Slow/ Fast
Rot WF Spread, Rot TW Spread
In the “Spread” parameters you can specify the amount by which
the sound will appear to be spread to left and right by the rotation
of the speaker.
• Woofer (WF): Rotary Woofer Spread
• Tweeter (TW): Rotary Tweeter Spread
Parameter Setting
Rot WF Spread, Rot TW Spread 0~10
Rot WF Level, Rot TW Level
Parameter Setting
Rot WF Level, Rot TW Level 0~127
Rot WF Rise Time, Rot TW Rise Time
Parameter Setting
Rot WF Rise Time, Rot TW Rise Time 0~127
Rot WF Fall Time
Parameter Setting
Rot WF Fall Time 0~127
Rot TW Fall Time
Parameter Setting
Rot TW Fall Time 0~127
Rot WF Speed Slow, Rot TW Speed Slow
Parameter Setting
Rot WF Speed Slow, Rot TW Speed Slow 0~127
Rot WF Speed Fast, Rot TW Speed Fast
Parameter Setting
Rot WF Speed Fast, Rot TW Speed Fast 0~127
Rot Mic Distance
Distance between speaker and microphone
The distance between the speaker and the microphone will aect
the depth of the modulation.
Parameter Setting
Rot Mic Distance 0~10
Rot Speed Rand
Inconsistency of the speakers rotation.
Depending on the condition of the rotary speaker, the speaker’s
rotation might not be perfectly consistent, and this can create
distinctive sounds.
Parameter Setting
Rot Speed Rand 0~10
Eq Bass Gain
The BK-9 contains a three-band organ equalizer.
Parameter Setting
Eq Bass Gain -5–0–+5 (dB)
Eq Middle Gain
The BK-9 contains a three-band organ equalizer.
Menu options
136
Parameter Setting
Eq Middle Gain -5–0–+5 (dB)
Eq Treble Gain
The BK-9 contains a three-band organ equalizer.
Parameter Setting
Eq Treble Gain -5–0–+5 (dB)
Amp Type
The BK-9 also faithfully simulates the amp that is combined with the
rotary speaker. The BK-9 simulates ve dierent amp types, allowing
you to produce various kinds of distortion.
This parameter can changed in the Organ Parameters page also.
See “Organ eects” (p. 32)
Parameter Setting
Amp Type TYPE 1~TYPE 5
• TYPE 1: A rotary speaker often used in jazz performance.
• TYPE 2: A large stack-type vacuum tube amp often used in
British hard rock of the 1970’s and still used by hard rock
guitarists today.
• TYPE 3: A rotary speaker often used in rock performance.
• TYPE 4: A rotary speaker with distortion.
• TYPE 5: A rotary speaker for which the volume cannot be
changed signicantly using the gain.
Overdrive
A value toward 127 raise the gain, adding distortion to the sound.
This parameter can be changed in the Organ Parameters page also.
See “Organ eects” (p. 32)
Parameter Setting
Overdrive 0~127
Ring Mod Switch
The Ring Modulator simulates a circuit that produces an unpitched
metallic sound by varying the frequency of the ring modulators
internal oscillator.
In hard rock of the past, some organ players applied aggressive
eects such as a ring modulator to their organ in order to compete
with the aggressive playing of the electric guitarist.
A ring modulator is an eect that generates complex overtones
that are not found in the original sound. These complex overtones
create a metallic-sounding resonance.
The word “ring” comes from the ring-shaped circuit that is formed
when a ring modulator is constructed using analog components.
Parameter Setting
Ring Mod Switch O, On
Ring Mod Freq
Parameter Setting
Ring Mod Freq 0~127
Split
This page allows you to set two keyboard-related parameters. It can
be selected using [MENU] button “Performance Edit “Split”.
For detail see “Play Dierent Voices with the Left and Right Hands
(Split)” (p. 32).
Right Display
MEMO
This page can also be selected by pressing and holding the
[SPLIT] button.
Split Point
The “Split Point” parameter allows you to set the split point.
Parameter Setting
Split Point F1~F#7
TIPS
Selecting the “Split Point” eld and after pushing the dial, you
can set the split point by simply pressing the corresponding key
on the keyboard.
Lower Hold
This parameter allows you to set the Hold function for the Lower
part.
Parameter Setting
Lower Hold O, On
If you set this parameter to “On”, the notes of the Lower part go on
sounding until you play other notes in the left keyboard area. (This
function is only available while the [SPLIT] button lights.)
If you select “O, the Lower part stops sounding as soon as you
release all keys in the left area.
Key
This function allows you to transpose the BK-9’s pitch in semi-tone steps.
Depending on the mode setting, this transposition applies to all sections
or just a specic section.
It can be selected using [MENU] button “Performance Edit” “Key. See
Transposing to a Dierent Key” (p. 52) .
Right Display
TIPS
Pressing and holding the [KEY] button locks this parameter and
keeps it from changing when you select Performance memories.
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
137
Key
Allows you to set the desired transposition interval.
Each value represents a semi-tone step. Select “0” if no transposition
is required.
Parameter Setting
Key –6~0~+5
If the “Key setting diers from “0”, the [KEY] button indicator lights.
Mode
Allows you to specify which sections should be transposed by the
“Key” parameter.
Parameter Setting
Mode Song, Keyboard, Song+Keyboard
• “Song”: Only song playback is transposed.
• “Keyboard”: Only the notes you play on the keyboard are
transposed. (This also aects the chord information transmitted
to the Arranger.)
• “Song+Keyboard”: Both song playback and the keyboard parts
are transposed. Rhythm playback is also transposed.
‘Rhythm Parts’ parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] button “Performance
Edit” “Rhythm Parts”.
MEMO
You can easy adjust the Volume and set Mute/Solo for each the
Rhythm part by a twice pressing of [MIXER] button.
See “Setting the Volume of the Real-Time Parts or Rhythm Parts
(Mixer)” (p. 33).
Right Display
The parameters of this function group apply to the eight Automatic
Accompaniment parts (i.e. the parts used to play back the selected
rhythm).
1. Use the dial to select in the rst eld the rhythm part you
want to edit (ADrum, ABass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc4,
Acc5, Acc6).
The display shows the settings for the selected part.
2. Select and set the desired parameter(s). See “Browsing
Windows and Setting Parameter Values” (p. 26).
The following parameters are available:
Mute
Allows you to mute the selected part, so that it is no longer audible.
Parameter Setting
Mute O, On
Solo
Allows you to solo the selected part, which means that all other
rhythm parts are switched o.
Parameter Setting
Solo O, On
Volume
Adjusts the volume of the selected rhythm part.
Selecting “0” means that the part is question is no longer audible.
Parameter Setting
Volume 0~127
Exp. Pedal
Select “O if you don’t need pedal expression for the selected part.
This means that the rhythm part in question no longer responds
to an expression pedal you may have connected to the PEDAL
EXPRESSION jack.
Parameter Setting
Exp. Pedal O, On
Exp.Pedal AllParts On
If you are not sure which rhythm parts still receive expression
messages, and if you want all to receive them, you can select this
eld and push the dial.
Exp.Pedal AllParts O
If you are not sure which rhythm parts still receive expression
messages, and if no rhythm part should receive them, you can
select this eld and push the dial.
Arranger Setting’ parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] button “Performance
Edit” Arranger Setting.
Right Display
The parameters of this function group apply to the Arranger as a
whole and allow you to ne-tune its behavior.
Zone
When you press the [SPLIT] button, the selected rhythm pattern is
controlled by the chords you play in the left half of the keyboard.
You can also tell the Arranger to scan another part of the keyboard
for usable chords. Though “Left” is probably the most popular
setting, you could select “Right to have the Arranger scan the right
half of the keyboard.
Select “O if you only need the drum part of the selected rhythm
and no melodic accompaniment parts (ABass, ACC1~6).
Switch o the [SPLIT] button if the Arranger should scan the entire
keyboard (“Whole”).
Menu options
138
The range of the left and right keyboard areas depends on the “Split
Point” setting (p. 136).
Parameter Setting
Zone O, Right, Left, Whole
Type
Another important choice is how you want to transmit note
information to the Rhythm playback.
Parameter Setting
Type Standard, Pianist1, Pianist2, Intelligent, Easy
• “Standard”: This is the normal chord recognition mode.
• “Pianist1”: In this mode, the BK-9 only recognizes chords that
consist of at least three notes. Playing only two notes will not
cause the rhythms key to change.
• “Pianist2”: Same as “Pianist1” while the Hold pedal is not
pressed. If you press the Hold pedal, the BK-9 even recognizes
chords” when you press only one note. If the hold pedal is still
pressed, chord recognition continues up to a maximum of 5
played keys.
• “Intelligent”: Select this option when you want the chord
recognition function to supply the missing notes of the chords
you play.
• “Easy”: This is another “intelligent” chord ngering system. It
works as follows:
Chord Type Action
Major chords
Press the key that corresponds to the chord’s
fundamental.
Minor chords
Fundamental + any black key to the left of the
fundamental.
Seventh chords
Fundamental + any white key to the left of the
fundamental.
Minor seventh
chords
Fundamental + any black key to the left + any white
key to the left.
Arranger Hold
This function sustains the notes you play in the chord recognition
area (“Zone”). Select “O if you want the accompaniment to stop
as soon as the keys in that zone are released. This parameter is
switched “On by default.
Parameter Setting
Arranger Hold O, On
Tempo
Each rhythm has a preset tempo that is recalled when a rhythm is
selected. This parameter allows you to specify if and when the BK-9
should ignore the preset tempo and go on using the tempo of the
previously selected rhythm.
Parameter Setting
Tempo Preset, Auto, Lock
Here is what these three options mean:
Setting
Selecting a new rhythm
Playback is stopped Playback is running
Preset The rhythm’s preset tempo is loaded.
Setting
Selecting a new rhythm
Playback is stopped Playback is running
Auto
The BK-9 loads the
preset tempo of the
new rhythm
The BK-9 doesn’t load the
preset tempo of the new
rhythm.
The new rhythm is played at
the current tempo.
Lock
The BK-9 doesn’t load
the preset tempo of
the new rhythm. It is
played at the current
tempo.
NOTE
The setting of this parameter is neither saved to the
Performance memories, nor to the Global area. See “Save Global”
(p. 148). The “Lock setting can also be activated by pressing
and holding the [TAP TEMPO] button.
HalfBar On Fill In
When this parameter is “On”, the length of the Fill-Ins, which are
played when the [AUTO FILL IN] button lights, is halved.
Parameter Setting
HalfBar On Fill In O, On
Certain pop songs in 4/4 contain bars that only last two beats.
The usual place for such a bar is between the rst and the second
verse. Another favorite position for “halved” bars is at the end of a
chorus or the bridge. Your BK-9 allows you to faithfully reproduce
these “anomalies using this function. This does not change rhythm
playback right away. Only when another VARIATION pattern starts
will the “HalfBar On Fill In function be activated and play half the
number of beats of the accompaniment pattern you selected.
Fill Ritardando
This function is suitable for ballads. It causes the next Fill-In to slow
down (“ritardando”). See Tempo Change Fill Rit below for how to
set how strongly the tempo should be decreased.
Parameter Setting
Fill Ritardando O, On
As the name implies, it is only available while the [AUTO FILL-IN]
button lights.
a. Set “Fill Ritardando to “On.
b. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ] button to start rhythm playback.
c. Press a VARIATION [1]~[4] button.
The BK-9 plays a Fill-In. The tempo slows down while the ll is being
played. At the end of the ll, the rhythm returns to the previously
set tempo (this is called a tempo”).
TempoCh Acc/Rit, TempoCh CPT, TempoCh Fill Rit
The TermpoCh Acc/Rit parameter allows you to speed up or slow
down the rhythm tempo by the amount you set here. To use these
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
139
functions, you must assign them to an optional pedal switch (p.
144).
There are three Ritardando functions: one for all rhythm patterns,
one for Ending patterns and one for ll-ins (see “Fill Ritardando
above). They all use the Tempo Change” settings on the following
page.
Parameter Setting
TempoCh Acc/Rit 5%~92%
TempoCh CPT 0~3825
TempoCh Fill Rit 5%~92%
TempoCh Acc/Rit”: Allows you to set the degree (ratio) by which
the tempo changes when the Acceler” or “Ritard” function is
triggered. Example: if the tempo is currently= 100, the value “20%”
means that the tempo drops to = 80 or rises to = 120
TempoCh CPT”: Use this parameter to specify how long a
ritardando/accelerando should take. In most cases, 480 CPT (i.e. one
measure) is probably the most musical choice.
TempoCh Fill Rit”: This parameter allows you to specify to what
extent ll-in playback should be slowed down when the “Fill
Ritardando function is on.
Using the Ritardando/Accelerando functions
For general applications (any rhythm division) proceed as follows:
a. Assign the Arr Rit” or Arr Acc” function to an optional
pedal switch (p. 144).
b. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ] button to start rhythm
playback.
c. Press the assigned pedal switch.
For Ritardandos that apply to Ending patterns proceed as follows:
a. Press the [START/STOP] / [ */, ] button to start playback.
b. Press the [ENDING] button twice in succession (“double-
click”).
Dynamic Arranger
The DYNAMIC ARRANGER function allows you to control the
volume of the accompaniments parts via the way you strike the
keys in the chord recognition area (velocity sensitivity).
It can be selected using [MENU] button “Performance Edit”
“Dynamic Arranger.
Right Display
The following parameters can be edited:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Switch O, On
Enable or disable the Dynamic Arranger
function.
Parameter Setting Explanation
ADrum
-127 ~ +127
There are eight accompaniment parts:
ADrum (the drums), ABass (the bass)
and ACC1~6 (the melodic accompani-
ment parts).
Set the desired value with the dial or
the [DEC]/[INC] buttons.
You can specify positive and negative
sensitivity values.
Positive values mean that the volume
of the part in question increases when
you strike the chord recognition area
keys harder, while negative values
mean that the volume of the selected
accompaniment part increases as your
velocity becomes softer.
You could use extreme positive/nega-
tive “Acc” pairs (i.e. “127” and “–127”)
to alternate between those two lines
simply by varying your velocity. One
part would then only be audible when
you strike the keys softly, while the
other would only be triggered by high
velocity values.
Choose “0” for parts whose volume
should not be aected by your velocity
values.
Abass
Acc1
Acc2
Acc3
Acc4
Acc5
Acc6
.
Assign Switches
This page allows you to assign a function to the Assign Switches
two key. It can be selected using [MENU] button “Performance
Edit” Assign Switches”.
Right Display
The following functions can be assigned to [S1], [S2], [S3], [S4] buttons:
Function Explanation
O The button in question has no function at all.
SN Variation 1
Some SuperNATURAL instrument provides eective
performance variation sounds. You can use the “SN
Variation 1 “ and “SN Variation 2“ to switch instantly
between them as you play.
NOTE
It only works if a SuperNATURAL tone that provides
performance variation sounds is selected.
SN Variation 2
Rotary Slow/
Fast
Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the
Rotary eect. This only works if the Harmonic Bars
are being used by UPPER1, UPPER2, LOWER and/or
M.BASS.
Its indicators ashes according to the rotary speed.
Rotary On/O
Allows you to switch the Rotary eect on (rst time)
and o (second). This only works if the Harmonic Bars
or, organ tones that use the 9:Rotary and 57:VK Rotary
eects, are being used by UPPER1, UPPER2, LOWER
and/or M.BASS.
Rotary Brake Enable or disable the Rotary Brake function.
Menu options
140
Function Explanation
Percussion 2nd
Percussion of the same pitch as the 4’ harmonic bar
will be heard.
Percussion 3rd
Percussion of the same pitch as the 2-2/3’ harmonic
bar will be heard.
Vib-Chorus
On/O
You can apply vibrato or chorus to the organ sound.
Fade IN
“Fade In” is a function you may want to use occasion-
ally. While it is being performed, the Assigned Switch
ashes. Fading in means that the volume of both
the Rhythm and Keyboard parts gradually increases,
giving the impression that you have been playing for a
long time before what you play becomes audible. The
volume is automatically set to zero and then gradually
increased to the value specied with the [VOLUME]
knob. When the Fade In is completed, the indicator of
the Assigned Switch button goes dark.
To change the Fade In time duration see “Fade IN/OUT
Settings” (p. 148).
Fade OUT
“Fade Outs” are extremely popular in pop music and
the BK-9 allows you to end a song just like the original.
To do so, press the assigned Assign Switch button
(it ashes). The volume then gradually decreases until
it reaches zero (indicator goes dark).
To change the Fade Out time duration see “Fade IN/
OUT Settings” (p. 148).
Scale Upper
Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune (p. 140)
setting to the Upper parts.
Scale Lower
Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune setting to
the Lower part.
HalfBar on
Fill In
The Assign Switch button allows you to switch the Half
Bar function on and o. See “HalfBar On Fill In (p. 138)
Arr Hold
Allows you to switch the Arranger Hold function on
and o. See Arranger Hold” (p. 138).
Arr Chord O
Allows you to switch the chord recognition o, in
which case only the drum/percussion of the selected
Style keeps playing (or can be used).
Arr Rit Tempo
Allows you to start the Ritardando function. See “Fill
Ritardando” (p. 138).
Arr ACC Tempo Allows you to start the accelerando function.
Reset/Start
This function allows you have the rhythm start on the
rst beat of the currently selected Rhythm pattern
when you press the Assign Switch button. Use it when
you are accompanying a singer or soloist whose timing
is a little shaky and suddenly notice that the playback
lags one or two beats behind the singer/soloist.
Change UP2/1
Allows you to switch o the UPPER 1 part and activate
the UPPER 2 part – and vice versa.
NOTE
If neither [UPPER1] or [UPPER2] buttons are on when
you rst press the Assign Switch button, one of them
is activated.
MBass/KBD Arr
Allows you to set the “Zone” parameter to “O and, at
the same time, select the SPLIT Keyboard mode and
activate the Manual Bass part – and vice versa.
NOTE
If you switched on the Arranger Hold function (p.
138), the last recognized chord will go on sounding,
so that your Manual Bass part may drown in the
accompaniment. We therefore suggest you assign
the Arranger Hold” function (see above) to the other
Assign Switch button and use it to switch o the
Arranger Hold function, so that the Arranger only plays
the drum pattern of the selected Rhythm.
Piano/Standard
By pressing the Assign Switch button, you alternate
between the “Standard” and “Pianist2” Style Arranger
type (p. 138). When the former is selected, the chord
recognition area is automatically set to “Left“. When
you switch to Piano Style, the chord recognition area is
automatically set to “Whole”. Furthermore, the Upper 1
part is activated (if it was o).
Break Mute
This function can only be accessed via the Assign
Switch button you assign it to. When you press it,
Rhythm playback is muted for the remainder of the
current measure. This is great for rock’nroll songs.
Function Explanation
Lower Hold Allows you to set the Hold function for the Lower part.
Audio XFade
The Assign Switch can be used to activate a crossfade
between two les. To make this work, select a dierent
song while the current song is being played back and
press the Assign Switch button.
The BK-9 creates a brief blend between the current and
the next song (This function is only available between
two audio songs).
Unlock All
Use this function to unlock in one shot all lters
acting when changing performances. See “Filtering
Performance Memories Settings (Lock function)” (p.
63).
Scale Tune Switch
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button
“Performance Edit” “Scale Tune Switch.
Right Display
Parameter Setting Explanation
Upper1 O, On
Select On” if the “Scale Tune” settings (see
below) should apply to the Upper1 and
Melody Intell parts.
Upper2 O, On
Select On” if the “Scale Tune” settings (see
below) should apply to the Upper2.
Lower O, On
Select On” if the “Scale Tune” settings (see
below) should apply to the Lower part.
Rhythm O, On
Select On” if the “Scale Tune” settings (see
below) should apply to the rhythm parts.
Scale Tune
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button
“Performance Edit” “Scale Tune.
Right Display
This parameter allows you to change the tuning of all notes of one
octave, which may come in handy to create oriental tunings.
‘Performance Edit’ parameters
141
Parameter Setting Explanation
C ~ B
(each note can be set
individually)
-64~0~+63
Changes the pitch of the notes
C~B in steps of 1 cent. The value
that you specify is applied to
all notes of the same name. If
you change the tuning of the
“C”, that value is added to, or
subtracted from, all Cs (C1, C2,
C3, etc.). (“–50” means that the
note in question is tuned a
quarter tone down.)
C Switch ~ B Switch O, On
“O:
The note is not detuned.
“On” :
The corresponding note is
detuned at the value you
specied (-64~0~+63)
‘Melody Intelligent parameters
This function group can be selected using [MENU] button
“Performance Edit “Melody Intelligent or by pressing and
holding the [MELODY INTELL] button.
Right Display
The following parameters are available:
Switch
Select “On” if you want to add a MELODY INTELL part.
This part is triggered by the chord recognition of the BK-9’s
Automatic Accompaniment and plays automatic harmonies that are
added to the melody that you are playing using the Upper 1 part.
You can choose from among 18 harmony types (see below).
Parameter Setting
Switch O, On
MEMO
This “Switch parameter can also be assigned to an optional
pedal switch. See “Pedal Switch and Pedal Control” (p. 144).
Type
Allows you to select one of the 18 harmony types:
Parameter Setting
Type
1:Duet, 2:Organ 3:Combo, 4:Strings, 5:Choir, 6:Block,
7:Big Band, 8:Country, 9:Traditional, 10:Brodway,
11:Gospel, 12:Romance, 13:Latin, 14:Country Guitar,
15:Country Ballad, 16:Waltz Organ, 17:Octave Type1,
18:Octave Type2
2nd Tone
Depending on the selected Type setting, a second harmony is
added to the “Melody Intelligent” part. If you like, you can select the
desired Tone for the second harmony voice using this parameter.
Parameter Setting
2nd The Tone of the selected family
Intell Threshold
This value represents the lowest velocity value (between “0” and
“127”) of the Upper 1 part that triggers the “Melody Intelligent” part.
If you don’t need this switching function, select “0”.
Parameter Setting
Intell Threshold 0~127
Level
Allows you to set the level of the “Melody Intelligent” part to ensure
that the harmonies blend in with the rest.
Parameter Setting
Level 0~127
Expression Pedal
This parameter allows you to specify whether or not the “Melody
Intelligent” part should respond to movements of the optional
expression pedal you connected, and change its volume
accordingly.
Parameter Setting
Expression Pedal O, On
Hold Pedal
This parameter allows you to specify whether or not the “Melody
Intelligent” part’s notes can be held with the pedal switch
connected to the PEDAL HOLD/SWITCH socket.
Parameter Setting
Hold Pedal Auto, On, O
• “Auto means that the “Melody Intelligent” part only responds
to Hold messages if it is assigned to the right half (Split) or the
entire keyboard.
• “On means that the “Melody Intelligent” part always responds
to Hold messages, even if it is assigned to the left half of the
keyboard.
• “O means that the “Melody Intelligent” part does not respond
to Hold messages.
Bender Assign
This parameter allows you to specify how the Melody Intelligent”
part should respond to Pitch Bend messages.
Parameter Setting
Bender Assign Auto, On, O
• “Auto means that the “Melody Intelligent” part only responds
to Pitch Bend messages if it is assigned to the right half (Split) or
the entire keyboard.
• “On means that the “Melody Intelligent” part always responds
to Pitch Bend messages, even if it is assigned to the left half of
the keyboard.
• “O means that the “Melody Intelligent” part does not respond
to Pitch Bend messages.
Bender Range
This parameter sets the pitch interval, i.e. the value that will be used
when the BENDER/MODULATION lever is pushed all the way to the
left or right.
Menu options
142
Parameter Setting
Bender Ramge 0~24
Modulation Assign
This parameter allows you to specify how the Melody Intelligent”
should respond to Modulation messages (CC01).
Parameter Setting
Modulation Assign Auto, On, O
• “Auto means that the “Melody Intelligent” part only responds to
Modulation messages if it is assigned to the right half (Split) or
the entire keyboard.
• “On means that the “Melody Intelligent” part always responds
to Modulation messages, even if it is assigned to the left half of
the keyboard.
• “O means that the “Melody Intelligent” part does not respond
to Modulation messages.
See “Using the ‘Melody Intell(igent)’ Function (p. 52).
D Beam
See “Using the D-BEAM Controller” (p. 53).
MIDI Set Link
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button
“Performance Edit” “MIDI Set Link.
This parameter allows you to link a User MIDI Set to the
Performance memory.
There are eight User MIDI Set memories (User1~User8). For details
see “MIDI Parameters” (p. 151).
If you use the BK-9 in dierent MIDI environments (studio, live,
band), preparing a series of User MIDI Sets and linking them to the
Performance memories you usually use in the studio, on stage, etc.,
can be a time saver.
MEMO
If you do not want to load a User MIDI Set when you recall a
Performance memory, you can lter it using the “Performance
Hold” parameter. In this way the current MIDI Set remains as is.
See “Performance Hold” (p. 144).
Parameter Setting
MIDI Set Link O, User1~User8
Select the User MIDI Set (User1~User8) you want to link to the
Performance memory and then press the [WRITE] button to save
the Performance memory. For more details see “Saving your
Settings as a Performance” (p. 59).
Select “O if you desire to break the link to the User MIDI Set. Save
the Performance memory.
Save As Default
This function allows you to save the current “Performance Edit
settings as default settings. These settings are loaded each time you
switch on the BK-9.
This function can be selected using [MENU] button “Performance
Edit” “Save As Default”.
Right Display
1. Rotate the dial to select “YES”, then push the dial to dene
the current settings as the default state.
The display shows a conrmation message.
If you don’t want to dene the current settings as the default state,
rotate the dial to select “NO, then push it.
The BK-9 then returns to the “Performance Edit” page.
Global’ parameters
The settings of the “Global” parameters can be saved to the BK-9s
global memory. If you don’t save them, your changes are lost when
you switch o the BK-9.
See “Save Global” (p. 148) for how to save these settings.
Right Display
Display Contrast
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button Global”
“Display Contrast”.
It is used to change the contrast of the BK-9’s display in case you
nd it dicult to read.
Parameter Setting
Display Contrast 1~10
Display Brightness
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button Global”
“Display Brightness”.
It is used to change the brightness of the BK-9’s display in case you
nd it dicult to read
Parameter Setting
Display Brightness 1~10
‘Global’ parameters
143
Tuning
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button Global”
Tuning.
This parameter allows you to tune your BK-9 to acoustic instruments
that cannot be tuned. The default is 440.0Hz.
Parameter Setting
Tuning 415.3~466.2Hz
Utility
The “Utility parameters are found on the display page that can be
selected using [MENU] button “Global” “Utility”.
Right Display
The following table shows the utility parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
SMF Quick Start
O, 2nd Bar,
1st Note
O”: Playback starts at the very
beginning of the song le (which
may contain a few silent bars).
2nd Bar”: Causes playback to start
from measure 2 of the selected
Standard MIDI File.
1st Note”: This is basically the same
as the above, except that playback
starts on the rst note of the selected
song.
Perform Next
Song
O, On
At the end of the current song, the next
song in the Performance List starts
automatically.
If the Performance List step refers
to a rhythm, the rhythm in question
is loaded, but you will need to start
manually by pressing the [START/STOP]
button.
UP EQ/MFX Link O, On
If you select “on, theBK-9 selects
suitable Mfx and equalizer settings
for each Tone you assign to the Upper
parts.
Rec Mode MIDI, Audio
MIDI”: Use this setting if you want to
record a song as MIDI data.
Audio”: Use this setting if you want
to record a song as Audio data.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Audio REC
Routing
Normal,
Audio In, Solo
Normal”: This setting allows you to
record everything BK-9 can transmit
to its audio OUTPUT jacks.
Audio In”: Use this setting if you
connected the master outputs of an
external mixing console to the BK-9’s
Audio INPUT jacks and you want to
record your band or the signals of
an additional accordion, synthesizer,
piano, drum machine, etc., as well.
NOTE
Using this setting the Audio In
signal is not transmit to audio
OUTPUT jacks and PHONES output.
Solo”: This setting allows you to
record everything BK-9 can transmit
to its audio OUTPUT jacks except
for the audio signal generated
by the internal playback of Audio
Backing (mp3, WAVE) and Audio Key
functions.
Rec Audio Level
–24, –18, –12,
–6, +0 dB
Allows you to set the recording level for
your own performances. See “Record-
ing your Performance as Audio Data”
(p. 75). The setting of the [VOLUME]
knob does not aect the recording
level. (Default setting: +0 dB)
Rec Audio Sync O, On
O”: Choose this setting when
you want to start recording before
starting rhythm or song playback.
On”: Choose this setting when you
want to be able to start recording
simultaneously with rhythm/song
playback. When you choose this
setting, pressing the [SONG REC]
button will stop both playback and
the recorder.
Audio In Center
Canc
O, On
Select On” if the “Center Cancel”
function (see p. 46) should also aect
the signals received via the INPUT jacks.
USB Driver
Generic,
Original
Generic”: Choose this if you want
to use the standard USB driver that
was included with your computer.
Normally, you should use this mode.
Original”: Choose this if you want to
use a USB driver downloaded from
the Roland website (www.roland.
com).
Recall MIDI Set
O, Key/
Rhythm, PK
Series, Song,
User1~User8,
This parameter selects the MIDI Set
whose settings are loaded when the
BK-9 is switched on. See “Loading a
MIDI Set” (p. 152).
Auto O*
O,
10 (5)
30 (15)
240 (30)
This parameter allows you to cause
the BK-9 to switch itself o after the
selected number of minutes has
elapsed if you are not using it.
The default setting is “30”.
Select O if you prefer not to use this
function.
The values in parentheses indicate
when the pop-up countdown appears.
Visual Ctrl Mode MVC, V-LINK
This parameter allows you to select
the visual control mode. The option
to select depends on the messages
supported by the external device: MIDI
Visual Control (MVC) or V-LINK.
Version Info n.nn
Shows the version number of the BK-9’s
operating system
[*] When the BK-9 has been switched o by this function, you need
to press the [POWER] button, wait a few seconds, then press the
button again to switch the BK-9 back on. (Do not switch it on too
quickly.)
Menu options
144
Mic Settings
This page can be selected using [MENU] button “Global” “MIC
Settings”.
Right Display
The BK-9 provides an equalizer you can set for the MIC IN input.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Eq Low Freq
50 Hz, 80 Hz, 100
Hz, 150 Hz, 200
Hz, 250 Hz, 300 Hz,
400 Hz
Frequency of the low range you wish to
boost or cut.
Eq Low Gain -15 db~0~+15 db
Gain of the low range. Negative values
reduce the level
Eq High Freq
2000 Hz, 3000 Hz,
4000 Hz, 5000 Hz,
6000 Hz, 7000 Hz,
8000 Hz, 9000 Hz,
10000 Hz, 11000
Hz, 12000 Hz,
Frequency of the high range you wish
to boost or cut.
Eq High Gain -15 db~0~+15 db
Gain of the high range. Negative values
reduce the level.
One Touch Hold
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button Global”
“One Touch Hold”.
Right Display
The parameters on this page allow you to lter certain “One Touch”
settings. Select “On for the settings you do not want to load along
with the remaining One Touch settings when you press a ONE
TOUCH button.
Parameter Setting
Tempo O, On
Tone Part* O, On
Intro/Ending O, On
Variation O, On
Expression Pedal O, On
Assign Switches O, On
DBeam O, On
Bass Inversion O, On
Parameter Setting
Scale Tune O, On
[*] This parameter lters also the “Lower Hold” parameter (p. 136).
Performance Hold
This page can be selected using [MENU] button “Global”
“Performance Hold”.
Right Display
The parameters on this page allow you to lter certain Performance
settings. Select “On for the settings you do not want to load
along with the remaining settings when you select a Performance
memory.
Parameter Setting
Rhythm* O, On
Tempo* O, On
Expression Pedal O, On
Assign Switches O, On
DBeam O, On
Tone*
1
O, On
Tone Part*
2
O, On
Split O, On
Lower Octave O, On
Arr. Type O, On
Key* O, On
MIDI Set O, On
Bass Inversion O, On
Scale Tune O, On
[*
1
] These parameters can also be switched by pressing and holding
the assigned buttons on the front panel.
[*
2
] This parameter lters also the “Lower Hold” parameter (p. 136).
Pedal Switch and Pedal Control
You can connect two types of Pedal Switch to the BK-9’s PEDAL
CONTROL jack (Not Continuous or Continuos).
The “Not Continuous pedal (e. g. DP-2) has only two states: O and
On.
The “Continuous pedal (e. g. DP-10) has more states between On/
o.
The BK-9 recognizes the type of pedal switch you connect to the
PEDAL CONTROL jack:
Pedal Switch Jack Type How BK-9 recognize the pedal switch
Mono Type: Not Continuous
Stereo Type: Continuous
‘Global’ parameters
145
The function that you can assign changes depending on the pedal
you connect.
If You Connect a Pedal Switch (Not Continuous)
This page can be selected using [MENU] button “Global” “Pedal
Switch.
If you connected a pedal switch (e. g. DP-2) to the PEDAL CONTROL
jack, the BK-9 shows the following page to assign a function:
Right Display
If you do not change the factory setting, the pedal switch is
assigned to the “Start/Stop function.
The following table shows the functions you can assign to the Pedal
Switch.
Function Expanation
Start/Stop
Starts and stops rhythm or song playback. Same
function as the [START/STOP] button.
Intro
Same functions as the [INTRO], [ENDING], [VARIA-
TION1], [VARIATION2], [VARIATION3], [VARIATION4],
[BASS INV] buttons.
See “Using Rhythms” (p. 36).
Ending
Variation1
Variation2
Variation3
Variation4
Bass Inversion
Arranger Hold
Allows you to switch the Arranger Hold function on and
o. See Arranger Hold” (p. 138).
Arr. Chord
O
Allows you to switch the Arranger’s chord recognition
o, in which case only the drum/percussion part is
played.
HalfBar On Fill In
Allows you to switch the “Fill In Half Bar function on
and o. See “HalfBar On Fill In” (p. 138).
Break Mute
When you press the pedal switch, rhythm playback is
muted for the remainder of the current measure.
Reset/Start
This function allows you to have theBK-9 start on the
rst beat of the currently selected rhythm pattern when
you press the assigned pedal switch.
Use it when you are accompanying a singer or soloist
whose timing is a little shaky and suddenly notice that
the playback lags one or two beats behind the singer/
soloist.
Split
You can alternate between “Intelligent” and “Pianist2”
modes. When the former is selected, the chord recogni-
tion area is automatically set to “Left. When you switch
to “Pianist1” or “Pianist2”, the chord recognition area is
automatically set to “Whole”.
Scale Upper
Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune setting to
the Upper/Lower part. See “One Touch Hold” (p. 144).
Scale Lower
Change UP2/1
Allows you to switch o the Upper 1 part and activate
the Upper 2 part – and vice versa.
NOTE
If neither Upper 1 nor Upper 2 are on when you rst
press the pedal switch, one of them is activated.
Perf. Next
Allows you to select the next or previous Performance.
Perf. Prev
Function Expanation
Portamento
Pressing the pedal switch activates the “Portamento
Time setting. When the pedal switch is released, the
“Portamento Time setting is not used. To hear this
eect, you need to set a “Portamento Time value (p.
129).
Hold
The assigned pedal switch can be used as a Soft,
Sostenuto or Sustain (Hold pedal).
Soft
Sostenuto
Lower Hold
The pedal switch is assigned to the “Lower Hold”
function. See “Lower Hold” (p. 136).
Track Mute Same function as the [TRACK MUTE] button.
Audio XFade
The pedal switch can be used to activate a crossfade
between two les.
To make this work, select a dierent song while the
current song is being played back and press the pedal
switch.
The BK-9 creates a brief blend between the current and
the next song. (This function is only available between
two audio songs.)
Fade In
Fading in means that the volume of both the Rhythm
and Keyboard parts gradually increases, giving the
impression that you have been playing for a long time
before what you play becomes audible. The volume is
automatically set to zero and then gradually increased
to the value specied with the [VOLUME] knob.
To change the Fade In time duration see “Fade IN/OUT
Settings” (p. 148).
Fade Out
This function gradually decreases the volume until it
reaches zero. At that time, song or rhythm playback
stops automatically.
To change the Fade Out time duration see “Fade IN/
OUT Settings” (p. 148).
Melody Intell
Allows you to control the “Switch” parameter of the
“Melody Intelligent” function. See ‘Melody Intelligent’
parameters” (p. 141).
Mfx Switch
Allows you to switch the Mfx for the keyboard parts on
and o.
Arr. Rit Tempo
Allows you to activate the Arrangers “Tempo Change
Ritard” function. See TempoCh Acc/Rit, TempoCh CPT,
TempoCh Fill Rit (p. 138).
Arr. Acc Tempo
Allows you to activate the Arrangers “Tempo Change
Accel” function. See TempoCh Acc/Rit, TempoCh CPT,
TempoCh Fill Rit (p. 138).
Punch In/Out
The Pedal Switch can be used to activate and
switch o punch in/out recording using the BK-9’s
sequencer (p. 82).
Rot Slow/Fast
Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the
Rotary eect.
Rotary Brake
Enable or disable the Rotary Brake function for the
Harmonic Bars.
If You Connect a Pedal Control (Continuous)
This page can be selected using [MENU] button “Global” “Pedal
Control”.
If you connected a continuos (e. g. DP-10) or expression pedal to
the PEDAL CONTROL jack, the BK-9 shows the following page to
assign a function:
Menu options
146
Right Display
The following table shows the functions you can assign to the
pedal.
Function Explanation
MFX Control1 Same function assigned to the sliders. For the assigned
function please refer to the “Mfx(1) Controls or “Mfx(2)
Controls parameters in the “Mfx1” (p. 131) or “Mfx2”
(p. 132).
MFX Control2
CC1 Control
Same function assigned to the sliders. For the assigned
function please refer to the “Slider CC1, Slider CC2,
Slider CC3” (p. 130).
CC2 Control
CC3 Control
H.Bar Level Slider Assign (H.Bar Level)
This parameter can be selected using [MENU] button Global”
“H.Bar Level”.
Control” This parameter sets the “H.BAR Level” slider (Red slider) to
adjust either the overall organ volume level or the overdrive level.
Function Value Explanation
H:Bar Levlel
Volume
Set the “H.BAR Level” slider to adjust the
organ Volume level
Overdrive
Set the “H.BAR Level” slider to adjust the
organ Overdrive level
Pedal Controller FC-7
This page can be selected using [MENU] button “Global” “Pedal
Controller FC-7”.
Right Display
The BK-9 allows you to connect an optional FC-7 footswitch to the
FC-7 PEDAL socket.
At rst, the switches of this pedal board are assigned Backing
control functions. You can, however, assign other functions to these
switches.
The following table shows the functions you can assign to the FC-7
footswitch.
Function Expanation
Start/Stop
Starts and stops rhythm or song playback. Same
function as the [START/STOP] button.
Intro
Same functions as the [INTRO], [ENDING], [VARIA-
TION1], [VARIATION2], [VARIATION3], [VARIATION4],
[BASS INV] buttons.
See “Using Rhythms” (p. 36).
Ending
Variation1
Variation2
Variation3
Variation4
Bass Inversion
Arranger Hold
Allows you to switch the Arranger Hold function on and
o. See Arranger Hold” (p. 138).
Arr. Chord O
Allows you to switch the Arranger’s chord recognition
o, in which case only the drum/percussion part is
played.
HalfBar On Fill In
Allows you to switch the “Fill In Half Bar function on
and o. See “HalfBar On Fill In” (p. 138).
Break Mute
When you press the footswitch, rhythm playback is
muted for the remainder of the current measure.
Reset/Start
This function allows you to have theBK-9 start on the
rst beat of the currently selected rhythm pattern when
you press the assigned footswitch.
Use it when you are accompanying a singer or soloist
whose timing is a little shaky and suddenly notice that
the playback lags one or two beats behind the singer/
soloist.
Split
You can alternate between “Intelligent” and “Pianist2”
modes. When the former is selected, the chord recogni-
tion area is automatically set to “Left. When you switch
to “Pianist1” or “Pianist2”, the chord recognition area is
automatically set to “Whole”.
Scale Upper
Allows you to assign the selected Scale Tune setting to
the Upper part. See “One Touch Hold” (p. 144).
Scale Lower
Change UP2/1
Allows you to switch o the Upper 1 part and activate
the Upper 2 part – and vice versa.
NOTE
If neither Upper 1 nor Upper 2 are on when you rst
press the footswitch, one of them is activated.
Perf. Next
Allows you to select the next or previous Performance.
Perf. Prev
Portamento
Pressing the footswitch activates the “Portamento
Time setting. When the footswitch is released, the
“Portamento Time setting is not used. To hear this
eect, you need to set a “Portamento Time value (p.
129).
Hold
The assigned footswitch can be used as a Soft,
Sostenuto or Sustain (Hold pedal).
Soft
Sostenuto
‘Global’ parameters
147
Function Expanation
Lower Hold
The footswitch is assigned to the “Lower Hold” function.
See “Lower Hold” (p. 136).
Track Mute Same function as the [TRACK MUTE] button.
Audio XFade
The footswitch can be used to activate a crossfade
between two les.
To make this work, select a dierent song while the
current song is being played back and press the
footswitch.
The BK-9 creates a brief blend between the current and
the next song. (This function is only available between
two audio songs.)
Fade In
Fading in means that the volume of both the Rhythm
and Keyboard parts gradually increases, giving the
impression that you have been playing for a long time
before what you play becomes audible. The volume is
automatically set to zero and then gradually increased
to the value specied with the [VOLUME] knob.
To change the Fade In time duration see “Fade IN/OUT
Settings” (p. 148).
Fade Out
This function gradually decreases the volume until it
reaches zero. At that time, song or rhythm playback
stops automatically.
To change the Fade Out time duration see “Fade IN/
OUT Settings” (p. 148).
Melody Intell
Allows you to control the “Switch” parameter of the
“Melody Intelligent” function. See ‘Melody Intelligent’
parameters” (p. 141).
Mfx Switch
Allows you to switch the Mfx for the keyboard parts on
and o.
Arr. Rit Tempo
Allows you to activate the Arrangers “Tempo Change
Ritard” function. See TempoCh Acc/Rit, TempoCh CPT,
TempoCh Fill Rit (p. 138).
Arr. Acc Tempo
Allows you to activate the Arrangers “Tempo Change
Accel” function. See TempoCh Acc/Rit, TempoCh CPT,
TempoCh Fill Rit (p. 138).
Punch In/Out
The FC-7 can be used to activate and switch o
punch in/out recording using the BK-9’s sequencer
(p. 82).
Rotary Slow/Fast
Allows you to select the slow or fast speed of the
Rotary eect.
Rotary Brake
Enable or disable the Rotary Brake function for the
Harmonic Bars.
Audio Key C#
The FC-7 can be used to activate the Audio Phrases
instead of the 7 right most keys of BK-9’s keyboard.
See “16. Using Audio Phrases (Audio Key)” (p. 65).
Audio Key D
Audio Key Eb
Audio Key E
Audio Key F
Audio Key F#
Audio Key G
Metronome
These parameters can be selected using [MENU] button Global”
“Metronome” or pressing and holding [METRONOME] button.
Right Display
The BK-9 is equipped with a metronome that can be used in various
situations.
For more information on these parameters see “Using the
Metronome” (p. 55).
Rhythm/SMF Track Mute
These parameters can be selected using [MENU] button Global”
“Rhythm/SMF Track Mute”.
See “Using Track Mute’ and ‘Center Cancel’ (p. 46).
External Lyrics Settings
These parameters can be selected using [MENU] button Global”
“External Lyrics Settings”.
Right Display
The following table shows the “Lyrics Settings” parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Background
Mode
Color, Logo,
User
Color: The background is empty but uses
the selected color (see below).
Logo: The Roland’s logo is shown as
background.
User: The BK-9 uses the selected .JPG
picture as background.
See “Using one of your own pictures as
background” (p. 74).
Background
Color
1~8 Choose the background color.
Highlight Color 1~8 Choose the highlight color.
Row Displaying 2, 4
Allows you to specify the number of
lines to be used for displaying lyrics.
Chord View O, On
Select On” if the BK-9 should display
chord symbols along with the lyrics.
Video Settings
These parameters can be selected using [MENU] button Global”
“Video Settings”.
Menu options
148
Right Display
The following table shows the Video Setting parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Video Mode PAL, NTSC
Select the setting that corresponds to
the format
Aspect Ratio Full, Center
Specify the appropriate aspect ratio for
the screen you are using.
NOTE
If you work with a TV set, do not forget to select the correct
channel (“AV” or something to that eect, see the manual that
came with your set).
Fade IN/OUT Settings
These parameters can be selected using [MENU] button Global”
“Fade IN/OUT Settings”.
Right Display
The following table shows the Fade IN/OUT Setting parameters.
Parameter Setting Explanation
Time IN 0~20 s
Use this parameter to change the Fade
In duration.
Time OUT 0~20 s
Use this parameter to change the Fade
Out duration.
Time HOLD 1~10 s
Use this parameter to set how long
it takes for the volume to return to
the master [VOLUME] setting after
completing the fade-out.
Language
This parameter allows you to choose the character set to be used
for the following:
• Lyrics display (for les that contain lyrics)
“Search” functions. See”Using the ‘Search’ Function to Locate Songs
or Rhythms” (p. 50).
“Rename” functions. See “Rename a Performance List” (p. 59).
Parameter Setting
Language Latin, Cyrillic, East Europe
Save Global
This function allows you to save all “Global” parameter settings to
ensure that they are loaded automatically each time you switch the
BK-9 on.
You can select this function using [MENU] button “Global”
“Save Global”.
Right Display
1. Rotate the dial to select “YES”, then push it to dene the
current settings as the default state.
The display shows a conrmation message.
If you don’t want to dene the current “Global” settings as the
default state, select “NO. The BK-9 then returns to the “Global” page.
Audio Key
These parameters can be selected using [MENU] button Audio
Key”.
See “16. Using Audio Phrases (Audio Key)” (p. 65).
Edi
One Touch Edit
These parameters can be selected using [MENU] button One
Touch Edit.
See “Programming Your Own ONE TOUCH Settings (One Touch
Edit)” (p. 42).
Chord Loop
The parameters discussed here can be selected using [MENU]
button “Chord Loop or pressing and holding the CHORD LOOP
[REC] button.
Right Display
Rhythm Composer
149
Mode
Allows you to select the Chord Loop mode:
Parameter Setting
Mode Loop, Sequencer
• Loop: Use this mode If you need to replicate a short chords
pattern several times during your performance while you
concentrate on the melody or solo.
• Sequencer: Use this mode if you need to prepare the
accompaniment of an entire song before recording it with the
Recorder.
For details see “19. Recording a Chord Sequence (Chord Loop)” (p.
79).
Rhythm Composer
See “22. Rhythm Composer” (p. 103).
16Track Sequencer
See “20. Working with the 16-Track Sequencer” (p. 81).
Mastering Tools
The BK-9 contains an eects processor that applies to all real-time,
rhythm and SMF song parts.
This processor is called “Mastering Tools”, because it allows you to
perfect the signal mix to adapt it to the sound system you are using.
The parameters discussed here can be selected using [MENU]
button “Mastering Tools”.
Right Display
SMF/Rhythm and Tone Parts Compressor
This multi-band compressor/limiter allows you to process three
frequency ranges separately. A compressor reduces high levels
(peaks) and boosts low levels, smoothing out uctuations in
volume.
To edit the SMF/Rhythm Compressor parameters, use [MENU]
button “Mastering Tools” “SMF/Rhythm Compressor”.
To edit the Tone Parts Compressor parameters, use [MENU] button
“Mastering Tools” Tone Parts Compressor”.
Right Display
Right Display
1. Select a keyboard part if you chose Tone Parts
Compressor”.
Select an SMF song or a rhythm and start playback if you chose
“MF/Rhythm Compresso.
2. Set the “Switch parameter to “On to activate the
compressor.
3. Rotate the dial to select the “Preset” parameter, then push
it.
4. Rotate the dial to select one of the available presets.
The available presets are:
Preset
1. Hard Comp 4. Mid Boost 7. User
2. Soft Comp 5. High Boost
3. Low Boost 6. Standard
5. If none of the preset memories contains the settings you
need, use the dial to set the following parameters:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127
Use this parameter to set the compres-
sor’s input level.
The higher the value, the stronger the
three frequency bands are compressed.
The value you set here is added to the
“Level” settings of the three bands.
Do not set this parameter to “0” if the
compressor is switched on, because
doing so means that the keyboard parts,
the SMF song or Rhythm parts are no
longer audible.
Gain –12~0~+12 dB
Use this parameter to correct the
level at the compressor’s outputs. If the
settings of the remaining parameters
lead to a signicantly lower level, select
a positive value. If your settings lead
to a signicantly higher level, select a
negative value. “0” means that the level is
neither boosted nor attenuated.
High Attack 0~100 ms
Use this parameter to specify how fast
the compressor of the band in question
should start processing the signal once
the level of that band exceeds the
Threshold” level. Choose a smaller value
if you prefer a compression similar to
that of FM radio stations. Higher values
may yield a “snappier” or “funkier” sound.
High Release 50~5000 ms
This parameter allows you to specify
how fast the compressor of the cor-
responding band should stop working
when the signal level drops below the
Threshold” value.
High Threshold –36~0 dB
This parameter allows you to set the
level the frequency band (“High”, “Mid” or
“Low”) must reach to trigger its compres-
sor. The lower the value, the more
noticeable the compression will be.
Menu options
150
Parameter Setting Explanation
High Ratio 1:1.0~1:INF
Use this parameter to specify how
strongly the level should be reduced
when the band’s level exceeds the
Threshold” level. “1:2.0”, for example,
means that level values above the
Threshold” level are halved. “1:INF” is
useful if you set Threshold” to “0 dB”
or thereabout. This produces a limiter
eect, which means that no signal level
will ever exceed the Threshold” value.
This may help you protect the speakers
of the PA system etc.
High Level –24~+24 dB
This parameter allows you to establish
the desired mix among the three
compressor bands. Choose a negative
value to decrease the level, or a positive
one to increase it. Choose “0” for a band
whose level is OK as is.
Mid Attack 0~100 ms See “High Attack”.
Mid Release 50~5000 ms See “High Release”.
Mid Threshold –36~0 dB See “High Threshold”.
Mid Ratio 1:1.0~1:INF See “High Ratio.
Mid Level –24~+24 dB See “High Level”.
Low Attack 0~100 ms See “High Attack”.
Low Release 50~5000 ms See “High Release”.
Low Threshold –36~0 dB See “High Threshold”.
Low Ratio 1:1.0~1:INF See “High Ratio”.
Low Level –24~+24 dB See “High Level”.
Split High 2000~12000 Hz
These two parameters specify the
frequency where two bands are
separated. The compressor has three
bands, and so there are two crossover
frequencies you can set: “High” between
the “Mid” and “High ranges; and “Low”
between the “Mid” and “Low” ranges.
Split Low 80~800 Hz
Write the “User Compressor
This function allows you to save the settings you made on the “SMF/
Rhythm Compressor” or Tone Parts Compressor page.
1. Press the [WRITE] button.
Right Display
2. Rotate the dial to select “YES”, then push it to save the
current settings.
The display shows a conrmation message.
If you don’t want to dene the current settings, select “NO”
The BK-9 then returns to the “Compressor” page.
NOTE
There is only one “User memory for your own settings. By
saving new settings, you therefore overwrite the previous ones.
NOTE
When you switch on the BK-9, it automatically loads the “User
settings.
SMF/Rhythm and Tone Parts Equalizer
To edit the SMF/Rhythm Equalizer parameters, use [MENU] button
“Mastering Tools” “SMF/Rhythm Equalizer”.
To edit the Tone Parts Equalizer parameters, use [MENU] button
“Mastering Tools” Tone Parts Equalizer.
Right Display
Right Display
1. Select a keyboard part if you chose Tone Parts Equalizer”.
Select an SMF song or a rhythm and start playback if you
chose Tone Parts Equalizer.
2. Set the “Switch parameter to “On to activate the
equalizer.
3. Rotate the dial to select the “Preset” parameter, then push
it.
4. Rotate the dial to select one of the available presets.
The available presets are:
MIDI
151
Preset
1. Flat 4. Jazz 7. User
2. Rock 5. Classic
3. Pop 6. Standard
5. If none of the preset memories contains the settings you
need, use the dial to set the following parameters:
Parameter Setting Explanation
Level 0~127
Use this parameter to set the equalizer’s
input level. This may be necessary when
the level of the input signals is so high
that the sound distorts.
NOTE
Do not set this parameter to “0” if the
equalizer is switched on, because
doing so means that the keyboard
parts, SMF song/rhythm is/are no
longer audible.
Gain –9~0~+9 dB
Use this parameter to correct the
level at the equalizer’s outputs. If the
settings of the remaining parameters
lead to a signicantly lower level, select
a positive value. If your settings lead
to a signicantly higher level, select a
negative value. “0” means that the level is
neither boosted nor attenuated.
High
Frequency
2000~12000 Hz
Allows you to set the cuto frequency of
the high band (this is a shelving lter).
High Gain –15~+15 dB
Use this parameter to set the level of
the selected “High frequency. Positive
values boost (increase the volume of)
that frequency band, negative values cut
(attenuate) it.
Mid Frequency 200~8000 Hz
Allows you to set the cuto frequency of
the middle band (this is a peaking lter).
Mid Q
0.5, 1.0, 2.0,
4.0, 8.0
Use this parameter to specify the width
of the “Mid Frequency band that you
want to boost or cut. Smaller values
mean that neighboring frequencies
above/below that value are also aected.
Mid Gain –15~+15 dB
Use this parameter to set the level of the
selected “Mid” frequency.
Low Frequency
50, 80, 100,
150, 200, 250,
300, 400 Hz
Allows you to set the cuto frequency of
the low band (this is a shelving lter).
Low Gain –15~+15 dB
Use this parameter to set the level of the
selected “Low” frequency.
Write the “User Equalizer
This function allows you to save the settings you made on the “SMF/
Rhythm Equalizer” or Tone Parts Equalizer page.
1. Press the [WRITE] button.
Right Display
2. Rotate the dial to select “YES”, then push it to save the
current settings.
The display shows a conrmation message.
If you don’t want to dene the current settings, select “NO”
The BK-9 then returns to the “Equalizer” page.
NOTE
There is only one “User memory for your own settings. By
saving new settings, you therefore overwrite the previous ones.
NOTE
When you switch on the BK-9, it automatically loads the “User
settings.
MIDI
This section discusses the BK-9’s MIDI parameters.
MIDI Channels
MIDI can simultaneously transmit and receive messages on 16
channels, so that up to 16 instruments can be controlled.
NOTE
All BK-9 parts are set to receive MIDI messages. If they do not
seem to respond to the messages you send from the external
controller, you should check whether the external controller’s
MIDI OUT is connected to the MIDI IN of your BK-9.
The MIDI channels are xed and you cannot change them.
Ch Part Ch Part
1 Rhythm Accomp. 1 / (Song 1) 2 Rhythm Bass / (Song 2)
3 Rhythm Accomp. 2 / (Song 3) 4 UPPER 1 / (Song 4)
5 Rhythm Accomp. 3 / (Song 5) 6 UPPER 2 / (Song 6)
7 Rhythm Accomp. 4 / (Song 7) 8 Rhythm Accomp. 5 / (Song 8)
9 Rhythm Accomp. 6 / (Song 9) 10 Rhythm Drum / (Song 10)
11 LOWER / (Song 11) 12 M. BASS / (Song 12)
13 (Song 13) 14 (Song 14)
15 Melody Intell. / (Song 15) 16 (Song 16)
MIDI Parameters
The MIDI parameters can be selected using [MENU] button “MIDI”
The BK-9’s MIDI environment contains the following options:
MIDI parameter group Explanation
Local
This setting allows you to establish or remove the
connection between the BK-9’s keyboard and the
internal tone generator.
MIDI Set
Allows you to load a MIDI Set (“Key/Rhythm, “PK
Series”, “Song, “User1”~“8”.
Menu options
152
MIDI parameter group Explanation
Edit Rhythm Parts
Here, you can edit all MIDI parameters of the
rhythm parts (ADrum, ABass, Acc1~6). See p. 152.
Edit Tone Parts
Here, you can edit all MIDI parameters related to
the keyboard parts (Upper1, Upper2, Lower. M.
Bass and Melody Intelligent). See p. 154.
Edit Song Parts
Here, you can edit all MIDI parameters of the Song
parts. See p. 154.
Edit System
This groups contains all MIDI parameters that
apply to the BK-9 as a whole. See p. 154.
Local
The Local parameter allows you to establish or remove the
connection between the BK-9’s keyboard and the internal tone
generator.
Parameter Setting
Local O, On (---)
When set to On (default), the keyboard and internal sound
generator are connected.
If you select O, the keyboard and internal sound generator are
disconnected but the note are still transmitted to the MIDI OUT or
USB port and hence to external MIDI instruments.
When a parameter is modied inside a part, the display shows “---”.
.
Preventing Double Notes
when Working with a Sequencer (Local Control)
When you have a MIDI sequencer connected, set this parameter
to “OFF”.
Since most sequencers have their Thru function turned on,
notes you play on the keyboard may be sounded in duplicate,
or get dropped. To prevent this, select “OFF” so that the
keyboard and internal sound generator will be disconnected.
Local Control
Sound Generator
MIDI
In
MIDI
Out
MIDI
Sequencer
NOTE
The setting of this parameter is not memorized when you switch
o the BK-9.
Loading a MIDI Set
The MIDI Set environment contains two options with preset
settings. All you need to do is select them to restore the default
settings for the sections or aspects in question. In addition,
there are 8 MIDI Set memories (User1~8) where you can save
your own settings.
Parameter Setting
MIDI Set Key/Rhythm, PK Series, Song, User1~8
• Key/Rhythm: This option recalls the factory MIDI settings for the
keyboard parts (Upper1, Upper2, Lower, M. Bass, Mel. Intell) and
the rhythm parts (ADrum, ABass, Acc1~6). The most important
(and practical) use for this eld is resetting the MIDI transmit/
receive channels of the real-time and rhythm parts and to switch
o MIDI transmission/ reception of the song parts.
NOTE
This parameter applies to both reception (RX) and transmission
(TX). The BK-9 indeed allows you to set separate TX and RX
channels for each part.
• PK Series: This option prepares the BK-9 for MIDI control using
a PK-series MIDI pedalboard. The most important settings are:
“Part Switch is set to “Int” and “Rhythm PcRx” is set to “On”.
• Song: This option restores the factory settings for the BK-9’s SMF
song parts and switches o the MIDI transmission and reception
of the real-time and rhythm parts.
• User1~8: The BK-9 also allows you to store and recall 8 dierent
MIDI congurations.
MEMO
You can link a User MIDI Set (User1~User8) to the Performance
memory. See “MIDI Set Link” (p. 142).
NOTE
Loading a MIDI Set only changes the MIDI settings and has no
eect on the remaining parameters.
1. Rotate the dial to select the “MIDI Set” eld.
2. Push the dial to edit the “MIDI Set eld.
The “MIDI Set” eld is now displayed in reverse.
3. Use the dial to select the MIDI Set you want to load.
The BK-9 loads the selected MIDI Set.
4. Push the dial if you want to edit other parameters on this
page.
Edit Rhythm Parts
The following parameters are located on the display page that can
be selected using [MENU] button “MIDI” “Edit Rhythm Parts”.
Right Display
1. Use the dial to select the part (rst row) you want to edit
(ADrum, ABass, Acc1, Acc2, Acc3, Acc4, Acc5, Acc6).
The display now shows the settings for the selected part.
Tx
Select “On” if you want the selected part to transmit MIDI data.
Parameter Setting
Tx O, On
Tx Ch
Allows you to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the selected part.
Parameter Setting
Tx Ch 1~16
MIDI
153
Tx Shift
This parameter allows you to transpose the note messages before
they are transmitted to an external MIDI instrument or computer.
The maximum possible transposition is four octaves up (+48) or
down (–48).
Each step represents a semi-tone.
Parameter Setting
Tx Shift –48~0~+48
Tx Local
This is where you can disconnect the part from the internal sound
source (“O”) – or re-establish that connection (“On”).
Parameter Setting
Tx Local O, On
Tx Event
The TX Event” section provides a number of lters that allow you
to specify whether the messages in question should be transmitted
(On) or not (O).
Parameter Setting Explanation
Program Change O, On
Select On” to transmit program change and
bank select (CC00, CC32) messages.
Pitch Bender O, On Select “On” to transmit Pitch Bend messages.
Modulation O, On
Select On” to transmit Modulation messages
(CC01).
Volume O, On
Select On” to transmit Volume messages
(CC07).
Panpot O, On
Select On” to transmit Panpot messages
(CC10).
Expression O, On
Select On” to transmit Expression messages
(CC11).
Reverb O, On
Select On” to transmit Reverb messages
(CC91).
Chorus O, On
Select On” to transmit Chorus messages
(CC93).
Hold* O, On Select “On to receive Hold messages (CC64).
Sostenuto* O, On
Select On” to receive Sostenuto messages
(CC66).
Soft* O, On Select “On” to receive Soft messages (CC67).
Caf* O, On Select “On to receive Caf Channel aftertouch.
RPN* O, On
Select On” to receive Registered parameter
number messages (CC100/101).
NRPN* O, On
Select On” to receive Nonregistered
parameter number messages (CC98/99).
System
Exclusive*
O, On
Select On” to receive System Exclusive
messages.
Other CC* O, On
General purpose controller and others CC not
listed above.
Select All O, On
Select On” to transmit all MIDI message listed
above.
* This parameter is available for Tone and Song parts only.
Rx
Select “On” if you want the selected part to receive MIDI data.
Parameter Setting
Rx O, On
Rx Ch
Allows you to assign a MIDI receive channel to the selected part.
Parameter Setting
Rx Ch 1~16
Rx Shift
This parameter allows you to transpose the note messages received
from an external MIDI instrument or computer. The maximum
possible transposition is four octaves up (+48) or down (–48). Each
step represents a semi-tone.
Parameter Setting
Rx Shift –48~0~+48
Rx Limit Low/Limit High
“Limit Low” and “Limit High” allow you to set the note range to be
received. If not all note messages received on a given MIDI channel
should be played by the selected BK-9 part, narrow down the range.
Parameter Setting
Rx Limit Low
C–~G9
Rx Limit High
NOTE
The “Limit Low” value cannot be higher than the “Limit High”
value (and vice versa).
Rx Event
The “Rx Event” section provides a number of lters that allow you to
specify whether the messages in question should be received (On)
or not (O).
Parameter Setting Explanation
Program Change O, On
Select On” to receive program change and
bank select (CC00, CC32) messages.
Pitch Bender O, On Select “On” to receive Pitch Bend messages
Modulation O, On
Select On” to receive Modulation messages
(CC01).
Volume O, On
Select On” to receive Volume messages
(CC07).
Panpot O, On
Select On” to receive Panpot messages
(CC10).
Expression O, On
Select On” to receive Expression messages
(CC11).
Reverb O, On
Select On” to receive Reverb messages
(CC91).
Chorus O, On
Select On” to receive Chorus messages
(CC93).
Hold* O, On Select “On to receive Hold messages (CC64).
Sostenuto* O, On
Select On” to receive Sostenuto messages
(CC66).
Soft* O, On Select “On” to receive Soft messages (CC67).
Caf* O, On Select “On to receive Caf Channel aftertouch.
RPN* O, On
Select On” to receive Registered parameter
number messages (CC100/101).
NRPN* O, On
Select On” to receive Nonregistered
parameter number messages (CC98/99).
System
Exclusive*
O, On
Select On” to receive System Exclusive
messages.
Other CC* O, On
General purpose controller and others CC not
listed above.
Menu options
154
Parameter Setting Explanation
Select All O, On
Select On” to receive all MIDI message listed
above.
* This parameter is available for Tone and Song parts only.
Edit Tone Parts
The following parameters are located on the display page that can
be selected using [MENU] button “MIDI” “Edit Tone Parts”.
Right Display
1. Use the dial to select the tone part (rst row) you want to
edit (Upper1, Upper2, Lower, M.Bass, Mel.Intell).
The display now shows the settings for the selected part.
Parameter Setting and Explanation
Tx
For the explanation of these
parameters please refer to page
152.
Tx Ch
Tx Shift
Tx Local
Tx Event
Rx
For the explanation of these
parameters please refer to page
153.
Rx Ch
Rx Shift
Rx Limit Low/High
Rx Event
Edit Song Parts
The following parameters are located on the display page that can
be selected using [MENU] button “MIDI” “Edit Song Parts”.
Right Display
1. Use the dial to select the song part (rst row) you want to
edit (1~16).
The display now shows the settings for the selected part.
Parameter Setting and Explanation
Tx
For the explanation of these
parameters please refer to page
152.
Tx Ch
Tx Shift
Tx Local
Tx Event
Rx
For the explanation of these
parameters please refer to page
153.
Rx Ch
Rx Shift
Rx Limit Low/High
Rx Event
Edit System
The following parameters are located on the display page that can
be selected using [MENU] button “MIDI” “Edit System”.
Right Display
The “Edit System group contains the following parameters:
Edit System Explanation
Sync
These parameters are used to synchronize
external MIDI devices. See below.
Basic
The parameters of this group aect the BK-9’s
Basic channel. The Basic channel is used to receive
and transmit Program Change and Bank Select
messages for selecting Performances as well as for
the reception and transmission of other kinds of
messages that are not directly related to a specic
MIDI channel. See p. 155.
Rhythm
The parameters of this group aect the BK-9’s
Rhythm channel. The Rhythm channel is used for
receiving program change and bank select mes-
sages that select rhythm and volume messages
that change the rhythms volume. See p. 156.
NTA
These parameters allow you to assign MIDI chan-
nels to the BK-9’s NTA parts (Notet-to-Arranger).
Only notes received on one of these channels are
considered chord information that can be used
to transpose rhythm playback in real-time. See
p. 157.
Parameters
This group contains MIDI parameters that are not
related to the previous groups. See p. 157.
Visual Control TxCh
Allows you to set the MIDI transmit channel for
the Visual Control function. (The BK-9 does not
receive Visual Control messages). See p. 158
Sync
The following parameters are located on the display page that can
be selected using [MENU] button“MIDI” “Edit System “Sync”.
MIDI
155
Right Display
The “Sync” parameters allow you to specify whether or not the BK-9
should send MIDI real-time messages when you start rhythm or
song playback. This allows you to synchronize external instruments
or (software) sequencers with your BK-9.
Rhythm Start/Stop Tx
If you activate this option, the BK-9 sends start or stop messages
when you start (or stop) rhythm playback.
Parameter Setting
Rhythm Start/Stop Tx O, On
Rhythm Clock Tx
If you activate this option the rhythm playback sends MIDI Clock
messages.
Parameter Setting
Rhythm Clock Tx O, On
SMF Start/Stop Tx
Similar to “Rhythm Start/Stop Tx” but for songs.
Parameter Setting
SMF Start/Stop Tx O, On
SMF Clock Tx
Similar to “Rhythm Clock Tx” but for songs.
Parameter Setting
SMF Clock Tx O, On
SMF Position Tx
If you switch this parameter on, the song playback sends Song
Position Pointer (SPP) messages that indicate the current playback
position.
Parameter Setting
SMF Position Tx O, On
Sync Rx
This parameter is used to specify whether rhythm and song
playback should be synchronized by an external MIDI device.
Parameter Setting
Sync Rx O, On
Mode
Parameter Setting
Mode Internal, Auto, MIDI, Remote
• Internal: Song or rhythm playback uses BK-9 internal tempo.
Auto: A good setting for remote control of song or rhythm
playback (using a PK-series dynamic MIDI pedal board, for
example). If the BK-9 receives a MIDI Start message (FA), it
waits for Clock messages that specify the tempo. If those Clock
messages are not received, the BK-9 starts playback using its
internal tempo. If, however, Clock messages (F8) follow after the
Start message, the BK-9 uses the external tempo.
• MIDI: Song or rhythm playback can be started or stopped with
MIDI real-time messages (Start, Stop, Clock) received from an
external clock source.
• Remote: Song or rhythm playback waits for a start message
to start playback at its own tempo. When it receives a stop
message, playback stops. External clock messages are ignored.
Basic
The following parameters are located on the display page that can
be selected using [MENU] button “MIDI” “Edit System “Basic”.
Right Display
The Basic channel is used to receive and transmit Program Change
and Bank Select messages for selecting Performances, as well as for
the reception and transmission of other kinds of messages that are
not directly related to a specic MIDI channel.
NOTE
If you select another channel, messages intended for the Basic
parameters might also cause other parameters to change when
you don’t want them to.
The following parameters are available here:
Tx
Switches the transmission of MIDI messages on the Basic channel
on or o.
Parameter Setting
Tx O, On
Tx Channel
The channel used to transmit MIDI messages.
Parameter Setting
Tx Channel 1~16
Performance PC Tx
This parameter is used to enable or disable the transmission of
program change and bank select messages related to Performance
selection.
Menu options
156
Parameter Setting
Performance PC Tx O, On
Part Switch Tx
Whenever you mute or un-mute a part on the “Rhythm Parts” page,
the BK-9 transmits an NRPN message that describes your action.
Not sending this message may be useful to keep your external
sequencer from recording it—or the receiving GS module from
muting the part assigned to that MIDI channel.
Parameter Setting
Part Switch Tx O, On
Rx
Switches the reception of MIDI messages on the Basic channel on
or o.
Parameter Setting
Rx O, On
Rx Channel
Use this parameter to assign a MIDI transmit channel to the “Basic”
channel.
Parameter Setting
Rx Channel 1~16
Performance PC Rx
This parameter is used to enable or disable the reception of
program change and bank select messages related to Performance
selection.
Parameter Setting
Performance PC Rx O, On
Master Volume Rx
Allows you to enable or disable the reception of Master Volume
messages that would change the BK-9’s overall volume. This is an
exclusive message common to all newer MIDI devices.
Parameter Setting
Master Volume Rx O, On
Part Switch Rx
Whenever you mute or un-mute a part on the “Rhythm Parts” page,
the BK-9 transmits an NRPN message that describes your action.
You can keep the BK-9 from responding to such messages to avoid
that external instruments mute its parts.
Parameter Setting
Part Switch Rx O, On
Rhythm
The following parameters are located on the display page that
can be selected using [MENU] button “MIDI” “Edit System
“Rhythm.
Right Display
The Rhythm channel is used for receiving program change and
bank select messages that select rhythms and volume messages
that change the rhythms volume.
The MIDI address of a rhythm consists of three elements: a CC00
number, a CC32 number and a program change number. The
values assigned to CC00 and CC32 dene the rhythm, whereas
the program change number denes the Division (Intro, Ending,
etc.). See the “Rhythm List“. You can download it from http://www.
roland.com/manuals.
Sending only a program change number selects another Division of
the currently active rhythm. Be aware, however, that only sending
CC00 and CC32 messages (without a program change) has no
eect.
NOTE
When you select another rhythm on your BK-9, it transmits a
CC00-CC32-PC cluster on the Rhythm channel, which you could
record using an external sequencer.
See the “Rhythm List”.
You can download it from http://www.roland.com/manuals.
Tx
Switches the transmission of MIDI messages on the Rhythm
channel on or o.
Parameter Setting
Tx O, On
Tx Channel
The channel used to transmit MIDI messages.
Parameter Setting
Tx Channel 1~16
Rx
Switches the reception of MIDI messages on the Rhythm channel
on or o.
Parameter Setting
Rx O, On
Rx Channel
Use this parameter to assign a MIDI receive channel to the Rhythm
section.
Parameter Setting
Rx Channel 1~16
Rhythm Volume Rx
Allows you to enable or disable the reception of volume messages
relating the rhythm.
MIDI
157
Parameter Setting
Rhythm Volume Rx O, On
Rhythm Pc Rx
This parameter allows you to enable or disable the reception of
program change and bank select messages for rhythm selection.
Parameter Setting
Rhythm Pc Rx O, On
NTA
The following parameters are located on the display page that can
be selected using [MENU] button “MIDI” “Edit System “NTA”.
Right Display
NTA notes are only received (from an external MIDI instrument).
What you play in the chord recognition area of the keyboard to
feed the Arranger is automatically converted to the corresponding
MIDI note numbers, so that all rhythm parts transmit their notes
to external instruments. There is thus no need to transmit the note
messages of what you play in the chord recognition area (NTA)
separately.
These parameters allow you to specify on which MIDI channels the
BK-9 should receive chord information used to change the rhythms
key in real-time.
Channel
Allows you to select the MIDI channel on which the BK-9 should
receive NTA messages.
Parameter Setting
Channel Ch1~Ch16
Rx
This parameter allows you to specify whether (“On”) or not (“O”)
the selected MIDI channel should be used to receive chord
information.
Parameter Setting
Rx O, On
Rx Octave
Use this parameter to transpose the notes received on the selected
MIDI channel (“Ch”) in steps of one octave.
Parameter Setting
Rx Octave –4~0~4
Rx Global Limit Low/High
These parameters allow you to set the note range to be received.
If not all note messages of the selected MIDI channel should be
received by the NTA “part, set the range to the desired values
Parameter Setting
Rx Global Limit Low
C–~G9
Rx Global Limit High
NOTE
The “Limit Low” value cannot be higher than the “Limit High”
value (and vice versa).
Parameters
The following parameters are located on the display page that
can be selected using [MENU] button “MIDI” “Edit System
“Parameters”.
Right Display
This page contains several parameters that are not related to
one another (the other MIDI pages always concentrate on one
aspect).
Part Switch
This parameter allows you to specify whether or not a muted
part should go on sending MIDI messages:
Parameter Setting
Part Switch Internal, Int+MIDI
• Internal: A muted part can no longer be played via the BK-9’s
keyboard or Arranger/song player but continues to send MIDI
messages. Selecting “Internal” and muting a part thus has the
same eect as selecting “Local O (see p. 152).
• Int+MIDI: A muted part can no longer be played via the BK-9’s
keyboard or Arranger/song player and no longer sends MIDI
messages.
Tx Velocity
Your BK-9 is equipped with a velocity-sensitive keyboard and a tone
generator capable of responding to velocity messages. Use this
parameter to switch the transmission (TX) of velocity messages on
or o.
If you don’t select “On, specify which velocity value to use instead
of the continuous ux. The value you set will be used for all notes
sent to MIDI OUT/USB COMPUTER.
Parameter Setting
Tx Velocity On, 1~127
Tx SysEx
Use this parameter to specify whether (“On”) or not (“O”) the BK-9
should send SysEx messages. Such messages are not standardized,
so that each manufacturer can use them ad lib for temporary (or
permanent) changes to the way a part behaves. Eects parameters,
for instance, can only be changed via SysEx messages.
Such messages may slow down playback on external
MIDI instruments or yield no eect at all, which is why you have the
Menu options
158
option to switch o their transmission in the rst place.
Parameter Setting
Tx SysEx O, On
Tx Data Change
This parameter allows you to specify how the original program
changes of the songs you play back are transmitted via MIDI. The
BK-9 may change sound addresses (usually CC00 and CC32 values)
so as to play back all songs with the best possible quality. If you
switch this parameter on, such real-time transformations are also
transmitted via MIDI. If you switch this parameter o, the original
sound addresses are transmitted to the receiving device. (But the
BK-9’s tone generator continues to enhance the songs you play
back.)
Parameter Setting
Tx Data Change O, On
Tx Octave
The Tx Octave” parameter can be set to Absolute or Relative. You
may have noticed that if you assign a bass sound to the UPPER1
or UPPER2 part in SPLIT mode, the notes are transposed to allow
you to play meaningful bass lines using the UPPER1/UPPER2 part.
“Relative means that this internal (and automatic) transposition is
translated into MIDI note numbers.
In Absolute mode, however, the MIDI note numbers sent to other
instruments will be the ones of the keys you actually press.
Parameter Setting
Tx Octave Relative, Absolute
Rx Velocity
Your BK-9 is equipped with a velocity-sensitive keyboard and a
tone generator capable of responding to velocity messages. This
parameter allows you to switch the reception (RX) of velocity
messages on or o. If you don’t need “On, specify which velocity
value to use instead of the continuous ux. This value will be used
for all notes received via MIDI..
Parameter Setting
Rx Velocity On, 1~127
Rx SySex
Use this parameter to specify whether the BK-9 should receive
SysEx messages from other devices.
Parameter Setting
Rx SySex O, On
Rx Transpose
Use this parameter to specify whether or not the BK-9 should
transpose the MIDI note messages it receives.
Parameter Setting
Rx Transpose O, On
Rx Common Exp.
This parameter allows you to specify that Expression messages
received on the channel you select here (1~16) should aect all of
the BK-9’s parts (except for the song parts). Select “O if
Expression messages should only aect the part that receives on
the MIDI channel used by the Expression messages.
Parameter Setting
Rx Common Exp. O, 1~16
Soft Thru
Select “On” if the BK-9 should transmit all MIDI messages it receives
(using its MIDI OUT socket).
Parameter Setting
Soft Thru O, On
Visual Control TxCh
This parameter allows you to set the MIDI transmit channel for the
Visual Control function. (The BK-9 does not receive Visual Control
messages.) By default, this channel is set to 16.
Parameter Setting
Visual Control TxCh 1~16
Save MIDI Set
This function allows you to save your changes to a “User memory
for quick recall.
This function can be selected using the [WRITE] button while the
“MIDI” page is displayed.
Right Display
1. Edit the desired MIDI parameters (“Edit Rhythm Parts”,
“Edit Song Parts”, “Edit Tone Parts”, “Edit System”).
2. Press the [WRITE] button.
The display changes to:
Right Display
3. Rotate the dial to select the MIDI Set where you want to
save your settings (“User1”~ “User8”) and push the dial.
A conrmation message informs you that the MIDI Set has been
saved.
If you change the MIDI settings after loading a “User set, the BK-9
Wireless
159
alerts you to the fact that you may need to save the MIDI Set again
(provided, you want to keep your changes):
Right Display
Checking a Tones or Rhythms MIDI
Address
Tones and rhythms can also be selected via MIDI. To this eect, they
use an “internal” address, which is not usually displayed. For MIDI
applications involving sequencers or external controllers, knowing
the ocial” address may come in handy. The BK-9 has a handy
system that provides this information instantly—there is thus no
need to look up the MIDI address in the tables at the end of this
manual.
1. Select the Tone or Rhythm whose MIDI address you need
to know.
Right Display
Right Display
(Tone selection page) (Rhythm selection page)
2. Press and hold the [NUMERIC] button to call up a pop-up
window.
Right Display
Right Display
(Tone selection window) (Rhythm selection window)
3. Press the [EXIT] button (or press [NUMERIC] again) to
return to the previous page.
Wireless
See “26. Wireless LAN Function” (p. 162).
Factory Reset
The following function allows you to recall the BK-9’s original
factory settings. This has no eect on the data stored on a USB
memory
1. Press the [MENU] button.
2. Rotate the dial to select the “Factory Reset” entry, then
push the dial.
Right Display
3. Rotate the dial to select “YES”, then push the dial to load
the factory settings.
Select “NO to return to the previous display page without loading
the factory settings.
A conrmation message informs you that the BK-9 has been
initialized.
Formatting a USB memory
This function allows you to format the connected USB memory.
USB memories using the FAT-32 le system may not need to be
formatted. We nevertheless recommend formatting all new USB
storage devices with the BK-9.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Formatting a USB memory means that all les (songs, rhythms,
etc.) it contains are lost.
Always check the contents of the memory before deciding to
format it.
1. Connect the a USB memory you want to format to the USB
MEMORY port on the BK-9’s front panel.
2. Press the [MENU] button.
3. Rotate the dial to select the “Format USB Device entry,
then push the dial.
Right Display
4. Rotate the dial to select “YES”, then push the dial to format
the USB memory.
A conrmation message informs you that the USB memory has
Menu options
160
been formatted.
The following folders are created on the USB memory
Folder Name Description
My Chord Loop We suggest to use this folder to save Chord Loop les.
My Performances
This folder is used to save Performance Lists. (The
contents of this folder cannot be viewed by pressing
the [USB MEMORY] button. You need to press the
PERFORMANCE [LIST] button to gain access to the les
it contains. The contents can be viewed on a computer,
however.)
My Recordings
This folder is used to store your audio recordings. See
“18. Recording your Performance” (p. 75).
My Rhythms This folder can be used to save rhythms.
My Songs This folder can be used to save SMF songs.
NOTE
We recommend copying the contents of your USB memory to your
computer before formatting it.
161
25. Controlling Video Equipment (Visual Control)
The BK-9 has a powerful interface for realtime audio-and-video
integration.
What is MIDI Visual Control?
MIDI Visual Control is an internationally-
used recommended practice that was
added to the MIDI specication so that
visual expression could be linked with
musical performance. Video equipment
that is compatible with MIDI Visual Control
can be connected to electronic musical
instruments via MIDI in order to control video equipment in
tandem with a performance.
How to Connect a Video Equipment
When MIDI Visual Control- or V-LINK compatible devices are
connected via MIDI, you’ll be able to easily enjoy a variety of
visual eects that are linked to the expressive elements of your
performance.
For example, if you use the BK-9 with the EDIROL P-10, you’ll be able
to use the various controls on the BK-9’s keyboard to switch and
control images on the EDIROL P-10.
In order to enjoy the Visual Control function with the BK-9 and the
EDIROL P-10, you’ll need to make connections using a MIDI cable
(sold separately)
Image output
Projector
Edirol P-10 Visual Sampler
MIDI IN
NOTE
To prevent malfunction and speaker damage, you must
minimize the volume on all equipment and turn o their power
before you make any connections.
1. Connect the BK-9’s MIDI OUT socket to the MIDI IN socket
of the optional MIDI Visual Control/V-LINK device.
How to Enable/Disable the Video
Control Function
1. Press [MELODY INTELL] and [LYRICS] button
simultaneously.
The following conrmation appears:
Left Display
Repeat this step to switch the Visual Control function back o. A
message briey conrms this operation:
Selecting clips and banks on an optional
MIDI Visual Control/ V-LINK device
1. Switch on the Visual Control” function.
2. Press a key in the highest octave (G#6~G7) to select the
desired clips on the external MIDI Visual Control/V-LINK-
compatible device.
Clip selection via MIDI
Visual Control/V-LINK
Key Description MIDI message
G#6 Control the image bank (Bank Select) BF 00 00
A6 Switch images (Clip 1) CF 00
A#6 Control the image bank (Bank Select) BF 00 01
B6 Switch images (Clip 2) CF 01
C7 Switch images (Clip 3) CF 02
C#7 Control the image bank (Bank Select) BF 00 02
D7 Switch images (Clip 4) CF 03
D#7 Control the image bank (Bank Select) BF 00 03
E7 Switch images (Clip 5) CF 04
F7 Control the image bank (Bank Select) BF 00 04
F#7 Switch images (Clip 6) CF 05
G7 Switch images (Clip 7) CF 06
Using the black keys (Bank Select) and white keys (PC), 5 x 7= 35
clips can be selected.
NOTE
While the Visual Control function is active, the G#6~G7 keys
are temporarily unavailable for playing notes and Audio Key
function.
162
26. Wireless LAN Function
What is Wireless LAN Function?
By inserting the wireless USB Adapter (WNA1100-RL; sold separately) into
the BK-9’s USB MEMORY port, you’ll be able to use wireless compatible
applications (such as the Air Recorder iPhone app).
iPad etc.
Wireless LAN access point
(e.g., wireless LAN router)
Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN
Wireless USB Adapter (sold
separately: WNA1100-RL)
BK-9
Items required to use the wireless LAN function
Wireless USB Adapter (sold separately: WNA1100-RL)
Wireless LAN access point (e.g., wireless LAN router) *1*2*3
iPhone or iPod touch etc.
*1 The wireless LAN access point you use must support WPS. If
your wireless LAN access point does not support WPS, you can
connect using the procedure described in “Connecting to a
Wireless LAN Access Point That You Select” (p. 163).
*2 The ability to connect with all kinds of wireless LAN access
points is not guaranteed.
*3 If you’re unable to connect to the wireless LAN access point, try
connecting using Ad-Hoc mode (p. 164).
Basic Connection Method (Connect by
WPS)
The rst time you connect the BK-9 to a wireless network, you’ll need to
perform the following procedure (WPS) to join the wireless network.
This procedure is required only the rst time (Once you’ve joined the
network, this procedure will no longer be necessary).
What is WPS?
This is a standard that makes it easy to make security settings when
connecting to a wireless LAN access point. We recommend that you
use WPS when connecting to a wireless LAN access point.
1. Turn on the power of the BK-9.
2. Insert the wireless USB Adapter (WNA1100-RL; sold
separately) into the BK-9’s USB MEMORY port.
3. Press [MENU] button
4. Rotate the dial to select “Wireless“ and push it.
Right Display
5. Rotate the dial to select “Connect By WPS“ and push it.
Right Display
6. Perform the WPS operation on your wireless LAN access
point (e.g.), press and hold the WPS button on your
wireless LAN access point).
For details on WPS operation of your wireless LAN access point,
refer to the documentation for your wireless LAN access point.
7. Push the dial.
Once successfully connected, the status eld shows “Connected”
NOTE
The device (e.g., iPad) running the application must be
connected to the same network.
MEMO
• The connection data is stored in memory when you perform
the WPS procedure; the device will automatically connect to the
wireless network next time.
• All connection data will be erased if you perform a factory reset.
• Connection data is not included in a backup.
Wireless LAN Function Settings
163
Icons in the display
The wireless LAN status is shown in the main page and
in the wireless menu when the wireless USB adapter is
inserted.
Left Display
wireless icon
Icon Explanation
Currently connected to the
wireless LAN access point. Three
bars are used to indicate the
signal level (the strength of the
connected wireless LAN access
point’s radio signal).
The wireless USB adapter is
inserted, but not connected
with a wireless LAN access point.
Ad-Hoc mode (p. 164).
Wireless LAN Function Settings
You can view or edit the wireless settings.
1. Select the [MENU] button gWireless”.
The Wireless page will appear.
Right Display
2. Use the dial to move the cursor to select the desired
parameter.
3. Push the dial to move in the new page.
“Status” Indication
The rst row of the Wireless page shows the wireless LAN status.
Status Indication Explanation
Connected
Currently connected to the wireless LAN access point.
The identier (name) of the connected wireless LAN
access point is shown
Now Connecting
A connection with the wireless LAN access point is being
established.
Not Connected
The wireless USB adapter is inserted, but not connected
to a wireless LAN access point.
Not Available The wireless USB adapter is not inserted.
Ad-Hoc
Ad-Hoc mode (p. 164).
The Ad-Hoc SSID and Ad-Hoc Key are shown.
For details, refer to “Connecting in Ad-Hoc mode” (p.
164).
Access Point Indication
The second row of the Wireless page shows the Access Point connected.
To select an Access Point see “Connecting to a Wireless LAN Access Point
That You Select” (p. 163).
“Device Name” Indication
The third row of the Wireless page shows the Device Name.
The Device Name is BK-9 (Default). See Wireless ID” (p. 164).
“Connect By WPS” Page
Connect the BK-9 to a wireless network by WPS (p. 162).
“Select Access Point Page
Move to a screen where you can choose a wireless LAN access point and
connect to it.
“Wireless Info” Page
Move to the screen to view the IP address and MAC address.
“Wireless Option Page
Make settings for Wireless ID or Ad-Hoc mode (Ad-Hoc Mode).
See “Other Settings (Wireless Option)” (p. 164).
Connecting to a Wireless LAN Access
Point That You Select
This method lets you connect by choosing a wireless LAN access point
from the list that is displayed.
* Wireless standards 802.11g/n (2.4 GHz) and authentication
methods WPA/WPA2 are supported.
1. Select the [MENU] button gWireless” g“Select Access
Point”
After a short scan the Select Access Point list will appear.
Right Display
MEMO
* The currently-connected wireless LAN access point is
highlighted
Wireless LAN Function
164
* To refresh the list, exit and then reenter this screen.
2. Choose the wireless LAN access point to which you want
to connect, and push the dial.
You will be connected to the selected wireless LAN access point.
• If you’re using this wireless LAN access point for the rst time,
you’ll proceed to the authorization (AUTHORIZATION) screen.
• If this is a wireless LAN access point to which you have connected
in the past, just press the [ENTER] button and you’ll be connected.
Once successfully connected, you’ll be returned to the status
(WIRELESS) screen.
Authorization screen (Enter Passphrase)
Right Display
3. Use the dial and the TONE [0]~[9] buttons to enter the
security code (passphrase) of your wireless LAN access
point. See “How to type a name in BK-9” (p. 27).
4. Press the [WRITE] button.
* You cannot enter a space at the end of the passphrase.
Once successfully connected, you’ll be returned to the status
“Wireless” screen.
Other Settings (Wireless Option)
1. Select the [MENU] button gWireless” g “Wireless
Option”.
The Wireless Option screen will appear.
Right Display
Parameter Explanation
Wireless ID
Species the nal digits of the BK-9’s device name and
Ad-Hoc SSID (BK-9) that will be shown as the instrument
in the wirelessly connected app.
Normally, you should specify “0, but if you have more
than one of the same instrument, you can set the Wireless
ID in the range of 1–99 to change the device name and
Ad-Hoc SSID for each instrument, as follows.
If Wireless ID=0 “BK-9” (default value)
If Wireless ID=1, “BK-9_1”
:
If Wireless ID=99, “BK-9_99”
Parameter Explanation
Ad-Hoc
Mode
Turns Ad-Hoc mode on/o (default = “O”).
The Ad-Hoc Mode ON g OFF setting will take eect after
you’ve turned the unit o, then back on again.
Ad-Hoc
Channel
Species the channel (1–11) for Ad-Hoc mode (default
= 1).
NOTE
* The Wireless Options settings are conrmed and saved when
exiting from the Wireless Options screen.
* The Ad-Hoc Mode ON g OFF setting will take eect after you’ve
turned the unit o, then back on again.
Connecting in Ad-Hoc mode
Heres how to connect in Ad-Hoc mode.
What is Ad-Hoc mode?
Ad-Hoc mode lets you connect the BK-9 directly to an iPhone
or other wireless device without using a wireless LAN access
point. This is a convenient way to use the BK-9 with an iPhone
or other wireless device if youre in a location where the
wireless LAN access point you normally use is unavailable,
such as when youre away from home.
Wireless USB Adapter (sold
separately: WNA1100-RL)
BK-9
iPad etc.
Limitations
The iPod touch or other wireless device connected in Ad-Hoc
mode will be unable to communicate with the Internet or with
another wireless device. However, an iPhone or other wireless
device that has cellular capability will be able to connect to the
Internet via the cellular connection.
Please be aware that if you use a cellular connection for Internet
connectivity, you may incur costs depending on your rate plan.
1. Select the [MENU] button gWireless” g“Wireless
Options”
The Wireless Options screen will appear.
2. Turn the Ad-Hoc Mode “On.
You can use Channel to specify a channel (1–11) for Ad-Hoc mode.
Normally, you won’t need to change the channel. Try changing the
channel only if you have problems connecting.
3. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the Wireless screen.
The Ad-Hoc SSID (BK-9) and the Ad-Hoc Key (a ve-character text
string) will be displayed in the Wireless screen.
Connecting in Ad-Hoc mode
165
Right Display
4. On the iPhone or other wireless device that you want to
connect, select the Ad-Hoc SSID to make the connection.
(For example, on an iPhone, choose [Settings] g [Wi-Fi]
g [Choose a Network] to select the above Ad-Hoc SSID.
A password entry screen will appear; enter the above Ad-
Hoc key.)
For details on how to connect to a wireless LAN from an iPhone or
other device, refer to the owner’s manual of that device.
5. When you want to end the Ad-Hoc mode connection,
restore the iPhone settings in [Settings] g [Wi-Fi] g
[Choose a Network] to their previous state.
NOTE
The Ad-Hoc Mode ON g OFF setting will take eect after you’ve
turned the unit o, then back on again.
Checking the IP Address and MAC
Address (WIRELESS INFO)
Heres how to check the IP address and MAC address.
1. Select the [MENU] button gWireless” g“Wireless Info.
Right Display
MEMO
The MAC address shows the value indicated on the bottom of
the wireless USB adapter (WNA1100-RL; sold separately).
166
27. Troubleshooting
Symptom Action Page
Power turns o on its own.
When 240 minutes have elapsed since you last played or operated this unit, the power will turn o
automatically. (This is the factory setting).
If you don’t need the power to turn o automatically, turn the Auto O setting “O.
143
Power does not turn on.
Is the included AC adaptor/power cord correctly connected to an AC outlet and to the BK-9?
Do not use any AC adaptor or power cord other than the ones included. Doing so will cause
malfunctions.
20
Could you have turned the power on again immediately after turning the power o?
Allow an interval of at least ve seconds before turning the power on again.
-
No sound from the BK-9.
Did you switch the BK-9 on? 24
Could the [VOLUME] knob be turned down? Select a higher setting. -
Is the Expression Pedal connected to BK-9’s PEDAL EXPRESSION jack?
Move the pedal expression all the way down.
-
Can you hear sound through headphones?
If you can hear sound through headphones, it may be that the connection cables are broken, or that
your amp or speaker has malfunctioned. Check the cables and your equipment once again.
-
Could the part volume settings have been minimized?
Check the Volume” setting of each part.
128, 137
Could a MIDI message received from an external MIDI device (volume message or exclusive message)
have lowered the volume?
-
No sound from the 7 right most keys of BK-9’s
keyboard.
Press the [AUDIO KEY] button to disactivate the right most keys for phrase playback 65
No sound from the 12 right most keys of BK-9’s
keyboard.
Press [MELODY INTELL] and [LYRICS] button simultaneously to disactivate the Video Control Function. 161
The volume level of the instrument is too low when
it is connected to an amplier.
Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor?
Use a connection cable that doesn’t contain a resistor.
-
The volume level of the instrument connected to
the BK-9’s INPUT jacks is too low.
Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor?
Use a connection cable that doesn’t contain a resistor.
The pitch of the selected rhythm/song is incorrect.
Is the Tuning” setting appropriate?
Did you transpose the rhythm/song? Also check the “Rhythm Scale Tune parameter.
143
Your voice sounds low.
Could the [MIC VOLUME] knob be turned down? Select a higher setting.
Is a Condenser Microphone connected to the BK-9’s MIC IN jack?
Set the Phantom switch on the rear of BK-9 according to your microphone type.
21
Your voice sounds strange Is the BK-9 equalizer for the MIC IN input set correctly? 143
Pedal switch does not work, or is stuck”.
Is the pedal switch connected correctly?
Plug the cable rmly into the PEDAL HOLD or CONTROL jack.
22
If you disconnect the pedal cord from the BK-9 while the power is on, the pedal eect may remain
“stuck” in the On condition.
You must power-o the BK-9 before connecting or disconnecting the pedal cord.
22
Can’t hear the vocal of an audio le (mp3 or WAVE).
Can’t hear the melody of SMF les.
If the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL) button is lit, the vocal sound will be attenuated.
If the [TRACK MUTE] button is lit, the melody of the MIDI les will be muted. Switch it o.
147
A “buzz is heard from the external amplier.
Is the external amplier or other device used with the BK-9 connected to a dierent AC power outlet?
Connect the amplier or other device to the same AC outlet as the BK-9.
-
Can’t play an audio/mp3-format song Is the song in a format that the BK-9 is able to read? 44
After connecting theBK-9’s USB COMPUTER port
to your computer, the BK-9 doesn’t receive MIDI
messages.
The BK-9 may be receiving on a MIDI channel on which the MIDI controller doesn’t transmit. Correct
the MIDI controller’s transmit channel.
151
Unable to read from/write to USB memory.
Are you using an (optional) Roland USB memory (M-UF series)?
Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed if you use non Roland USB memory products.
-
Check the format of your USB memory. The BK-9 can use USB memory that has been formatted as FAT.
If your USB memory was formatted using any other method, please re-format it using the BK-9.
159
Can’t save to USB memory.
Could the USB memory be write protected? -
Is there sucient free space on the USB memory? -
Audio recording won’t start or stops unexpectedly.
Are you using an (optional) Roland USB memory (M-UF-series)?
Reliable performance cannot be guaranteed if you use non Roland USB memory products.
-
Is there sucient free space on the USB memory? -
The external screen remains dark.
Did you connect it to the VIDEO OUTPUT socket? 23
Did you switch on your TV or external screen and did you select the correct channel? See the TVs or
screens owner manual for how to select the channel that corresponds to the video input to which the
BK-9 is connected.
-
Are you using a supported TV or monitor screen? -
Thin horizontal lines icker in the television screen.
Thin horizontal lines may icker on the television screen, but this is due to the television itself, and is
not a malfunction of the BK-9.
-
Can’t see the edge of the image on the television
screen.
In some cases, the edge of the image may not be visible on the television screen, but this is due to the
characteristics of the television and is not a malfunction on the BK-9.
-
Connecting in Ad-Hoc mode
167
Symptom Action Page
Lyric display is wrong.
For some types of music les, the lyrics may sometimes be displayed incorrectly. Some words may be
incorrectly shown outside the screen display area.
-
Insucient volume from a device connected to the
BK-9’s INPUT jack.
Could you be using a connection cable that contains a built-in resistor? Use a connection cable that
does not contain a resistor.
-
Could the [AUDIO IN] knob be turned down? Select a higher setting. -
Is the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL) button active? (its indicator lights).
Press the [TRACK MUTE] (CENTER CANCEL) button to make its indicator go dark.
46
The songs won’t play.
The le type of the song is not one of the le types that the BK-9 can play. 44
It may be that the song data is damaged. -
A “Frame Oset Sync Error” message appears.
If you use forward and rewind ([ENDING] / [& ] and [INTRO] / [‘ ] buttons) during a playback of mp3
le with a variable bit rate (VBR), this message could appear. It’s a temporary synchronization failure.
You don’t need to take any action.
-
No Performance Lists are displayed.
The USB memory doesn’t contain any Performance List les. -
For some reason the USB memory is not recognized.
Use (optional) Roland USB memory (M-UF series).
-
Can’t connect to a wireless LAN access point.
Make sure that your wireless LAN access point supports WPS.
If your wireless LAN access point does not support WPS, you can connect using the procedure
described in “Connecting to a Wireless LAN Access Point That You Select” (p. 163).
Have you entered the correct password in the iPhone or other wireless device?
Disconnect and reconnect the wireless device and then enter the right BK-9 Ad-Hoc Key. (For
example, on an iPhone, to disconnect, choose [Settings] g [Wi-Fi], press the arrow icon on the
right of the network name and then press “Forget this Network”.
The 802.11a/b wireless standard is not supported. Please use the 802.11g/n (2.4 GHz) wireless
standard.
The WEP authentication method is not supported. Please use the WPA or WPA2 authentication
method.
Make sure that DHCP is enabled for your wireless LAN access point.
If you don’t get connected to the previously-connected wireless LAN access point when you turn
on the power, check and make sure the setting described in “Connecting in Ad-Hoc mode” (p.
164) is OFF.
There is a limit to the connection data that can be remembered. Making a new connection may
cause older connection data to be deleted.
All connection data will be deleted if you execute a factory reset.
If the connection data has been deleted, please re-connect to the wireless LAN access point.
-
The display indicates Access Point Not Supported,
and can’t connect to the wireless LAN access point.
This Access Point is not supported. Please use the WPA or WPA2 authentication method. -
Communication is unstable.
Communication may be unstable depending on the usage of the radio frequency spectrum.
If communication is unstable, the response may be sluggish, or if using audio communication, there
may be dropouts in the audio.
The following actions may improve the situation.
Move the wireless LAN access point and the BK-9 closer to each other.
Change the channel setting of the wireless LAN access point.
-
The BK-9 is not found in the instrument connections
of the app (such as the iPhone app Air Recorder).
Is the BK-9 powered up?
Is the wireless USB adapter (WNA1100-RL) inserted to the BK-9?
Is the BK-9 connected to the wireless LAN?
Are the BK-9 and the iPhone connected to the same network (the same wireless LAN access
point)?
Is the wireless LAN access point set to allow communication between wireless LAN devices?
For details on settings, refer to the owner’s manual of your wireless LAN access point.
-
Your iPhone or iPod touch won’t connect to the
Internet.
Is the wireless LAN access point connected to the Internet?
Could you be connected in Ad-Hoc mode?
The iPod touch or other wireless device connected in Ad-Hoc mode will be unable to
communicate with the Internet or with another wireless device. However, an iPhone or other
wireless device that has cellular capability will be able to connect to the Internet via the cellular
connection. Please be aware that if you use a cellular connection for Internet connectivity, you
may incur costs depending on your rate plan.
A wireless device such as an iPod touch that does not have cellular capability will become unable
to connect to the Internet in this case.
-
168
28. Specications
DISPLAY TYPE
Display
2 displays 160 x 160 pixels, graphic LCD (backlit)
KEYBOARD
Keyboard type
76 velocity sensitive keys Key Touch: High, Medium, Low, Fixed
Keyboard Modes
Organ, Piano
SOUND GENERATOR
Max. Polyphony
128 voices (GM2/GS/XG Lite compatible)
Tones
1718 (Included 22 SuperNATURAL) + User Tone.
Favorite Tone
Possibility to create four lists (UPPER1, UPPER2, LOWER, M. BASS) of 10 frequently used sounds and recall
them instantly.
Drum Sets
77
Multitimbral parts
4 keyboard parts (UPPER1, UPPER2, LOWER, M. BASS) + MELODY INTELLIGENT + 16 song parts
Master Tuning
415.3~466.2 Hz
Key Control (Transpose)
–6~+5 in semitones (for rhythm, smf, mp3/WAVE)
ORGAN SECTION
Harmonic Bar
16’, 5-1/3’, 8’, 4’, 2-2/3’, 2’, 1-3/5’, 1-1/3’, 1’ + LEVEL
Vibrato/Chorus
V-1/V-2/V-3/C-1/C-2/C-3
Percussion
2nd/3rd, Soft, Slow
Rotary Sound
Slow/Fast, Brake, Level
Tone Wheel Type
50/60/70
Amplier Type
TYPE 1/TYPE 2/TYPE 3/TYPE 4/ TYPE 5
EFFECTS
Real Time Parts (UPPER1, UPPER2, LOWER, M. BASS)
Reverb and Chorus: selectable via Tone Part eects
2 Mfx (84 Mfx Editable Macro) (selectable via Tone Part eects)
Part EQ
Rhythms/SMF section
Reverb: 8 types (selectable via Makeup Tools)
Chorus: 8 types (selectable via Makeup Tools)
3 Mfx (84 Mfx Editable Macro) (selectable via Makeup Tools)
Part EQ
MIC
2-band EQ +gain for each band , Reverb
BACKING SECTION
Rhythms
Over 500 in 10 “Rhythm” families
Real-time player
Rhythms (STL), SMF (Format 0/1), KAR, mp3, WAVE
Dynamic Arranger
Yes
Tempo Change
20~250 BPM for SMF and rhythms
Time Stretch
75~125% for mp3 and WAVE
One Touch memories
4 suitable tones for each rhythm (Programmable).
Track Mute
For Rhythms/SMF
Center Cancel
For mp3/WAVE
Fade In/Out
Yes, for Songs and Rhythms
Mark & Jump Function (SMF)
Yes, four “Mark locations that can be saved in the song
Rhythm Composer
Internal Rhythm Composer
Rhythm and SMF Makeup Tools
Instrument-oriented editing
AUDIO RECORDING
Media
USB Flash memory
Save format
Audio les (WAVE 44.1 kHz, 16-bit linear), MIDI les (SMF)
SEQUENCERS
16 tracks sequencer
Internal 16 tracks MIDI sequencer with microscope and macro editing functions
Chord Loop
Loop/Sequencer Mode
USER DRUM KIT
User Drum Kit
4 dedicated to the keyboard real-time parts (KBU1, KBU2, KBU3, KBU4)
1 dedicated to a Rhythm or Song (RSU1)
Editing of Single Drum Instrument sound
Yes
Exporting and Importing User Drum Kit
Yes, by USB Flash memory
Connecting in Ad-Hoc mode
169
METRONOME
Time Signature
1~32/16, 1~32/8,, 1~32/4, 1~32/2
Mode
Always, Play, Rec
Count In
O, 1 bar, 2 bars
Volume
Internal and external by METRONOME OUT jack
PERFORMANCE MEMORIES
Performance Lists
Unlimited number (storage on USB memory)
Over 1000 “Music Assistant” memories (internal memory)
5 “Factory Song” memories (internal memory)
Editing Function Delete, Move, Rename. Copy
Performance memories per List
Max. 999
Importing User Programs for previous backing
keyboards
Yes, from G-/VA-/E-series
SEARCH FUNCTION
Quick location of Rhythms, and Songs on the connected USB memory
DEMO
Demo
Yes
LYRICS
Lyrics
SMF, mp3/WAVE, mp3+CDG (mp3+CDG on video output socket only)
SLIDE SHOWS
Picture folder linked to songs (recommended resolution: 512 x 384 or 1024 x 768 pixels)
PANEL CONTROLS
Rotary encoder
Data dial with push switching function
VOLUME
1 Knob
AUDIO IN
1 Knob
MIC VOLUME
1 Knob
MIC REVERB
1 Knob
BALANCE (Backing/Keyboard)
1 Knob
Pitch Bend/Modulation Lever
1
Mixer/Harmonic bars section
10 sliders
D-BEAM controller
1
Assign Switches
4
CONNECTORS
Audio OUTPUT jacks (R, L/Mono)
1/4” phone type
PHONES jack
Stereo 1/4” phone type
Audio INPUT jack (R, L/Mono)
1/4” phone type
MIC IN
1/4 inch phone type/XLR type (Phantom power switch OFF/ON)
METRONOME OUT
1/4” phone type
MIDI connectors
THRU, IN, OUT (Visual Control function)
USB ports
USB COMPUTER connector (Type B, reception and transmission of MIDI data)
USB MEMORY (Type A, data storage devices)
Foot pedal jacks
HOLD, EXPRESSION , CONTROL (assignable)
FC-7 PEDAL
1 socket (assignable)
VIDEO OUTPUT jack
RCA-type (CVBS, PAL or NTSC – selectable)
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
Power supply
AC adaptor (PSB-1U adaptor)
Current Draw
1100 mA
Auto O function
O, 10min, 30min, 240min
Dimensions
Without music rest:
1251 (W) x 345 (D) x 123 (H) mm
49-1/4 (W) x 13-5/8 (D) x 4-7/8 (H) inches
Including music rest:
1251 (W) x 445 (D) x 308 (H) mm
49-1/4 (W) x 17-9/16 (D) x 12-1/8 (H) inches
Weight
9,4 kg (excluding AC adaptor and music rest)
20 lbs 12 oz (excluding AC adaptor and music rest)
Specications
170
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
Owners Manual
PSB-1U AC adaptor,
Power cord (for connecting the AC adaptor)
Music rest
OPTIONS
USB
USB ash memory (M-UF-series)
Wireless USB Adaptor (WNA1100-RL)
Pedals
DP-series/BOSS FS-5U pedal switch
Expression EV-5, EV-7
FC-7 footswitch
Microphone
Roland DR Series
Headphone
Roland RH Series
Vocal Performer
VE-5, VE-20
Amplier
CM-110, CM-220
Stand
KS-12
NOTE
In the interest of product improvement, the specications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice.
171
29. MIDI Implementation Chart
Function... Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1-16
1–16, O
1–16
1–16, O
Up1= Ch. 4, Up2= Ch. 6, Lower= Ch. 11,
M. Bass= Ch. 12, M.Intell= Ch. 15
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4 (M=1)
**************
Mode 3
Mode 3, 4 (M = 1) *2
Note
Number :
True Voice
0~127
*************
0–127
0–127
Velocity
Note On
Note O
O
X
O
X
After
Touch
Key’s
Channel’s
X
O *1
O
O *1
Pitch Bend O *1 O *1
Control
Change
0, 32
1
5
6, 38
7
10
11
12
13
16
64
65
66
67
69
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
80
81
82
84
91
93
98, 99
100, 101
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O (Reverb)
O (Chorus)
O
O
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
Bank Select
Modulation
Portamento Time
Data Entry
Volume
Panpot
Expression
Eect Control 1 MSB
Eect Control 2 MSB
C1 - Noise level - Key Off Nose - Mallet Hardness *3
Hold 1
Portamento
Sostenuto
Soft
Hold 2
Resonance
Realease Time
Attack Time
Cuto
Decay Time
Vibrato Rate
Vibrato Depth
Vibrato Delay
Dead Stroke - Mute - Finger Piking - Staccato - *3
Harmonics - Octave Tone - Fall - *3
Subtone (Alto Sax)
Portamento Control
Eect 1 Depth
Eect 3 Depth
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
Program
Change True Number
O
*****
*1 O
0–127 Program No. 1–128
System Exclusive O *1 O
System
Common
Song Position Pointer
Song Select
Tune Request
O
X
X
*1 O
X
X
System
Real Time
Clock
Commands
O
O
*1
*1
O
O
Aux
Messages
All Sound O
Reset All Controllers
Local On/O
All Notes O
Active Sensing
System Reset
X
X
O
X
O
X
*1
O (120, 126, 127)
O (121)
O (Song parts)
O (123–125)
O
X
Notes
*1 O X is selectable
*2 Recognized as M = 1 even if M
1.
*3 It depends on the selected Super Natural tone
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
Backing Keyboard
Model: BK-9
Date: February 2013
Version: 1.00
172
30. Chord Intelligence Table
Cm7 ( 5 )
C C# D E E F
CM7 C#M7 DM7 E M7 EM7 FM7
C7 C#7 D7 E 7 E7 F7
Cm C#m Dm E m Em Fm
Cm7 C#m7 Dm7 E m7 Em7 Fm7
Cdim C#dim Ddim E dim Edim Fdim
Dm7 ( 5 ) Em7 ( 5 )
Caug C#aug Daug E aug Eaug Faug
C7sus4 C#7sus4 D7sus4 E 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4
Fm7 ( 5 )E m7 ( 5 )C#m7 ( 5 )
Csus4 C#sus4 Dsus4 E sus4 Esus4 Fsus4
C7/13 C#7/13 D7/13 E 7/13 E7/13 F7/13
CmM7 C#mM7 DmM7 E mM7 EmM7 FmM7
Chord Intelligence Table
173
F# G A A B B
F#M7 GM7 A M7 AM7 B M7 BM7
F#7 G7 A 7 A7 B 7 B7
F#m Gm A m Am B m Bm
F#m7 Gm7 A m7 Am7 B m7 Bm7
F#dim Gdim A dim Adim B dim Bdim
Gm7 ( 5 ) Am7 ( 5 ) Bm7 ( 5 )
F#aug Gaug A aug Aaug B aug Baug
F#7sus4 G7sus4 A 7sus4 A7sus4 B 7sus4 B7sus4
B m7 ( 5 )A m7 ( 5 )F#m7 ( 5 )
F#sus4 Gsus4 A sus4 Asus4 B sus4 Bsus4
F#7/13 G7/13 A 7/13 A7/13 B 7/13 B7/13
F#mM7 GmM7 A mM7 AmM7 B mM7 BmM7
174
Symbols
1st Note ................... 143
2nd Bar .................... 143
2nd Tone .................. 141
16-Track Sequencer ......... 81
A
AC Adaptor ................. 20
Access Point ............... 163
Acc/Rit .................... 138
Ad-Hoc .................... 164
Arranger Hold ............. 138
Arranger Setting ........... 137
Assign Switches ........ 53,139
Attack ...................... 99
Audio Key .................. 65
Audio Key Set ............... 65
Audio Phrases .............. 65
AUTO FILL IN ................ 38
AUTO FILL IN button ........ 15
Automatic Accompaniments 36
Auto O ............ 17,25,143
B
BACKING .................. 168
BASS INV ................... 37
BASS INV button ............ 14
beat .................. 36,37,39
Bender Assign ............. 130
Bender Range .............. 130
C
Center Cancel ............... 46
Chord Intelligence ......... 172
Chord Loop ................. 79
Chorus ..................... 98
Chorus Send ............... 128
Coarse Tune ............... 129
Compressor ................ 149
Copy Preset To User DrumKit 123
Cursor ...................... 26
Cut O ..................... 98
D
D-BEAM .................... 53
DC IN jack .................. 20
DC IN socket ................ 17
Decay ...................... 99
Delete ................... 60,61
Deleting .................... 50
Demo ...................... 25
Device Name .............. 163
Display ..................... 26
Display Contrast ........... 142
Drum Instrument .......... 100
Dynamic Arranger ......... 139
E
Edit EQ ..................... 99
ENDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
ENDING button ............. 15
Eq Part Edit ................ 128
Equalizer .............. 99,150
EXIT button ................. 16
Export Drumkit ............ 122
External Lyrics ............. 127
F
Factory Reset .............. 159
FAVORITE button ............ 16
Favorite Tones .............. 35
FC-7 ....................... 146
Fill Ritardando ............. 138
Filter ........................ 63
Filtering Performance ....... 63
Filters On/O ............... 63
Fine Tune .................. 129
Folder ...................... 50
Format .................... 159
G
Global ..................... 142
H
Harmonic Bars .............. 29
Headphones ................ 20
Help ........................ 27
Hold Pedal ................. 141
I
Initializing a User Drum Kit . 124
Intell Threshold ............ 141
Internal Lyrics .............. 127
INTRO ................. 37,167
INTRO button ............... 15
IP Address ................. 165
J
K
KBU1 ...................... 120
KBU2 ................. 120,168
KBU3 ................. 120,168
KBU4 ................. 120,168
Key .................... 52,136
Key Touch ................. 128
L
LAN ....................... 162
Language ............. 146,148
Level ...................... 141
Listening ................... 76
Local ...................... 152
Lower Hold ................ 136
Lyrics .................. 47,127
Lyrics Settings ............. 147
M
MAC Address .............. 165
Main Page .................. 26
Makeup Tools ............... 97
Mark & Jump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Master Track ................ 93
Master Tuning ............. 168
Tuning ..................... 143
Melody Intell ................ 52
Melody Intelligent ......... 141
Menu ...................... 127
Metronome ............ 55,147
Metronome Settings ........ 55
Mfx .................... 99,129
Mfx Edit ............... 99,131
Mfx Switch ................. 131
Mfx Type ............... 99,131
Micro Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Microphone ................ 21
MIDI ....................... 151
MIDI Address .............. 159
MIDI Channels .... 149,150,151
MIDI Implementation Chart 171
MIDI IN & OUT sockets . . . . . . . 17
MIDI Parameters ........... 151
MIDI Tx/Rx ................. 152
MIDI Visual Control ......... 161
Mode ...................... 137
Move ....................... 61
Multi-Eects ................ 34
Music Assistant ............. 57
31. Index
Index
175
Music Rest .................. 24
Mute ...................... 137
N
Name of a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Numeric .................... 33
O
Octave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Octave Shift ............... 129
One Touch .................. 41
One Touch Edit ......... 42,149
One Touch Hold ............ 144
One Touch memory ......... 43
Organ Commons ........... 134
Organ eects ............... 32
Organ Mod ................. 28
P
Panpot ................ 98,128
Pedal Control .............. 145
PEDAL HOLD/SWITCH ....... 17
Pedal Switch ............... 143
Perc Mute ................... 98
Performance ............. 57,58
Performance Edit .......... 127
Performance Hold ......... 144
Performance Lists ........... 57
PERFORMANCE WRITE button 15
PHONE/OUTPUT ............ 17
pictures .................... 73
Play All Songs ............... 45
PlayBack Restart
PlayBack Continue 68
Playback Type ............... 68
Playing Back Rhythms ....... 38
Portamento Mode ......... 129
Portamento Time .......... 129
Power On/O ............... 24
POWER switch .............. 17
Q
QUANTIZE .................. 85
R
Recording .................. 75
Release ..................... 99
Rename .................... 59
Resonance .................. 98
Restoring User Drum Kits ... 123
Reverb ...................... 98
Reverb Level & Chorus Level 101
Reverb Send ............... 128
Rhythm Composer ......... 103
RHYTHM FAMILY buttons .... 14
Rhythm Parts .............. 137
Rhythms ................. 36,38
Rhythm/SMF Track Mute ... 147
Rhythms MIDI Address ..... 159
Ritardando/Accelerando ... 139
RSU1 ...................... 120
S
Save .................. 142,148
Scale Tune ................. 140
Scale Tune Switch ..... 140,144
Search ...................... 50
Select Access Point ......... 163
slide show .................. 73
Solo ................... 98,137
Specications .............. 168
Split ............... 32,134,136
Split Point ................. 136
Stand ....................... 24
START/STOP] ................ 36
START/STOP button ......... 15
SuperNATURAL .......... 29,53
Switch ..................... 141
SYNC START] ................ 36
SYNC START button ......... 14
T
TAP TEMPO button .......... 14
television set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tempo ..................... 138
TEMPO buttons ............. 14
TempoCh .................. 138
TempoCh Acc/Rit .......... 138
TempoCh CPT .............. 138
TempoCh Fill Rit ........... 138
Time Stretching ............. 69
TONE buttons ............... 16
Tone Part Eects ........... 131
Tone Part MFX ............. 131
Tone Part View ............. 127
Tones ....................... 28
Track Edit ................... 84
Track Mute .................. 46
Troubleshooting ........... 166
Tuning ..................... 143
Type ....................... 138
U
Undo Changes ............. 101
USB COMPUTER port ........ 17
USB Memory ................ 45
USB MEMORY port ....... 16,17
USB player .................. 44
User Drum Kit .............. 120
Utility ...................... 143
V
VARIATION [1], [2], [3], [4] .... 37
VARIATION 1/2/3/4 buttons .. 15
Velocity ..................... 98
Vibrato Delay ............... 99
Vibrato Depth ............... 99
Vibrato Rate ................ 99
Video Equipment .......... 161
Video Settings ............. 147
VIMA TUNES ................ 73
Visual Control .............. 161
V-LINK ..................... 161
Vocal Performer ............. 22
Volume ............ 98,128,137
VOLUME knob .............. 14
W
Wireless ................... 162
Wireless Info ............... 163
Wireless Option ............ 163
WPS ....................... 162
X
Y
Z
176
MEMO
177
MEMO
178
Information
When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland
distributor in your country as shown below.
AFRICA
EGYPT
Al Fanny Trading Oce
9, EBN Hagar Al Askalany Street,
ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis,
Cairo 11341, EGYPT
TEL: (022)-417-1828
REUNION
MARCEL FO-YAM Sarl
25 Rue Jules Hermann,
Chaudron - BP79 97 491
Ste Clotilde Cedex,
REUNION ISLAND
TEL: (0262) 218-429
SOUTH AFRICA
Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd.
Royal Cape Park, Unit 24
Londonderry Road, Ottery 7800
Cape Town, SOUTH AFRICA
TEL: (021) 799 4900
ASIA
CHINA
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd.
5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road
Shanghai 200090, CHINA
TEL: (021) 5580-0800
Roland Shanghai Electronics
Co.,Ltd. (BEIJING OFFICE)
3F, Soluxe Fortune Building
63 West Dawang Road, Chaoyang
District, Beijing, CHINA
TEL: (010) 5960-2565
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music
11/F Silvercord Tower 1
30 Canton Rd
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon,
HONG KONG
TEL: 852-2737-7688
Parsons Music Ltd.
8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39
Chatham Road South, T.S.T,
Kowloon, HONG KONG
TEL: 852-2333-1863
INDIA
Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd.
411, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi
Flats Compound O. Dr. Edwin
Moses Road, Mumbai-400011,
INDIA
TEL: (022) 2493 9051
INDONESIA
PT. Citra Intirama
Ruko Garden Shopping Arcade
Unit 8 CR, Podomoro City
Jl.Letjend. S.Parman Kav.28
Jakarta Barat 11470, INDONESIA
TEL: (021) 5698-5519/5520
KAZAKHSTAN
Alatau Dybystary
141 Abylai-Khan ave, 1st oor,
050000 Almaty, KAZAKHSTAN
TEL: (727) 2725477
FAX: (727) 2720730
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
1461-9, Seocho-Dong,
Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA
TEL: (02) 3486-8855
MALAYSIA/
SINGAPORE
Roland Asia Pacic Sdn. Bhd.
45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39,
Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling
Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA
TEL: (03) 7805-3263
PHILIPPINES
G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue
Makati, Metro Manila 1200,
PHILIPPINES
TEL: (02) 899 9801
TAIWAN
ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE
CO., LTD.
9F-5, No. 112 Chung Shan
North Road Sec. 2 Taipei 104,
TAIWAN R.O.C.
TEL: (02) 2561 3339
THAILAND
Theera Music Co. , Ltd.
100-108 Soi Verng Nakornkasem,
New Road,Sumpantawong,
Bangkok 10100, THAILAND
TEL: (02) 224-8821
VIET NAM
VIET THUONG CORPORATION
386 CACH MANG THANG TAM ST.
DIST.3, HO CHI MINH CITY,
VIET NAM
TEL: (08) 9316540
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND
Roland Corporation
Australia Pty.,Ltd.
38 Campbell Avenue
Dee Why West. NSW 2099,
AUSTRALIA
For Australia
TEL: (02) 9982 8266
For New Zealand
TEL: (09) 3098 715
CENTRAL/LATIN
AMERICA
ARGENTINA
Instrumentos Musicales S.A.
Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires, ARGENTINA
TEL: (011) 4508-2700
BARBADOS
A&B Music Supplies LTD
12 Webster Industrial Park
Wildey, St.Michael, BARBADOS
TEL: (246) 430-1100
BRAZIL
Roland Brasil Ltda.
Rua San Jose, 211
Parque Industrial San Jose
Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL
TEL: (011) 4615 5666
CHILE
Comercial Fancy II S.A.
Rut.: 96.919.420-1
Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor
Santiago - Centro, CHILE
TEL: (02) 384-2180
COLOMBIA
Centro Musical Ltda.
Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9
Medellin, COLOMBIA
TEL: (574) 3812529
COSTA RICA
JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales
Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237,
San Jose, COSTA RICA
TEL: 258-0211
CURACAO
Zeelandia Music Center Inc.
Orionweg 30
Curacao, Netherland Antilles
TEL: (305) 5926866
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez
Calle Roberto Pastoriza #325
Sanchez Naco
Santo Domingo,
DOMINICAN REPUBLIC
TEL: (809) 683 0305
ECUADOR
Mas Musika
Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma
Guayaquil - ECUADOR
TEL: (593-4) 2302364
EL SALVADOR
OMNI MUSIC
75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda
Juan Pablo II,
Edicio No.4010 San Salvador,
EL SALVADOR
TEL: 262-0788
GUATEMALA
Casa Instrumental
Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11
Ciudad de Guatemala,
GUATEMALA
TEL: (502) 599-2888
HONDURAS
Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V.
BO.Paz Barahona
3 Ave.11 Calle S.O
San Pedro Sula, HONDURAS
TEL: (504) 553-2029
MARTINIQUE
Musique & Son
Z.I.Les Mangle
97232 Le Lamentin,
MARTINIQUE F.W.I.
TEL: 596 596 426860
MEXICO
Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.
Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar
de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.,
MEXICO
TEL: (55) 5668-6699
NICARAGUA
Bansbach Instrumentos
Musicales Nicaragua
Altamira D'Este Calle Principal
de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida
1 Cuadra al Lago.#503
Managua, NICARAGUA
TEL: (505) 277-2557
PANAMA
SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A.
Boulevard Andrews, Albrook,
Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA
TEL: 315-0101
PARAGUAY
Distribuidora De Instrumentos
Musicales
J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira
Asuncion, PARAGUAY
TEL: (595) 21 492147
PERU
Audionet Distribuciones
Musicales SAC
Av. 2 de Mayo 562
Miraores
Lima, PERU
TEL: (511) 447-0691
TRINIDAD
AMR Ltd
Ground Floor
Maritime Plaza
Barataria TRINIDAD W.I.
TEL: (868) 638 6385
URUGUAY
Todo Musica S.A.
Francisco Acuna de Figueroa
1771
C.P.: 11.800
Montevideo, URUGUAY
TEL: (02) 924-2335
VENEZUELA
Instrumentos Musicales
Allegro,C.A.
Av.las industrias edf.Guitar import
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo
Caracas, VENEZUELA
TEL: (212) 244-1122
EUROPE
BELGIUM/FRANCE/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG
Roland Central Europe N.V.
Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM
TEL: (014) 575811
BOSNIA AND
HERZEGOVINA
Mix-AP Music
78000 Banja Luka, Veselina
Maslese 3,
BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA
TEL: 65 403 168
CROATIA
ART-CENTAR
Degenova 3.
HR - 10000 Zagreb, CROATIA
TEL: (1) 466 8493
CZECH REP.
CZECH REPUBLIC DISTRIBUTOR
s.r.o
Pod Bání 8
180 00 Praha 8, CZECH REP.
TEL: 266 312 557
DENMARK/ESTONIA/
LATVIA/LITHUANIA
Roland Scandinavia A/S
Skagerrakvej 7 Postbox 880
DK-2100 Copenhagen,
DENMARK
TEL: 39166222
FINLAND
Roland Scandinavia As, Filial
Finland
Vanha Nurmijarventie 62
01670 Vantaa, FINLAND
TEL: (0) 9 68 24 020
GERMANY/AUSTRIA
ROLAND Germany GmbH.
Adam-Opel-Strasse 4, 64569
Nauheim, GERMANY
TEL: 6152 95546-00
GREECE/CYPRUS
STOLLAS S.A.
Music Sound Light
155, New National Road
Patras 26442, GREECE
TEL: 2610 435400
HUNGARY/ROMANIA
Roland East Europe Ltd.
2045. Törökbálint, FSD Park 3. ép.,
Budapest, HUNGARY
TEL: (23) 511 011
IRELAND
Roland Ireland
E2 Calmount Park, Calmount
Avenue, Dublin 12,
Republic of IRELAND
TEL: (01) 4294444
ITALY
Roland Italy S. p. A.
Viale delle Industrie 8,
20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY
TEL: (02) 937-78300
MACEDONIA
MK MJUZIK
Alekso Demnievski-Bauman 9-3,
1400 Veles, MACEDONIA
TEL: 70 264 458
MONTENEGRO
MAX-AP
Przno, Kamenovo bb., 86000
Budva, MONTENEGRO
TEL: 68 050 112
NORWAY
Roland Scandinavia Avd.
Kontor Norge
Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95
Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo,
NORWAY
TEL: 2273 0074
POLAND
ROLAND POLSKA SP. Z O.O.
ul. Kty Grodziskie 16B
03-289 Warszawa, POLAND
TEL: (022) 678 9512
PORTUGAL
Roland Systems Group EMEA, S.L.
Branch Oce Porto
Edifício Tower Plaza
Rotunda Eng. Edgar Cardoso 23,
4-B
4400-676 Vila Nova de Gaia,
PORTUGAL
TEL: (+351) 22 608 00 60
RUSSIA
Roland Music LLC
Dorozhnaya ul.3,korp.6
117 545 Moscow, RUSSIA
TEL: (495) 981-4967
SERBIA
Music AP
Sutjeska br. 5 XS - 24413 PALIC,
SERBIA
TEL: (0) 24 539 395
SLOVAKIA
DAN Acoustic s.r.o.
Povazská 18.
SK - 940 01 Nové Zámky,
SLOVAKIA
TEL: (035) 6424 330
SPAIN
Roland Systems Group EMEA, S.L.
Paseo García Faria, 33-35
08005 Barcelona, SPAIN
TEL: 93 493 91 00
SWEDEN
Roland Scandinavia A/S
SWEDISH SALES OFFICE
Mårbackagatan 31, 4 tr.
SE-123 43 Farsta, SWEDEN
TEL: (0) 8 683 04 30
SWITZERLAND
Roland (Switzerland) AG
Landstrasse 5, Postfach,
CH-4452 Itingen, SWITZERLAND
TEL: (061) 975-9987
UKRAINE
EURHYTHMICS Ltd.
P.O.Box: 37-a.
Nedecey Str. 30
UA - 89600 Mukachevo, UKRAINE
TEL: (03131) 414-40
UNITED KINGDOM
Roland (U.K.) Ltd.
Atlantic Close, SWANSEA SA7 9FJ,
UNITED KINGDOM
TEL: (01792) 702701
MIDDLE EAST
BAHRAIN
Moon Stores
No.1231&1249 Rumaytha
Building Road 3931,
Manama 339, BAHRAIN
TEL: 17 813 942
IRAN
MOCO INC.
Jadeh Makhsous Karaj (K-9),
Nakhe Zarin Ave.
Jalal Street, Reza Alley No.4
Tehran 1389716791, IRAN
TEL: (021)-44545370-5
ISRAEL
Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons
Ltd.
8 Retzif Ha'alia Hashnia St.
Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL
TEL: (03) 6823666
JORDAN
MUSIC HOUSE CO. LTD.
FREDDY FOR MUSIC
P. O. Box 922846
Amman 11192, JORDAN
TEL: (06) 5692696
KUWAIT
EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI &
SONS CO.
Al-Yousi Service Center
P.O.Box 126 (Safat) 13002,
KUWAIT
TEL: 00 965 802929
LEBANON
Chahine S.A.L.
George Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg.,
Achraeh, P.O.Box: 16-5857
Beirut, LEBANON
TEL: (01) 20-1441
OMAN
TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C.
Malatan House No.1
Al Noor Street, Ruwi
SULTANATE OF OMAN
TEL: 2478 3443
QATAR
AL-EMADI TRADING &
CONTRACTING CO.
P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR
TEL: 4423-554
SAUDI ARABIA
Adawliah Universal Electronics
APL
Behind Pizza Inn
Prince Turkey Street
Adawliah Building,
PO BOX 2154,
Al Khobar 31952,
SAUDI ARABIA
TEL: (03) 8643601
SYRIA
Technical Light & Sound Center
PO Box 13520 Bldg No.49
Khaled Abn Alwalid St.
Damascus, SYRIA
TEL: (011) 223-5384
TURKEY
ZUHAL DIS TICARET A.S.
Galip Dede Cad. No.33
Beyoglu, Istanbul, TURKEY
TEL: (0212) 249 85 10
U.A.E.
Adawliah Universal Electronics
APL
Omar bin alkhattab street, sh
round about, nayef area, deira,
Dubai, U.A.E.
TEL: (04) 2340442
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Head Oce)
5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B.
C., V6V 2M4, CANADA
TEL: (604) 270 6626
Roland Canada Ltd.
(Toronto Oce)
170 Admiral Boulevard
Mississauga On L5T 2N6,
CANADA
TEL: (905) 362 9707
U. S. A.
Roland Corporation U.S.
5100 S. Eastern Avenue
Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938,
U. S. A.
TEL: (323) 890 3700
As of Oct. 1, 2012 (ROLAND)
179
For EU Countries
For China
602.00.0604.01 RES 964-13 BK-9 Owners Manual - E
25


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules
1

Forum

roland-bk-9
  • New owner BK 9. How to add speaker and what kind , wats ?? totally ignorant. Submitted on 7-1-2023 at 03:00

    Reply Report abuse


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Roland BK-9 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Roland BK-9 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 59,06 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Roland BK-9

Roland BK-9 Additional guide - English - 12 pages

Roland BK-9 Additional guide - German - 9 pages

Roland BK-9 User Manual - German - 160 pages

Roland BK-9 User Manual - Dutch - 160 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info